Equinix Aktienkurs
Insights zu Equinix
Insights
Mit KI besser investieren
aktien.guide Unlimited – alle Details der KI-Analysen
👉 Detailliertere Insights
👉 Exklusive Einblicke in Chancen & Risiken
👉 Klare Antworten auf deine Fragen
Mit KI besser investieren
aktien.guide Unlimited – alle Details der KI-Analysen
👉 Detailliertere Insights
👉 Exklusive Einblicke in Chancen & Risiken
👉 Klare Antworten auf deine Fragen
Mit KI besser investieren
aktien.guide Unlimited – alle Details der KI-Analysen
👉 Detailliertere Insights
👉 Exklusive Einblicke in Chancen & Risiken
👉 Klare Antworten auf deine Fragen
Mit KI besser investieren
aktien.guide Unlimited – alle Details der KI-Analysen
👉 Detailliertere Insights
👉 Exklusive Einblicke in Chancen & Risiken
👉 Klare Antworten auf deine Fragen
Ist Equinix eine Topscorer-Aktie nach der Dividenden-, High-Growth-Investing- oder Levermann-Strategie?
Als kostenloser aktien.guide Basis-Nutzer kannst Du die Scores zu allen 7.921 weltweiten Aktien einsehen.
aktien.guide Premium
aktien.guide Unlimited
Kennzahlen
📘 Marktkapitalisierung
📈 Was ist das?
Die Marktkapitalisierung zeigt, wie viel ein Unternehmen laut Börse aktuell wert ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Sie hilft Unternehmen in Größenklassen (Large, Mid, Small Cap) einzuordnen und gibt Hinweise auf Marktmacht und Stabilität.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Große Unternehmen gelten als stabiler, zahlen oft Dividenden, wachsen aber langsamer.
- Kleine Firmen können stärker wachsen, sind aber schwankungsanfälliger.
- Die Marktkapitalisierung ist ein guter Indikator für Unternehmensgröße, aber kein Maß für Unter- oder Überbewertung.
📘 Enterprise Value (Unternehmenswert)
📈 Was ist das?
Der Enterprise Value (EV) zeigt, was ein Unternehmen tatsächlich kostet, wenn man es komplett übernehmen würde – inklusive Schulden und abzüglich Cash.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
(= Marktkapitalisierung + Nettoverschuldung)
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Der EV ist eine realistischere Bewertungsbasis als die Marktkapitalisierung, da er die Kapitalstruktur berücksichtigt. Er ist Grundlage für Kennzahlen wie EV/FCF oder EV/Sales.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Der Enterprise Value zeigt, was ein Unternehmen tatsächlich wert ist – unabhängig davon, wie es finanziert ist.
- Er ist besonders wichtig für professionelle Investoren, da er eine objektivere Grundlage für Bewertungsvergleiche bietet als die Marktkapitalisierung allein.
- Ein Unternehmen mit hoher Verschuldung erscheint im EV teurer, eines mit viel Cash günstiger – auch wenn sie an der Börse gleich viel wert sind.
📘 Nettoverschuldung
📈 Was ist das?
Die Nettoverschuldung zeigt, wie viele Schulden nach Abzug des verfügbaren Cashs tatsächlich verbleiben.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Sie zeigt, wie stark ein Unternehmen von Fremdkapital abhängig ist – und wie gut es in der Lage ist, seine Schulden kurzfristig zu bedienen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine niedrige oder negative Nettoverschuldung bedeutet hohe finanzielle Stabilität.
- Unternehmen mit viel Cash und geringer Verschuldung sind besser gerüstet für Krisen.
- Eine hohe Nettoverschuldung erhöht das Risiko – besonders bei steigenden Zinsen oder konjunkturellen Schwächen.
📘 Cash
📈 Was ist das?
Der Cashbestand zeigt, wie viele liquide Mittel einem Unternehmen sofort zur Verfügung stehen.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Er gibt Auskunft über die finanzielle Flexibilität: Ein hoher Cashbestand ermöglicht Investitionen, Rückkäufe oder Krisenresistenz.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hoher Cashbestand zeigt finanzielle Stärke und Handlungsspielraum.
- Cash kann für Investitionen, Schuldentilgung oder Aktienrückkäufe genutzt werden.
- Allerdings: Zu viel ungenutztes Kapital kann auch auf mangelnde Investitionsideen hinweisen.
📘 Anzahl ausstehender Aktien
📈 Was ist das?
Die Anzahl ausstehender Aktien gibt an, wie viele Aktien eines Unternehmens aktuell im Umlauf sind und von Investoren gehalten werden.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Sie ist die Grundlage für viele Kennzahlen wie Gewinn je Aktie (EPS), Marktkapitalisierung oder KGV.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Je weniger Aktien im Umlauf sind, desto höher fällt z. B. der Gewinn je Aktie aus – wichtig für Bewertung und Dividendenrendite.
- Aktienrückkäufe verringern die Anzahl ausstehender Aktien – und steigern den Wert je Aktie.
- Kapitalerhöhungen haben den gegenteiligen Effekt: mehr Aktien → Verwässerung der bestehenden Anteile.
📘 Kurs-Gewinn-Verhältnis (KGV)
📈 Was ist das?
Das KGV zeigt, wie oft der Gewinn pro Aktie im aktuellen Aktienkurs enthalten ist – also wie „teuer“ eine Aktie im Verhältnis zum Gewinn ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Das KGV gehört zu den bekanntesten Bewertungskennzahlen. Es hilft Anlegern einzuschätzen, ob eine Aktie im Vergleich zu ihrem Gewinn eher günstig oder teuer erscheint.
🧮 Berechnung
📊 KGV (TTM) = bezogen auf den Gewinn der letzten 12 Monate (Trailing Twelve Months):🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein niedriges KGV kann auf eine günstige Bewertung hindeuten – oder auf Probleme im Geschäftsmodell.
- Ein hohes KGV kann Wachstumserwartungen widerspiegeln – oder eine überbewertete Aktie.
📘 Kurs-Umsatz-Verhältnis (KUV)
📈 Was ist das?
Das KUV zeigt, wie viel Anleger für 1 € Umsatz eines Unternehmens zahlen – unabhängig vom Gewinn.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Das KUV ist besonders bei wachstumsstarken oder noch nicht profitablen Unternehmen hilfreich. Es zeigt, wie hoch der Umsatz an der Börse bewertet wird.
🧮 Berechnung
Marktkapitalisierung = 98,82 Mrd. $ | Umsatz (TTM) = 9,44 Mrd. $
Marktkapitalisierung = 98,82 Mrd. $ | Umsatz erwartet = 10,44 Mrd. $
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein niedriges KUV kann auf Unterbewertung hindeuten – oder auf schwache Margen.
- Ein hohes KUV kann hohe Erwartungen widerspiegeln – oder übermäßigen Optimismus.
- Besonders sinnvoll bei Wachstumsunternehmen, bei denen der Gewinn oder Free Cashflow (noch) keine Aussagekraft hat.
📘 Unternehmenswert zu Umsatz (EV/Sales)
📈 Was ist das?
EV/Sales zeigt, wie viel Anleger für 1 € Umsatz eines Unternehmens zahlen, wenn man auch Schulden und Cash berücksichtigt – es ist eine kapitalstrukturbereinigte Version des KUV.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Diese Kennzahl eignet sich besonders für den Vergleich von Unternehmen mit unterschiedlicher Verschuldung – sie zeigt, wie teuer ein Unternehmen tatsächlich im Verhältnis zum Umsatz ist.
🧮 Berechnung
Enterprise Value = 117,69 Mrd. $ | Umsatz (TTM) = 9,44 Mrd. $
Enterprise Value = 117,69 Mrd. $ | Umsatz erwartet = 10,44 Mrd. $
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- EV/Sales ist neutral gegenüber der Kapitalstruktur und eignet sich gut für Unternehmensvergleiche.
- Ein niedriges Verhältnis kann auf eine günstig bewertete Aktie hindeuten – ein hohes Verhältnis auf hohe Erwartungen oder Überbewertung.
- Besonders nützlich bei wachstumsstarken, noch nicht profitablen Firmen.
📘 Unternehmenswert zu Free Cashflow (EV/FCF)
📈 Was ist das?
EV/FCF zeigt, wie viele Jahre es dauern würde, bis ein Unternehmen seinen Unternehmenswert durch freien Cashflow „zurückverdient”.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Diese Kennzahl hilft, Unternehmen auf Basis ihrer tatsächlichen Cash-Erträge zu bewerten – unabhängig von Bilanzierungsregeln oder buchhalterischem Gewinn.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein niedriges EV/FCF deutet auf eine günstige Bewertung bei starker Cashgenerierung hin.
- Ein hohes EV/FCF kann entweder auf Optimismus oder auf temporär schwachen Cashflow hindeuten.
- Besonders hilfreich bei reifen, profitablen Unternehmen mit stabilen Cashflows.
📘 Kurs-Buchwert-Verhältnis (KBV)
📈 Was ist das?
Das KBV zeigt, wie hoch der Marktwert eines Unternehmens im Verhältnis zu seinem bilanziellen Eigenkapital ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Das KBV ist besonders bei Substanzwerten (z. B. Banken, Industrie) relevant. Es hilft Anlegern zu erkennen, ob ein Unternehmen unter oder über seinem buchhalterischen Vermögen bewertet ist.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein KBV unter 1 kann auf Unterbewertung oder schwache Rentabilität hindeuten.
- Ein KBV über 1 zeigt, dass der Markt dem Unternehmen Mehrwert über den Buchwert hinaus zuschreibt (z. B. Marken, Patente, Wachstum).
- Das KBV eignet sich besonders gut für Unternehmen mit stabilen, materiellen Vermögenswerten.
📘 Dividende je Aktie
📈 Was ist das?
Die Dividende je Aktie zeigt, wie viel Geld ein Unternehmen pro Aktie an seine Aktionäre ausschüttet – typischerweise jährlich oder quartalsweise.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Sie ist die absolute Größe der Auszahlung je Aktie – wichtig für alle, die regelmäßige Erträge suchen oder Dividendenstrategien verfolgen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine stabile oder wachsende Dividende je Aktie ist oft ein Zeichen für ein solides Geschäftsmodell.
- Die Dividende je Aktie allein sagt aber nichts über die Rendite – dafür ist auch der Aktienkurs relevant (→ Dividendenrendite).
- Langfristig steigende Dividenden sind oft ein sehr gutes Merkmal (z. B. Dividenden-Aristokraten).
📘 Dividendenrendite
📈 Was ist das?
Die Dividendenrendite zeigt, wie hoch die Dividende eines Unternehmens im Verhältnis zum Aktienkurs ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Sie hilft dabei, Dividendenaktien vergleichbar zu machen – unabhängig vom absoluten Auszahlungsbetrag.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine stabile Dividendenrendite kann auf verlässliche Ausschüttungen hinweisen.
- Ein Vergleich der 1J- und 5J-Rendite hilft zu erkennen, ob das Dividendenwachstum mit dem Kurswachstum Schritt hält.
- Eine niedrige Rendite ist nicht zwingend negativ – sie kann auf starkes Kurswachstum hindeuten.
📘 Dividendenwachstum
📈 Was ist das?
Das Dividendenwachstum zeigt, wie stark ein Unternehmen seine Dividende je Aktie über die Zeit gesteigert hat.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
5J: durchschnittliche jährliche Wachstumsrate (CAGR)
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Stetig steigende Dividenden gelten als Zeichen für finanzielle Stärke und Aktionärsorientierung – besonders interessant für langfristige Investoren.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein stabiles Dividendenwachstum ist ein Zeichen nachhaltiger Ertragskraft.
- Ein hohes Dividendenwachstum kann ein erheblicher Hebel deiner Rendite sein:
- Wenn ein Unternehmen z. B. 1 € Dividende zahlt und diese über 5 Jahre jährlich um 15 % erhöht, bekommst du im 5. Jahr bereits 2 € je Aktie – doppelt so viel wie zu Beginn!
📘 Ausschüttungsquote (Payout)
📈 Was ist das?
Die Ausschüttungsquote zeigt, wie viel Prozent des Unternehmensgewinns (pro Aktie) als Dividende an die Aktionäre ausgeschüttet wird.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die Quote hilft einzuschätzen, ob eine Dividende auf Dauer tragfähig ist – besonders im Verhältnis zum erzielten Gewinn.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine niedrige Ausschüttungsquote bedeutet: Das Unternehmen behält einen größeren Teil des Gewinns für Investitionen – typisch für Wachstumsunternehmen.
- Eine moderate Quote (z. B. 25–50 %) steht oft für ein gesundes Gleichgewicht zwischen Ausschüttung und Zukunftsinvestitionen.
- Hohe Ausschüttungsquoten können attraktiv wirken, sind aber riskanter, wenn die Gewinne schwanken oder sinken.
📘 Dividendensteigerungen in Folge (Erhöhungen)
📈 Was ist das?
Diese Kennzahl zeigt, wie viele Jahre in Folge ein Unternehmen seine Dividende pro Aktie erhöht hat – ohne Kürzung oder Aussetzung.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Ein langer Track Record kontinuierlicher Erhöhungen spricht für Verlässlichkeit, solide Finanzen und aktionärsfreundliche Unternehmenspolitik.
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein langer Zeitraum mit Dividendensteigerungen stärkt das Vertrauen – besonders in Krisenzeiten.
- Solche Unternehmen gelten als verlässlich und planbar für Einkommensinvestoren.
- Je länger die Serie, desto stärker das Commitment gegenüber den Aktionären.
📘 Umsatz
📈 Was ist das?
Der Umsatz zeigt, wie viel ein Unternehmen insgesamt mit seinen Produkten und Dienstleistungen verdient – also den Bruttoerlös vor Abzug von Kosten.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Der Umsatz ist eine der zentralen Kennzahlen zur Einschätzung der Unternehmensgröße, Marktstellung und Wachstumskraft.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein wachsender Umsatz zeigt eine steigende Nachfrage und kann ein guter Frühindikator für Gewinnsteigerungen sein.
- Vergleiche von aktuellem und erwartetem Umsatz geben Hinweise auf das Marktumfeld und Analystenerwartungen.
- Wichtig: Starker Umsatz allein genügt nicht – auch Margen und Profitabilität zählen.
📘 EBITDA
📈 Was ist das?
EBITDA steht für „Earnings Before Interest, Taxes, Depreciation and Amortization“ – also Gewinn vor Zinsen, Steuern und Abschreibungen. Es zeigt das operative Ergebnis eines Unternehmens, bereinigt um bilanztechnische und finanzierungsbedingte Effekte.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
EBITDA ist eine verbreitete Kennzahl zur Beurteilung der operativen Leistungsfähigkeit – insbesondere bei kapitalintensiven Unternehmen oder im internationalen Vergleich.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hohes oder wachsendes EBITDA spricht für starke operative Erträge – unabhängig von Bilanzierung oder Steuerlast.
- EBITDA ist besonders nützlich, um Unternehmen branchenübergreifend zu vergleichen.
- Wichtig: EBITDA ist keine offizielle Gewinnkennzahl – Abschreibungen und Finanzierungskosten werden ausgeklammert.
📘 EBIT
📈 Was ist das?
EBIT steht für „Earnings Before Interest and Taxes“ – also Gewinn vor Zinsen und Steuern. Es zeigt das operative Ergebnis eines Unternehmens nach Abschreibungen, aber vor Finanzierungs- und Steueraufwand.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
EBIT ist eine zentrale Kennzahl zur Beurteilung der Profitabilität aus dem Kerngeschäft – unabhängig von Kapitalstruktur oder Steuersystem.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hohes EBIT deutet auf ein profitables Kerngeschäft hin – vor Zinslasten oder steuerlichen Effekten.
- Es erlaubt objektivere Vergleiche zwischen Unternehmen mit unterschiedlicher Finanzierung.
- Im Vergleich mit EBITDA zeigt EBIT bereits den Einfluss von Abschreibungen auf das operative Ergebnis.
📘 Nettogewinn
📈 Was ist das?
Der Nettogewinn ist der verbleibende Jahresüberschuss (oder -fehlbetrag) eines Unternehmens – nach Abzug aller Kosten, Steuern, Zinsen und Abschreibungen
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Der Nettogewinn ist die zentrale Erfolgskennzahl – er zeigt, wie profitabel ein Unternehmen nach allen Kosten tatsächlich arbeitet.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein steigender Nettogewinn zeigt, dass das Unternehmen effizient wirtschaftet – trotz aller Kosten.
- Die Entwicklung des Gewinns beeinflusst z. B. direkt das KGV und weitere Kennzahlen.
- Im Zeitverlauf lässt sich ablesen, wie stabil und profitabel ein Geschäftsmodell wirklich ist.
📘 Free Cashflow (FCF)
📈 Was ist das?
Der Free Cashflow gibt Aufschluss über die echte finanzielle Stärke eines Unternehmens – unabhängig von Bilanzierungsregeln. Er zeigt, wie viel Spielraum für Dividenden, Aktienrückkäufe oder Schuldenabbau besteht.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
FCF reflects a company’s real financial strength – regardless of accounting profits. It shows how much flexibility a company has for dividends, share buybacks, or debt reduction.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hoher Free Cashflow bedeutet, dass ein Unternehmen echte Finanzkraft besitzt – unabhängig vom bilanzierten Gewinn.
- Er ist oft die solideste Grundlage für nachhaltige Dividenden und Aktienrückkäufe.
- Sinkender FCF kann ein Warnsignal sein – auch wenn der Gewinn stabil aussieht.
📘 Umsatzwachstum
📈 Was ist das?
Das Umsatzwachstum zeigt, wie stark sich die Erlöse eines Unternehmens im Vergleich zum Vorjahr verändert haben – tatsächlich (TTM) und auf Prognosebasis (erwartet).
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Erwartet = (Umsatz erwartet ÷ Umsatz Vorjahr − 1) × 100
Erwartetes Wachstum basiert auf Analystenschätzungen für das laufende Geschäftsjahr.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Ein wachsender Umsatz ist ein zentrales Signal für steigende Nachfrage, Geschäftsausweitung und Marktanteilsgewinne – besonders bei Wachstumsunternehmen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Wachstum ist der Motor langfristiger Wertsteigerung – besonders bei Technologie- und Wachstumsaktien.
- Wichtig ist nicht nur das aktuelle Wachstum, sondern auch dessen Nachhaltigkeit.
- Prognosen zeigen, ob Analysten weiteres Potenzial erwarten – oder eine Verlangsamung.
📘 EBITDA-Wachstum
📈 Was ist das?
Das EBITDA-Wachstum zeigt, wie stark das operative Ergebnis eines Unternehmens vor Zinsen, Steuern und Abschreibungen im Vergleich zum Vorjahr gestiegen oder gesunken ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Erwartet = (erwartetes EBITDA ÷ EBITDA Vorjahr − 1) × 100
Erwartetes Wachstum basiert auf Analystenschätzungen für das laufende Geschäftsjahr.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Ein steigendes EBITDA ist ein Zeichen für verbesserte operative Ertragskraft – unabhängig von Finanzierungsstruktur oder Abschreibungen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Starkes EBITDA-Wachstum signalisiert operative Effizienz und Skalierung – besonders relevant in Wachstumsphasen.
- EBITDA-Wachstum ist ein Frühindikator für Margen- und Gewinnentwicklung – sollte aber stets im Zusammenhang mit Umsatz und EBIT betrachtet werden.
📘 EBIT Wachstum
📈 Was ist das?
Das EBIT-Wachstum zeigt, wie stark das operative Ergebnis eines Unternehmens (nach Abschreibungen, aber vor Zinsen und Steuern) im Vergleich zum Vorjahr gewachsen ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Erwartet = (erwartetes EBIT ÷ EBIT Vorjahr − 1) × 100
Erwartetes Wachstum basiert auf Analystenschätzungen für das laufende Geschäftsjahr.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Das EBIT-Wachstum ist ein direkter Indikator für die wirtschaftliche Entwicklung des operativen Geschäfts – unter Berücksichtigung der Kapitalintensität (Abschreibungen).
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Steigendes EBIT signalisiert wachsende operative Rentabilität – auch unter Berücksichtigung von Abschreibungen.
- Das EBIT-Wachstum ist ein wichtiges Maß zur Beurteilung von Geschäftsmodellen mit hohen Investitionskosten.
- Im Zusammenspiel mit Umsatz- und EBITDA-Wachstum ergibt sich ein umfassendes Bild zur operativen Entwicklung.
📘 Nettogewinn-Wachstum
📈 Was ist das?
Das Nettogewinn-Wachstum zeigt, wie stark der Jahresüberschuss eines Unternehmens gegenüber dem Vorjahr gestiegen oder gesunken ist – sowohl tatsächlich (TTM) als auch auf Basis von Prognosen (erwartet).
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Erwartet = (erwarteter Nettogewinn ÷ Nettogewinn Vorjahr − 1) × 100
Der erwartete Wert basiert auf Analystenschätzungen für das laufende Geschäftsjahr.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Der Gewinn ist die entscheidende Ergebnisgröße für ein Unternehmen. Ein wachsender Nettogewinn deutet auf steigende Effizienz, stabile Kostenkontrolle und nachhaltige Ertragskraft hin.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Wachsender Nettogewinn stärkt die Bewertung, Dividendenfähigkeit und Kursfantasie.
- Stagnierender oder rückläufiger Gewinn trotz Umsatzwachstum kann auf Margendruck hinweisen.
📘 Free Cashflow-Wachstum
📈 Was ist das?
Das Free-Cashflow-Wachstum zeigt, wie sich der freie Mittelzufluss eines Unternehmens im Vergleich zum Vorjahr verändert hat – also der Betrag, der nach allen operativen Ausgaben und Investitionen übrig bleibt.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Free Cashflow ist der echte, verfügbare Geldzufluss. Wachstum in diesem Bereich ist ein Zeichen für finanzielle Stärke und steigende Flexibilität bei Dividenden, Rückkäufen oder Investitionen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Sinkender Free Cashflow kann auf steigende Investitionen, höhere Kosten oder stagnierende operative Erträge hindeuten.
- Besonders bei Dividendenwerten ist das FCF-Wachstum wichtig – denn Dividenden werden letztlich aus dem verfügbaren Cash gezahlt.
- Ein negativer Trend sollte genauer analysiert werden – er ist nicht zwangsläufig schlecht, aber potenziell ein Warnsignal.
📘 Bruttomarge
📈 Was ist das?
Die Bruttomarge zeigt, wie viel vom Umsatz nach Abzug der direkten Herstellungskosten (Material, Produktion) als Bruttogewinn übrig bleibt – also der „Rohgewinn“ eines Unternehmens.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Auch: Bruttomarge = Bruttogewinn ÷ Umsatz × 100
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die Bruttomarge gibt Aufschluss über die Profitabilität eines Produkts oder Geschäftsmodells vor Fixkosten, Steuern und Zinsen. Sie zeigt, wie effizient ein Unternehmen produzieren oder einkaufen kann.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe Bruttomarge deutet auf starke Preissetzungsmacht und effiziente Herstellung hin.
- Sinkende Bruttomargen können auf Kostensteigerungen oder Preisdruck hindeuten.
- Besonders im Vergleich zu Wettbewerbern liefert die Bruttomarge wertvolle Einblicke in die Geschäftsqualität.
📘 EBITDA-Marge
📈 Was ist das?
Die EBITDA-Marge zeigt, wie viel vom Umsatz als operativer Gewinn vor Zinsen, Steuern und Abschreibungen (EBITDA) übrig bleibt. Sie misst die operative Effizienz – ohne Verzerrungen durch Finanzierung oder Buchwerte.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die EBITDA-Marge hilft zu verstehen, wie viel operativer Gewinn ein Unternehmen aus jedem Euro Umsatz erzielt – unabhängig von Kapitalstruktur oder steuerlichem Umfeld.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe EBITDA-Marge zeigt starke operative Ertragskraft – unabhängig von Bilanzierungseffekten.
- Die Marge ermöglicht gute Vergleiche zwischen Unternehmen und Branchen.
- Ein stabiler oder wachsender Wert kann auf effiziente Kostenkontrolle und Skalierbarkeit hindeuten.
📘 EBIT-Marge
📈 Was ist das?
Die EBIT-Marge zeigt, wie viel Prozent des Umsatzes als operativer Gewinn nach Abschreibungen, aber vor Zinsen und Steuern übrig bleiben.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die EBIT-Marge misst die operative Ertragskraft eines Unternehmens unter Berücksichtigung der Kapitalintensität (z. B. Maschinen, Anlagen). Sie eignet sich gut zum Vergleich von Geschäftsmodellen mit unterschiedlich hohen Abschreibungen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe EBIT-Marge zeigt, dass ein Unternehmen auch nach Abschreibungen effizient arbeitet.
- Sie ist besonders relevant in kapitalintensiven Branchen.
- Langfristig stabile oder steigende Margen sind ein Zeichen wirtschaftlicher Stärke und Preissetzungsmacht.
📘 Nettomarge
📈 Was ist das?
Die Nettomarge zeigt, wie viel vom Umsatz am Ende als „Reingewinn“ übrig bleibt – also nach Abzug aller Kosten, Zinsen, Steuern und Abschreibungen.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die Nettomarge gibt an, wie effizient ein Unternehmen über alle Stufen hinweg wirtschaftet. Sie zeigt, wie viel Gewinn tatsächlich je Euro Umsatz übrig bleibt.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe Nettomarge zeigt, dass ein Unternehmen nicht nur operativ stark ist, sondern auch seine Finanzierung und Steuerbelastung im Griff hat.
- Vergleiche mit Wettbewerbern geben Einblicke in die wirtschaftliche Qualität.
- Sinkende Nettomargen trotz Umsatzwachstum können ein Warnsignal sein – etwa für steigende Kosten oder sinkende Effizienz.
📘 Free Cashflow Marge
📈 Was ist das?
Die Free-Cashflow-Marge zeigt, wie viel vom Umsatz nach Abzug aller operativen Ausgaben und Investitionen tatsächlich als freier Mittelzufluss übrig bleibt.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Diese Marge misst die echte Liquidität, die ein Unternehmen erwirtschaftet – unabhängig von Bilanzierungsregeln oder Abschreibungen. Sie ist besonders relevant für Dividenden, Rückkäufe und Investitionen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe Free-Cashflow-Marge zeigt, dass ein Unternehmen nachhaltig liquide Mittel erwirtschaftet.
- Sie ist ein starkes Signal für finanzielle Stabilität und Ausschüttungspotenzial.
- Wichtig ist der langfristige Trend – sinkende Werte können auf steigende Investitionen oder rückläufige operative Effizienz hindeuten.
📘 Eigenkapitalquote
📈 Was ist das?
Die Eigenkapitalquote zeigt, wie hoch der Anteil des Eigenkapitals an der Bilanzsumme eines Unternehmens ist – also wie stark es sich aus eigenen Mitteln finanziert.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Eine hohe Eigenkapitalquote steht für finanzielle Stabilität, Krisenfestigkeit und gute Bonität. Sie ist besonders relevant bei der Beurteilung der Verschuldung.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe Eigenkapitalquote signalisiert finanzielle Stabilität – besonders in Krisenzeiten.
- Ein niedriger Wert kann auf ein höheres Risiko oder eine aggressive Verschuldung hinweisen.
- Wichtig: Die Eigenkapitalquote sollte immer gemeinsam mit der Eigenkapitalrendite betrachtet werden. Nur so lässt sich beurteilen, ob ein Unternehmen nicht nur solide, sondern auch effizient wirtschaftet.
📘 Eigenkapitalrendite (ROE)
📈 Was ist das?
Die Eigenkapitalrendite zeigt, wie effizient ein Unternehmen mit dem Kapital seiner Aktionäre arbeitet – also wie viel Gewinn es pro Euro Eigenkapital erwirtschaftet.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die Eigenkapitalrendite ist eine zentrale Rentabilitätskennzahl. Sie hilft Anlegern zu erkennen, ob das Unternehmen eine attraktive Verzinsung auf das eingesetzte Eigenkapital erwirtschaftet.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe Eigenkapitalrendite spricht für ein starkes, effizientes Geschäftsmodell.
- Besonders interessant ist sie bei kapitalintensiven Firmen oder solchen mit hoher Eigenkapitalquote.
- Wichtig: Ein sehr hoher ROE kann auch auf hohe Schulden hinweisen – daher sollte sie immer im Kontext mit der Eigenkapitalquote betrachtet werden.
📘 Return on Capital Employed (ROCE)
📈 Was ist das?
ROCE misst die Gesamtrentabilität eines Unternehmens – also wie effizient es das eingesetzte Kapital (Eigen- und Fremdkapital) zur Gewinnerzielung nutzt.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Das eingesetzte Kapital ist das gesamte betriebsnotwendige Kapital, unabhängig von der Finanzierungsquelle.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
ROCE eignet sich besonders gut für den Vergleich unterschiedlich finanzierter Unternehmen. Es zeigt, wie effektiv ein Unternehmen Kapital investiert – unabhängig von der Kapitalstruktur.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hoher ROCE zeigt, dass ein Unternehmen sein Kapital effizient einsetzt – unabhängig davon, ob es durch Eigen- oder Fremdkapital finanziert ist.
- Je höher der ROCE im Vergleich zu ähnlichen Unternehmen, desto mehr Wert schafft das Unternehmen mit seinem investierten Kapital.
- Besonders wichtig ist der ROCE bei Firmen mit hohen Investitionen – z. B. in Industrie, Energie oder Infrastruktur.
📘 Return on Invested Capital (ROIC)
📈 Was ist das?
ROIC zeigt, wie effizient ein Unternehmen das Kapital investiert, das langfristig im operativen Geschäft gebunden ist – unabhängig davon, ob es aus Eigen- oder Fremdkapital stammt.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
- NOPAT = „Net Operating Profit After Taxes“
- Investiertes Kapital = operatives Vermögen abzüglich nicht-verzinster Schulden
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
ROIC ist eine der präzisesten Kennzahlen zur Bewertung der Kapitalrendite – besonders im Vergleich zur Eigenkapitalrendite, weil es Verzerrungen durch Schulden vermeidet. Er zeigt, ob ein Unternehmen Mehrwert für alle Kapitalgeber schafft.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hoher ROIC zeigt, wie gut ein Unternehmen mit dem tatsächlich investierten (betriebsnotwendigen) Kapital wirtschaftet.
- Im Unterschied zu ROCE wird nur Kapital betrachtet, das wirklich zur Finanzierung operativer Aktivitäten dient – und verzinst werden muss.
- Besonders hilfreich, um die Kapitalrendite von Unternehmen mit viel „überschüssigem“ Kapital oder zinsfreien Verbindlichkeiten realistisch zu vergleichen.
📘 Verschuldungsgrad (Leverage Ratio)
📈 Was ist das?
Der Verschuldungsgrad zeigt, wie stark ein Unternehmen durch verzinsliche Schulden (z. B. Kredite und Anleihen) im Verhältnis zum Eigenkapital finanziert ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die Kennzahl hilft, das finanzielle Risiko und die Abhängigkeit von Fremdkapital zu beurteilen. Ein hoher Verschuldungsgrad kann die Eigenkapitalrendite steigern – birgt aber auch erhöhte Risiken bei Zinsanstiegen oder Liquiditätsengpässen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein niedriger Verschuldungsgrad steht für finanzielle Stabilität und Unabhängigkeit.
- Ein hoher Wert kann auf erhöhte Risiken hinweisen – insbesondere bei schwankenden Zinsen oder konjunkturellen Schwächen.
- Wichtig: Immer im Kontext zur Branche und Kapitalintensität bewerten.
📘 Ergebnis je Aktie (EPS)
📈 Was ist das?
Das Ergebnis je Aktie (EPS) zeigt, wie viel Gewinn auf eine einzelne Aktie entfällt – und ist eine der wichtigsten Kennzahlen zur Bewertung von Unternehmen.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Die verwässerte Aktienanzahl berücksichtigt auch potenzielle neue Aktien, etwa durch Optionen, Wandelanleihen oder andere Umtauschrechte.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
EPS bildet die Basis für viele Bewertungskennzahlen wie KGV, PEG oder Payout Ratio. Es macht den Gewinn für Aktionäre vergleichbar – unabhängig von der Unternehmensgröße.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- EPS hilft, die Profitabilität pro Aktie zu erfassen – und ist besonders wichtig im Zeitvergleich oder im Vergleich mit Analystenschätzungen.
- Steigendes EPS kann ein Zeichen für stabiles Wachstum oder Aktienrückkäufe sein.
- Wichtig: Verwende verwässertes EPS für realistische Bewertungen – besonders bei stark aktienbasierten Vergütungssystemen.
📘 Free Cashflow je Aktie (FCF je Aktie)
📈 Was ist das?
Der Free Cashflow je Aktie zeigt, wie viel freier Mittelzufluss einem Unternehmen pro Aktie zur Verfügung steht – nach Investitionen, aber vor Dividenden oder Schuldentilgung.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Der FCF je Aktie zeigt, wie viel liquide Mittel pro Aktie tatsächlich im Unternehmen verbleiben – wichtig für Dividenden, Aktienrückkäufe oder Schuldentilgung. Im Gegensatz zum Gewinn ist er schwerer manipulierbar und daher besonders aussagekräftig.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hoher Free Cashflow je Aktie ist ein Zeichen für hohe finanzielle Flexibilität.
- Er zeigt, wie viel Kapital ein Unternehmen effektiv einsetzen oder ausschütten kann.
- Besonders relevant für dividendenstarke Unternehmen oder solche mit starker Kapitalrendite.
📘 Short Interest
📈 Was ist das?
Short Interest zeigt, wie viele Aktien eines Unternehmens aktuell leerverkauft wurden – also von Investoren geliehen und verkauft, in der Erwartung fallender Kurse.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Der Wert zeigt den Anteil der Aktien, der aktuell auf fallende Kurse spekuliert wird.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Short Interest dient als Stimmungsindikator: Ein hoher Wert deutet auf Skepsis oder negative Erwartungen gegenüber dem Unternehmen hin – kann aber auch zu einem „Short Squeeze“ führen, wenn der Kurs plötzlich steigt.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein niedriger Short Interest deutet auf Vertrauen in das Unternehmen hin.
- Ein hoher Wert kann ein Warnsignal sein – oder eine Chance, wenn sich die Stimmung dreht.
- Besonders spannend in volatilen Märkten oder vor wichtigen Quartalszahlen.
📘 Employees
📈 Was ist das?
Die Mitarbeiteranzahl zeigt, wie viele Personen ein Unternehmen weltweit beschäftigt – ein Indikator für Größe, Struktur und Geschäftsmodell.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Sie hilft bei der Einschätzung von Skaleneffekten, Effizienz und Personalkosten. Zusammen mit Umsatz und Gewinn lassen sich Kennzahlen wie Produktivität je Mitarbeiter ableiten.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Viele Mitarbeiter bedeuten große operative Komplexität – aber auch hohes Umsatzpotenzial.
- Produktivität je Mitarbeiter ist ein wichtiger Indikator für Effizienz.
- Besonders spannend bei stark wachsenden Tech- oder Industrieunternehmen.
📘 Umsatz je Mitarbeiter
📈 Was ist das?
Der Umsatz je Mitarbeiter zeigt, wie viel Erlös ein Unternehmen durchschnittlich pro Beschäftigtem erwirtschaftet – eine Kennzahl für Effizienz und Produktivität.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Die Mitarbeiterzahl stammt in der Regel aus dem letzten verfügbaren Jahresbericht.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Diese Kennzahl hilft, Geschäftsmodelle zu vergleichen – insbesondere zwischen arbeitsintensiven und technologiegetriebenen Unternehmen. Ein hoher Wert deutet auf Automatisierung, Effizienz oder hohen Wertschöpfungsanteil hin.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hoher Umsatz je Mitarbeiter spricht für ein skalierbares und margenstarkes Geschäftsmodell.
- Ein niedriger Wert kann auf arbeitsintensive Prozesse oder geringere Wertschöpfung hinweisen.
- Besonders hilfreich beim Vergleich von Tech- vs. Industrieunternehmen.
Equinix Aktie Analyse
Analystenmeinungen
39 Analysten haben eine Equinix Prognose abgegeben:
Analystenmeinungen
39 Analysten haben eine Equinix Prognose abgegeben:
Beta Equinix Events
🇩🇪 Neu: Alle Transkripte jetzt auch auf Deutsch verfügbar!
Abonniere Premium, um Transkripte und KI-Zusammenfassungen auf Deutsch zu lesen.
Vergangene Events
|
JUN
3
Nareit REITweek: 2026 Investor Conference
vor etwa einem Monat
|
|
APR
29
Q1 2026 Earnings Call
vor 2 Monaten
|
|
MÄR
2
Morgan Stanley Technology
vor 4 Monaten
|
|
MÄR
2
Citi’s Miami Global Property CEO Conference 2026
vor 4 Monaten
|
|
FEB
11
Q4 2025 Earnings Call
vor 5 Monaten
|
|
OKT
29
Q3 2025 Earnings Call
vor 8 Monaten
|
|
SEP
16
Global Communications Infrastructure Conference
vor 10 Monaten
|
|
SEP
9
BofA Securities 2025 Global Real Estate Conference
vor 10 Monaten
|
|
SEP
8
Goldman Sachs Communacopia + Technology Conference 2025
vor 10 Monaten
|
|
AUG
12
TD Cowen Communications Infrastructure Summit
vor 11 Monaten
|
|
AUG
11
KeyBanc Capital Markets Technology Leadership Forum
vor 11 Monaten
|
|
JUL
30
Q2 2025 Earnings Call
vor 11 Monaten
|
|
JUN
25
Analyst/Investor Day - Equinix, Inc.
vor etwa einem Jahr
|
aktien.guide Basis
Equinix — Nareit REITweek: 2026 Investor Conference
1. Question Answer
All right. Good morning. Thanks, everybody, for being here. My name is Frank Louthan. I'm the senior analyst at Raymond James covering data centers and telecom, and other things. I'm very pleased to have Chief Financial Officer, Olivier Leonetti, here from Equinix. We're going to go through a few questions, and then we'll leave a little time at the end for some questions from the audience. But you guys have to start on with...
And just a quick disclosure statement. Some of what we will be talking about today contains forward-looking statements. Please read our SEC filings for more information about factors that could affect these statements.
All right. Great. I'm sure everyone will have that committed to memory.
Yes. Phillip and I will go through the motions together. Phillip and I are partners in crime.
Great. All right. Well, Olivier, maybe walk us through kind of your vision for the company as you step into the role here. What can we expect from you that may be different from what we've seen in the past from Equinix? And what do you see as the opportunities that really attract you to the position?
Yes. So again, thank you for having us. Thank you to everybody for being in the meeting room. I hope you're having a great conference. It's my first one, and I really enjoyed it. A lot of things going on in our company, so we love your interest. So I joined Equinix about a bit more than 2 months ago. And I joined this amazing institution for 4 reasons: one, attractive end markets being served. Two, amazing opportunity from the company to compete in those markets. We'll discuss a lot about that with Frank. Three, our culture; and four, this partnership is important, as is the vision from our CEO.
And after -- it looks like a marketing comment, but after a bit more than 2 months, I was wrong. Our end markets are better. Our ability to compete is better. Our culture is better and the vision from our management team is better. So what I'm going to do differently is not a lot. I'm going to be a member of the team to really augment, accelerate, facilitate the vision, but I'm going to be one of many shaping the future for this amazing company in those amazing markets. We'll talk about that, I'm sure.
Okay. Great. So maybe update us a little bit from -- you had the Analyst Day last year that you do every 2 years. Maybe update us kind of what's changed there? And what have we seen in the year since that, roughly a year.
Yes. So two things. I mean, if you go back, we have been in business for 3 decades. We were the pioneer to facilitate the Internet. That's first decade. The second decade was to facilitate the cloud revolution. This decade is going to be to facilitate AI. Our CEO has said many times, I think it's a great way to talk about how excited we are. This moment is our moment.
Why? The AI revolution, which is at the start, is creating the need to have a diverse marketplace where players are going to meet and exchange data. That's what AI is about. That is going to play to our advantage. Now to answer to your question, what is new since Investor Day, this vision is playing out in a way which is augmented relative to what we had expected. Those end markets are stronger and our ability to deliver what our customers need is stronger.
What do they need? They need a global network, they need a diverse network with different participants being on it, cloud, neo-cloud, AI lab, enterprise. They need neutrality. They need latency. AI will need to compute fast, close -- being close to where the enterprise is important. And we need also connectivity solutions, which are going to be fast, easy to use. All of that is at play. Equinix is delivering on this.
Equinix is the biggest marketplace on Earth, able to deliver this. As a result, you started to see the numbers being better than what we thought. I give you some numbers for this year. We're going to grow recurring revenue by 10% for the year. We did that in Q1. We did that in Q2. Double-digit growth is the start, and we have been able to clock on those numbers now for a period of time. Two, EBITDA margin, 51%. And three, an important statistic, one, which is one we're going to focus a lot is AFFO per share growing at 10%. So you see this is our moment, the value proposition of the company resonating and us being able to deliver attractive returns as a result.
So maybe take that a little further and your value proposition as you approach customers, what is that? And then how are you differentiated from the competition to be able to accomplish all these things?
Yes. And Phillip and I don't hesitate, Phillip. So if you see today, in the world of AI, you want -- go back to a rich marketplace, a marketplace where all the cloud providers are going to be participated. You want the Neo-cloud and new entrants to be part of this marketplace. You want the AI lab to be part of this marketplace. And of course, you need the enterprise. And you need this marketplace, which is global, neutral, and close to the action to manage latencies.
And what is different is that nobody can offer all of this. Could you have players offering a one-to-one connection, a cloud to a cloud? Some people have started to do that. Yes. Could you have some carriers, which are local doing some of that? Yes. But nobody can do everything we are doing. So that's different. And one of the key success factor of our company is to nurture a rich marketplace. So we are expanding. We're going to double our capacity. I'm sure we'll talk about that with Frank.
This new capacity is created to make sure that we have all the participants needed in those. So that's different. I'll give you some statistics. Neo-cloud, 4 of the top 5 are part of the network. They have deployed with us more than 110 nodes in our network, 8 of the top AI lab as part of the network. All the cloud providers are part of the network, right? So difficult to replicate. Then another part of the value proposition, and our CEO has mentioned that many times is we are not in the compute business.
We are in the connection business. And we want connections we're going to be easy to implement with no human being involved, managed at the press of a dashboard, and probably powered by AI to allow -- to identify which players do you want in your network. We do this. That's different. And we want to today keep increasing the barriers to entry or competitive advantage to make all of that even stronger than now.
And maybe just to add on to that and take a step back when you -- I think there's been a little bit of a homogenization of the data center industry. Now all these things that Olivier talked about around our differentiation. Keep in mind that we are -- we've got over 10,500 customers in our customer base. We did 3,800 transactions in Q1 with over 3,100 unique customers. We're not selling 100 megawatts to one customer and selling out a facility.
We're a very differentiated business model as it relates to the broader data center industry. I think it's really important to take a step back and make sure that folks understand that, that differentiation and all the statistics of how we're curating ecosystems. And because of that, we're driving returns and yields on our assets that are in the mid-20s. That's very different than a lot of others in the data center industry.
Let me build on this, if you don't mind, Frank. If you see the evolution of what we do, in the era of AI. I'm going to make an obvious statement. AI is to compute data at the edge from via sources, right? We are starting to be the place where this compute at the edge is happening, evidence of this. The average -- sorry to mention a technical term, rack at Equinix is 5 kilowatt. This is the average rack density.
We have in our network today racks, which are 100-kilowatt plus. Why would you need a rack like this in our network? They are liquid-cooled. We're enabling this. Why do you need this to compute at the edge. So you see why do you need to compute at the edge? Again, you need to send the fast action to an object, but also it's too expensive to compute in other places because of the traffic cost. So you start to see really the value proposition of what we do increasing step by step. The marketplace, the edge compute, and the ease of connection. So again, increasing the competitive advantage and what we offer to our customers.
That's great. So that actually touches on a topic that I wanted to bring up. I think I've been covering you guys since 2009, give or take a month, something like that. And from day 1, I get the question about obsolescence risk. And as you mentioned, averages 5 kW per rack, you've got customers wanting 100 kW. Walk us through the obsolescence bogeyman here that always seems to come up. It's had quite a resurgence based on inbound calls I've got in the last couple of months. So talk to us about how you -- why that is a threat and how you've managed that all these years? Because so far, it hasn't been an issue. But of course, it's coming now, of course, you never know. So talk to us about that.
It's a great question. So let me give you an example. If you go to headquarters in the Bay Area in San Francisco, we have one of our oldest site. It's in San Jose. You have 4 generations of data center, the first one and the last one. The last one, the biggest microchip in a rack from the #1 microchip manufacturer, 100 kilowatt to a few 4, 5 kilowatt. This full ecosystem is attractive to our customers. All of those cabinets with different level of power are today growing because, again, you need compute at the edge, use the 100 kilowatt. But you need also to use the cabinets to -- for communication. So those worlds need to be part of the ecosystem. So obsolescence today is not something, which is a concern to our company.
Yes. And we've always talked about putting right application in the right workload, in the right data center. And exactly to Olivier's point, I mean, when you look at some of our older facilities, they're the most network-dense, they're the most valuable. And when there is space, trust me, there are customers who want to go into that space. And we've constantly been maintaining these over the years.
And so they are absolutely fit for purpose for those specific workloads. And as we talked about, some of these higher-dense applications and workloads, they're going into our newer facilities. Plus we have 100 of our existing 280-plus data centers, which are fit for purpose for liquid cooling. So we always are thinking about the right mix of applications in the right locations for our customers.
All right. Great. So with that, maybe let's talk a little bit about competition. We've had a very, very strong market for data centers the last few years. It's been fun. But with that always, it attracts new competition. Talk to us a little bit about what do you see as some of the biggest competitive threats in the next couple of years and how you're positioned to address that?
Yes. So the competition is intense, and it's keeping us up at night. It's a good thing. It's keeping us on our edge. And the level of competition is actually the proof point that what we do is important in the era of AI. Carriers are on our network and competing with us, and also collaborating. You have other players as well doing the same. A lot of cooperation, competition happening on the Equinix network. We serve a different purpose.
Nobody today is able to do what I've mentioned. Could you do a 1:1 connection, a 1:2 connection? Yes. Could you do to many everywhere all at once, latency, neutrality, density, nobody can do this. But we're not sleeping. We want to increase the number of data centers we are launching. We want to make our connection business humanless, to be implemented.
And we want to create fast, the best marketplace in the market. So competition is good, validating what we do and good for our customers. And clearly, as a result of that, we -- you see the execution, the speed of execution, and the sense of urgency at our institution being stronger than ever before.
Yes. And I think the marketplace, obviously, we've all talked about the demand environment. There's room for all boats, so to speak. And I think that we feel like we occupy unique place in the data center space, but there is room for all these different workloads to live in different places and room for all of us.
All right. Let's talk about 2 of your products. You talked about interconnection and then also on the xScale side and the larger hyperscale facilities. You've got -- I constantly hear questions from investors, folks like Lumen that have looking at multi-cloud connectivity, worried that's a threat to some of your interconnection revenue and so forth. You've talked -- touched on this a little bit, but maybe address more specifically how some of these telecom carriers that are looking to do that business. How does that impact or not impact your business and what you're trying to do?
Again, so why do you have some carriers and other players part of the network. By the way, we know they exist. We know what they do. We know the footprint they have. It's a cooperation and some level of competition, too, right? We serve different purposes. One-to-one or mainly maybe a U.S. connection is what they will serve. But our customers today, they want a global footprint. A data center in Europe will have a lot of tracking, a lot of traffic coming from other parts of the world. So we want to be differentiated. We are. And we play in this dynamic place in complex connection businesses, and we can cooperate with the other players as well.
And then on the xScale side, you're building larger hyperscale facilities, it's a smaller part of your business, even some of your peers. Talk to us about how you're incorporating that with what you do and where you're seeing success there.
So xScale is not a retail, but it's not a full wholesale either. Why do I say this? They are not gigawatts centers, right? There are hundreds of megawatt centers. They are close to a metro without getting into too many details, you need to be about 30 miles, give or take, to metro to manage latency. Those xScale sites are smaller, close to a large metro.
We will share some of those sites. So we see xScale as being synergistic with what we do. They allow us to do 2 things in addition to have access to a site, they give us purchasing power with the power management company and more intimacy also with some of our large customers.
Okay. Great. All right. So we can't have a data center conversation these days without about the power question. Talk to us about the power. How do you see your ability to get that access for -- you have some pretty broad development needs. How do you see your ability to access power to reach your development goals?
Yes. So I'm kind of embarrassed by what I'm about to say because it's so different than what you have heard, right? We read an article this morning on the Wall Street Journal about how difficult it is to access to everything, right? We build something different, 60-megawatt data centers. We build those in metros. We have been doing that for 30 years. We have great relationship with the utilities companies. We have great relationship with our general contractor, with the power management company.
So today, we have been able to manage these constraints pretty well. We have not experienced any delay. If anything, our team has been able to accelerate the launch of data centers. So we have been largely immune from those constraints. So again, we have access for the next 5 years to more land, power, water, power management equipment than we need. But again, different use case. Let me speak about the community for a second, and we are proud of this approach at our company. We have a team across the world only doing community engagement for the world.
We have a playbook. We are part of the community. Our playbook is as follows: We have been in the community for 30 years. We are green. We manage water, we recycle it. We invest in your schools. We invest in apprenticeship. We're different. We're going to stay. We've been with you for 3 decades. We're going to stay. That resonate, and that allows us to navigate. It's tougher than before. No question, but no delay. Our team is doing an amazing job.
And what about the self-provisioning power? How have you thought about that process? And is that the solution that's right for Equinix? How do you think about that?
You cannot be in this business without thinking about alternative sources of power and local provisioning of the power, particularly to manage peaks in power load. So we do all of this. I mean we're even looking at data center space, I think, is something which is fashionable nowadays. But all of that is being part of the playbook of our company. We have local power provisioning using various sources, gas and green energy as well. So we have to do that, and we do.
Yes. We were one of the first users of fuel cells, for example, in our Silicon Valley. We use gas turbines in some areas in Europe. And as Olivier said, we've kind of taken an all-power approach as we look forward. But I want to make one other comments just about the power situation. We've got 3 gigawatts of land under control. And we -- we're not in the business of speculatively buying land and then figuring out the power situation later. We are doing all this in parallel. And so when we buy a parcel of land, we either have fully contracted power agreements or we are in the very late stages that have high, high confidence about our ability to get the power. So it's a key distinction that we're -- again, we're not out speculatively buying land and then figuring these things out down the road.
Four conditions for us to sign a contract for a piece of property, land, power, water, community at the same time, yes.
All right. Great. And with that, so where are you on the build -- the ambitious build plans? You've got the resources you need, the plan and power. Where are you on the build plans you laid out last year?
Well on track. We have solved the capacity constraints. We have solved the financing constraint. Now we want to offer great network created and great full stack interconnection solutions. That's a work in progress. But the other constraints have been solved.
Okay. And then I'll have one more question, and then we'll take -- see if there's some questions from the audience. If not, I've got a few more. But -- so new CFO, I have to ask a capital allocation question to you. Talk to us about your view of capital allocation for -- as it relates to investors.
Yes. So there are a few things, which are going to be foundational regarding the way we manage our company. And I'm going to state some obvious facts, but they are always good when repeated. One, investment grade is table stakes. We think we can leverage. We have a 3.8x leverage. We believe we can increase the leverage, but investment grade is going to be critical. We want to maintain this. And we believe we can finance our expansion while staying an investment-grade company. So that's one constraint.
The other constraint is we do not want to sacrifice the short term for the long term. 1/3 of our investors want us to do both, and we believe that we're going to be able to do both. So what does that mean? FFO per share is part of the algorithm. Our capital allocation has 4 tenets: one, investment grade; two, top line; three, EBITDA expansion; four, an important our AFFO growth per share, which is attractive to you. So that's what we're going to focus on. Largely, I mentioned it, Phillip mentioned it as well. We have the land, the power, the water we need. At times, we'll be opportunistic to do M&A. AtNorth was one of them, but they are not needed for us to achieve our goals. So that's the framework.
All right. Great. So folks somebody has a question there, there's a microphone or you can just raise your hand, we can grab the questions there. Yes, go ahead.
How fast do you see that power to rack growing. You mentioned kind of 5 kW now and a few that are 100 kW. Is this growing at 10% a year? Or are we going to be at 100 kW for a good bit of?
So this is -- I mean, if you go to the site, those 100 kW rack exist. They are already deployed. It would take time. It will be a diverse set of use cases. So if I give you a statistic, the average kilowatt per rack today at Equinix is 5 kW. In Q1, the increase in density went up by 36%, right? So we're still going to increase in this increase, you're going to have Phillip mentioned it earlier, it was a good set of statistics, low power, high power co-existing. And again, the high power, something very new, which is the need to do compute at the edge.
But just to put it in context, you talked about the 36% growth, that's still single-digit kilowatt per cab, right? So it's -- there's a big installed base for sure, and there are needs for those for all different types of workloads. So I think it's going to be a slow climb, but we are building our new facilities are building towards these increased densities. So we feel like we're kind of going to where the market is and where it's going. We feel very confident about the ability to meet the diversity of the demand around those requirements.
REIT of change is always slower. Any other question? Yes, go ahead.
SpaceX and others are data center space, they still need the interconnection [indiscernible].
Yes. So I mean, everybody has to look at this, right? Elon has been pushing the idea first. People thought it was crazy originally, right? And some people are saying, okay, maybe we need to pay attention. We're looking at this. The physics are going to be challenging. It's over my pay grade. Would you use -- I mean, we're speculating here. Do you need that for large language model? Yes.
Can that be the solution for what we do, retail network proximity? The answer is no. The physics do not allow this footprint to serve what we serve. If you are in the wholesale business somewhere in Arizona or Texas, maybe. If you do what we do, we do, no.
Okay. Great. Any last questions? All right. Well, with that, Olivier, Phil, really appreciate the time here. Thank you very much. Thanks, everybody, for joining...
Good day.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Equinix — Nareit REITweek: 2026 Investor Conference
Equinix — Nareit REITweek: 2026 Investor Conference
Equinix positioniert sich als zentraler, neutraler Marktplatz für AI- und Edge-Workloads mit doppelt-digitalem wiederkehrendem Umsatzwachstum und disziplinierter Kapitalallokation.
🎯 Kernbotschaft
- Kernaussage: Equinix sieht die aktuelle AI-Welle als nachhaltigen Nachfrage-Treiber für interconnection, Edge-Compute und neutrale, latenzarme Vernetzung; das Management spricht von einer klaren Wettbewerbsdifferenzierung und beschleunigter Ausführung.
🚀 Strategische Highlights
- Marktplatz: Equinix bezeichnet sich als „größter Marktplatz auf der Erde“ für Cloud-, Neo‑Cloud-, AI‑Labs und Enterprise‑Teilnehmer; Neutralität und globale Reichweite sind zentrale Wettbewerbsfaktoren.
- Edge & Dichte: Durchschnittliche Rack‑Dichte 5 kW, bereits Racks mit 100 kW (liquid-cooled); neue Rechenzentren werden auf höhere Dichten ausgelegt, 100 von >280 Sites sind liquid‑cooling‑fähig.
- xScale & Flächen: xScale‑Standorte (hundert MW) nahe Metros ergänzen Retail‑Interconnection, bieten Einkaufsvorteile und enge Kundenbeziehungen; 3 GW Land unter Kontrolle, keine spekulativen Landkäufe.
🔎 Neue Informationen
- Wachstumskennzahlen: Management nennt 10% Wachstum beim wiederkehrenden Umsatz (YTD‑Zyklus), EBITDA‑Marge ~51% und Adjusted Funds From Operations (AFFO) per Share‑Wachstum ~10% für das Jahr.
- Ausführung & Constraints: Management sagt, Kapazitäts‑ und Finanzierungsengpässe seien gelöst; Power‑Zugang bisher nicht verzögernd, Playbook für Community‑Engagement vorhanden.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Dichteentwicklung: Nachfrage nach höheren kW/Rack wächst (Q1‑Dichteanstieg +36%), aber der Anstieg bleibt schrittweise; Co‑Existenz von Low‑ und High‑Density‑Workloads erwartet.
- Wettbewerbsbedenken: Carrier‑Multi‑Cloud-Angebote und neue Player validieren Nachfrage, bedrohen laut Management aber nicht die globale, neutrale Vernetzungsrolle von Equinix.
- Radikale Alternativen: Fragen zu SpaceX/Orbital‑Rechenzentren wurden als für Equinix‑Retail‑Nähe nicht praktikabel zurückgewiesen; Wholesale‑Use‑Cases anders bewertet.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Implikation: Management signalisiert, dass Equinix strukturell von der AI/Edge‑Wende profitiert: solides wiederkehrendes Umsatzwachstum, hohe EBITDA‑Marge und klares Kapitalallokations‑Framework (Investment‑Grade, Topline, EBITDA‑Expansion, AFFO/Share). Für Aktionäre bedeutet das: Wachstumsoffenheit bei gleichzeitigem Fokus auf Bonität und Cash‑Return; Kursrisiken bleiben in Ausführung, Power‑ / Community‑Genehmigungen und im intensiven Wettbewerbsumfeld.
Equinix — Q1 2026 Earnings Call
1. Management Discussion
Good afternoon, and welcome to the Equinix First Quarter Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Also, today's conference is being recorded. If anyone has any objections, please disconnect at this time. I would now like to turn the call over to Mr. Ryan Burke, Vice President of Investor Relations. You may begin, sir.
Good afternoon, and welcome to our first quarter conference call. Before we get started, I want to remind you that some of the statements that we make today are forward-looking in nature and involve certain risks and uncertainties. Actual results may vary significantly from those statements. and may be affected by the risks we identified in today's press release and in our filings with the SEC, including our most recent Forms 10-K and 10-Q.
Equinix assumes no obligation and does not intend to update or comment on forward-looking statements made on this call. In addition, in light of Regulation Fair Disclosure, it is our policy to not comment on our financial guidance during the quarter unless it is done through an explicit public disclosure.
On today's conference call, we will provide non-GAAP measures. We provide a reconciliation of those measures to the most directly comparable GAAP measures in today's press release on the Equinix Investor Relations page at www.equinix.com.
We have made available on the IR page of our website a presentation to accompany this discussion, along with certain supplemental financial information and other data. With us here today are Adaire Fox-Martin, CEO and President; Olivier Leonetti, CFO; and Phillip Konieczny, VP of Finance. At this time, I'll turn the call over to Adaire.
Thank you, Ryan. Hello, everyone, and a warm welcome to our Q1 2026 earnings call. This quarter's results reflect continued strength across the business as we capitalize on a large and growing set of opportunities. Demand is broad-based and durable. Execution is driving efficiency and AI continues to fuel infrastructure investments that play to our strengths.
Before I get into our results, I'd like to start with some important market context. Over the course of the past year, my conversations with customers have changed. A year ago, they were about piloting AI. Now our conversations are focused on enterprise-wide adoption at scale. New forces are driving this shift.
Inference has grown from experimental workloads to an engine of real-time business decision-making. An AgenticAI is moving from demos into distributed deployments with agents acting autonomously to achieve business outcomes. The reality is that most enterprise architectures are not optimized for these workflows.
Agents need private low-latency paths to data wherever it lives. They perform best at the edge. Closest to where the decisions get made. And they must be able to move freely across models and clouds whilst staying within jurisdictional boundaries. Performance, cost and compliance all suffer when today's agents run on yesterday's network.
Simply put, this deployment gap is an architecture problem. Enterprise is a need infrastructure that's purpose built for the way AI operates. Distributed, interconnected, sovereign by design and in close proximity to the date of that matters most. This is a market that we are built to serve.
Equinix is not simply the world's largest digital infrastructure company. We are the world's most deliberately curated digital ecosystem. And our Q1 results demonstrate the progress we are making to capture the market opportunity.
In Q1, our recurring revenue grew 10% on a normalized and constant currency basis, coming in at the high end of our expectations. This is our second straight quarter of double-digit MRR growth. At the same time, we are driving continued margin improvement. Q1 was also the largest quarter of total sales activity in our history, inclusive of annualized gross bookings and preselling activity.
Total sales activity was up more than 35% year-over-year. We drove significant interconnection and cape billing growth, whilst reducing churn. Reflecting ecosystem strength across our key operating metrics, and we are expanding our capacity whilst bringing new products to market that extend our runway for growth.
Our progress stems from the extraordinary efforts of our team, and I'm proud of the way our employees are stepping up to meet the moment. Let me now provide some color on our overall results and what's driving our performance. As you saw in our press release, our Q1 results do not include the xScale Hampton lease.
We are nearing execution on expanded mutual beneficial terms with our customers. Olivier will provide additional details on how you should model Hampton. Adjusting for the timing of Hampton, our Q1 revenue, AFFO and AFFO per share results were all ahead of our expectations. Overall, our xScale pipeline is robust given that our remaining capacity is in major metros.
Our momentum reinforces our confidence in the trajectory for the year. As such, we have raised our guidance across several key metrics. I am especially pleased with the strength of the position we are building across the AI inferencing ecosystem. The expansion of our relationships with the world's leading hyperscalers, Neo Cloud, AI security vendors and model providers serves as a magnet for agentic AI workloads.
8 of the top 10 AI model providers and 4 of the top 5 Neo clouds are actively expanding with Equinix. They have placed more than 110 separate network nodes with us to support mission-critical and latency sensitive elements of their architectures. Consistent with the prior quarter, approximately 60% of our largest deals in Q1 were AI-related.
Additionally, large capacity fabric connections have tripled from just a year ago. We believe there is meaningful upside to come, given we are still in the early days of the agentic AI wave and inferencing adoption. This momentum is part of a broader uptick in customer demand, spanning a wide range of AI cloud and networking workloads.
Now let me highlight some recent wins and associated use cases. Cupid Pharmaceuticals are quantum AI-driven drug discovery company relies on Equinix for the high-performance, low-latency infrastructure required to run millions of GPU-intensive molecular simulations.
By deploying a dedicated GPU cluster in Equinix data centers with direct cloud interconnection, Cupid has reduced experimental cycles by 20x whilst lowering cost by a factor of 5. Most importantly, our solutions are accelerating the path from discovery to potential therapies that can save lives.
Gammon construction, a leading construction and engineering services company in Asia chose Equinix because of our neutral platform, presence across major metros and connectivity solutions to enable their multi-cloud AI platform.
They are using our fabric interconnection portfolio to power their network infrastructure. which is the base for inhibitive solutions such as AI-powered robotics and drones for on-site risk assessments and smarter decision-making. During the quarter, we expanded our partnership with Options IT, the #1 provider of infrastructure to global financial services firms.
They selected Equinix because of our presence in the locations that matter most to their operations and ecosystems, including London, New York, Singapore and Tokyo. We are enabling options IT to deliver private cloud and AI managed infrastructure solutions to grow their business whilst meeting the date of sovereignty requirements of their customers.
We also grew our relationship with Maersk, a global leader in integrated logistics as it digitizes critical supply chain infrastructure. Maersk recently selected Equinix as its primary data center partner to support high-performance and AI workloads, including its first liquid-cooled AI deployments in Frankfurt.
Our global footprint, secure and resilient operations and industry-leading interconnection capabilities are supporting Mark's ongoing network transformation and long-term growth strategy. I'm exceptionally grateful to all our customers and partners for trusting Equinix to help move their business forward.
The outcomes we are enabling for them reflect rigorous execution against our strategic pillars. Starting with Star better, we delivered annualized gross bookings of $378 million in Q1. We up 9% year-over-year with approximately $140 million of pre-selling activity on top of that.
As I mentioned earlier, that 35% growth in total sales activity in the quarter, resulting in a record backlog. Transaction volumes continue to demonstrate a broad base of workload requirements with over 3,800 transactions spanning more than 3,100 unique customers in the quarter.
Importantly, we also saw increased customer adoption of our South service portal. Our portal is a key area of focus as we work to create a better customer experience. It also drives efficiencies within Equinix compared to a traditional cost-based ordering. This is one example of our broader focus on digitizing processes and workflows across the company.
Customers placed 20,000 orders through our portal in Q1, up 12% year-over-year. and we intend to continue driving enhancements to this solution. Turning to Solve Smarter, our customers consistently raised 2 key challenges to us. The first is AI infrastructure fragmentation. Enterprises are spending too much time and budget. Navigating dozens of disconnected AI model providers, GPU cloud, data platforms and security services.
The Equinix distributed AI hub, which we introduced at NVIDIA GTC solves this by getting enterprises a single private low latency connection to the entire AI ecosystem. Unlike AI marketplaces built by providers with their own services to sell our distributed AI hub is completely neutral, providing access to all models and cloud so customers can select what's best for them.
The second challenge facing customers is network complexity. Most enterprise networks are not designed to handle distributed AI workloads and it's resulting in degraded AI performance, inflated costs and compliance risks.
Equinix Fabric Intelligence solved these problems by monitoring network performance in real time automatically adjusting configurations and flagging anomalies before they become outages, all without human intervention. Unlike other network management tools that sit on top of the network fabric intelligence is built directly into our fabric interconnection platform.
This is a structural competitive advantage given the more than 500,000 live interconnections across our ecosystem. Our innovation is extending our market leadership and driving growth. Total interconnection revenue was up 9% year-over-year in Q1 and boosted by fabric revenue growth of 26% year-over-year.
Fabric bookings were up 70% year-over-year as our attach rate continues to increase. These growth rates are all on a normalized and constant currency basis. On Bill bolder, we continue to expand our capacity to meet demand. We have 46 major projects underway across 32 markets, including 6 excel projects.
More than 70% of this retail expansion CapEx within our major metros with the remainder focused on critical expansion markets, particularly in our Asia region. Given the strength of our presales motion, approximately 25% of our 2026 retail capacity expansion has already been sold.
We continue to meaningfully grow our pipeline for new power land and capacity expansion opportunities that can enhance our long-term growth prospects in key metros and deliver attractive returns. And we're not just growing, we're doing it responsibly.
Last week, we released our annual sustainability report. It shows how we are building essential infrastructure the world needs in ways that are affordable for our communities, sustainable for our planet and reliable for our customers.
These have long been core Equinix values, and they will continue to guide our future investment decisions. In Q1, we announced an important investment in 1 of the world's most sustainability-focused market as we signed a joint agreement with Canada Pension Plan Investment Board to Paratus at North.
This deal will further enhance our position in the Nordics by giving us access to an installed and active development pipeline of approximately 800 megawatts expected to come online over the next 5 years. At Nord's footprint in key markets such as Copenhagen is complementary to our existing EMEA operations and is well positioned to serve enterprise, cloud and AI growth.
The transaction is subject to closing conditions and is expected to be immediately accretive to AFFO per share upon the closing. Overall, Q1 demonstrated continued momentum across the business, and we see significant opportunities to accelerate growth as we deliver on our strategy.
I'm now going to turn the call over to our new CFO, Olivier Leonetti to go into more detail on our financials. Olivier joined us in March. He has already proven to be an excellent addition to our leadership team. Previously, Olivier was CFO of Eaton and Johnson Controls to large suppliers to the data center industry.
He has a strong track record of delivering profitable growth and creating shareholder value, and we look forward to his contributions to our success as we work to deliver healthy revenue growth margin expansion and superior returns. Olivier, over to you.
Thank you for the kind words, Adaire. I'm delighted to be here, nearly 2 months in, I'm excited about the strength of the markets we serve and very impressed by Equinix company culture vision and unique positioning to serve accelerating customer demand.
I look forward to helping enable our vision by prudently allocating capital and thoughtfully utilizing our balance sheet to drive durable, profitable growth. As Adaire summarized, we are executing well across our business. This was the largest quarter of total sales activity and record up 35% year-over-year.
Reflecting broad demand and strong execution. Customer activity increased across all of our verticals, products and channels. Turning to Q1 results on Slide 7 and with all figures discussed on a normalized constant currency basis. Recurring revenues were $2.3 billion, up 10% year-over-year as our bookings performance from the second half of last year is converting into revenue.
Total revenues were $2.4 billion, up 8% year-over-year. Adjusted EBITDA was $1.2 billion, up 13% year-over-year, resulting in a 51% adjusted EBITDA margin which is up 190 basis points quarter-over-quarter and 300 basis points year-over-year. This is a result of our continued cost discipline power cost benefits and scaling our operating leverage.
As we have discussed, driving additional efficiency would be a focus moving forward. Quarterly AFFO surpassed the $1 billion mark for the first time, increasing 11% year-over-year and AFFO per share was $10.79 a up 10% year-over-year. Please note that adjusted for the [indiscernible] excel lease signing, which I will provide details on in a moment. we came in above the midpoint of our Q1 revenue and adjusted EBITDA guidance ranges.
As Adaire mentioned, we are near execution on the Hampton xScale leads. These types of negotiations are fruit and we have adjusted the expected timing while discussing expanded mutually beneficial terms with our customers. Here are the moving pieces as they relate to guidance over the past couple of quarters.
Our guidance for Q4 2025 assumed $54 million of nonrecurring revenue from the deal based on the original terms being considered. Our guidance for Q1 2026 included the expanded terms with an expected contribution of approximately $80 million of revenue, $65 million of AFFO and $0.65 of AFFO per share. The expanded economics are now included in our guidance for Q2.
This timing shift does not impact our full year outlook because the economics were already incorporated. Now to our nonfinancial metrics, which also demonstrate strong momentum. We increased physical and virtual net interconnections by 5,800 with particular strength in fabric additions.
We added 4,100 net cabinets billing and our backlog of cabinets sold but not yet installed is at a record level. Churn came at 1.7%, primarily due to the benefit of some delayed churn and to focus and execution doing our renewal process. For the full year, we are tracking towards the low end of our 2% to 2.5% guidance range.
And MRR cabinet increased to $2,524 up 7% year-over-year. Reflecting the firm pricing environment and continued increase in density. On Slide 12, our capital investments continue to deliver very strong returns. Consistent with prior years, this quarter, we completed the annual refresh of our stabilized pool, which increased by 5 IBX data centers.
Our 192 stabilized assets increased recurring revenue by 6% year-over-year are collectively 82% utilized and generated a 26% cash-on-cash return on gross PP&E. Turning to our capital structure on Slide 10. At quarter end, we approximately had $3.1 billion of cash and short-term investments on the balance sheet, and our net leverage was 3.8x annualized adjusted EBITDA.
During the quarter, we issued $1.5 billion of senior notes at the blended effective rate of 3.1% and reflecting positive execution in the market and our ability to take advantage of lower cost debt around the world. Our balance sheet and diversified capital program are competitive advantages in all macro environments, particularly so in the kind we see today.
In combination with significant retained cash flow, we continue to access lower cost sources of capital to fund our robust growth opportunity. Now looking at capital expenditures on Slide 11. Total capital expenditures for the quarter were about $1.3 billion, approximately 90% of which was growth and value-accretive capacity expansion. We continue to expect mid-20% unlevered cash-on-cash returns on investment.
Since the last earnings call, we opened 6 projects, adding critical capacity to meet demand across 6 metros. Before we get into guidance, I'll briefly address the energy environment given developments in the Middle East. We systematically hedge energy cost to provide predictability to our customers and broader stakeholders, particularly in volatile periods.
Globally, we are more than 90% hedged for 2026. And as usual, we are progressively hedging into the future. As a result, we expect minimum impact for 2026 even if energy prices were to remain elevated. Finally, please refer to Slides 17 for an update of 2026 guidance with all growth rates discussed on a normalized and constant currency basis.
Based on the robust environment and the team's execution, we are raising guidance across key financial metrics. For the second quarter, we anticipate continuing strength across the business, including MRR growth of 10% to 11% year-over-year. For total revenue, the largest piece to consider is that it includes the expanded economics from the Hampton xScale signing that I provided a moment ago.
Again, please note that these economics were already included in our guidance for the full year. They simply shifted from Q1 into Q2. For the full year, we are raising total revenue guidance by $21 million based on our Q1 outperformance, improving expected total revenue growth range by 100 basis points to 10% to 11%.
We are raising adjusted EBITDA guidance by $24 million, resulting in adjusted EBITDA margins of approximately 51%, a 200 basis point improvement over last year. Additionally, we are raising AFFO guidance by approximately $40 million improving our expected AFFO growth range by 100 basis points to 10% to 12%.
This corresponds to a similar 100 basis point improvement in our expected AFFO per share growth range to 9% to 11%. We -- we continue to execute on our capacity expansion to meet robust customer demand. Excluding xScale and land acquisitions, we now expect total capital expenditures to approximate the top end of our prior range at $4.1 billion, including $280 million to $300 million of recurring spend and approximately $3.8 billion of nonrecurring spend.
Given our confidence in the growth opportunity in front of us, the team continues to evaluate opportunities to accelerate our capacity to deliver growth and value to our shareholders. Overall, we are pleased with our progress and confident in our plan.
We will continue executing with discipline to deliver on our goals and create shareholder value. I now turn the call back over to Adaire.
Thank you, Olivier. Our Q1 results demonstrate strong performance and our outlook reflects underlying strength across the business. We see immense opportunity ahead to drive revenue, enhance margins and deliver attractive AFFO per share growth. But we take nothing for granted.
Our continued success demands focused execution against our strategic priorities and disciplined investment to unlock structurally higher returns. Above all, it calls on every member of our Equinix team to deliver exceptional value for our customers each and every day. This is the mindset guiding us forward, and I'm confident in our direction. We are well positioned across our markets.
We are building momentum in key growth areas, and we remain focused on delivering against the goals we have set. With that, let's open the line for questions.
[Operator Instructions] Our first caller is Ari Klein with BMO Capital Markets. Ari Klein with BMO Capital Markets. We'll go to the next caller, Michael Rollins with Citi.
2. Question Answer
I had a question about some of the comments you made earlier in the call. So I think if I got this right, you mentioned that 8 of the top 10 -- I think it was maybe hyperscalers and 4 of the top 5 -- no clouds are actively expanding with Equinix for AI, 110 separate network nodes.
And I'm curious if you could provide more color, is that 110 in addition to whatever cloud nodes they typically would have? And can you characterize the types of interconnectivity demand that you're already seeing for those AI nodes and how that's informing you maybe early in this environment of the type of growth that's out there from AI for your business model?
Okay. Mike, thanks so much for the question. And maybe let me just clarify a couple of points. So I mentioned that it was 8 of the 10 AI model providers, the LLMs and 4 of the 5 Neo clouds have deployed between the 110 or so separate network nodes to Equinix. And that is in addition to all of the nodes that we see that are being deployed by the hyperscalers in order to manage their connectivity journey.
When we look at the role of the neos here, we can see that for many of them, their journey is evolving a little -- their value proposition was always based on pricing and based on GPU access and largely facilitating large-term training footprint.
Mostly focus with the SaaS and the hyperscaler. As we can see, they're transforming into AI offerings workloads and looking to pursue enterprise customers and medium-sized SaaS companies. we see them as potential inference magnets for our ecosystem going forward. And we see many of them converging, as I've mentioned already, and engaging at Equinix.
It's about a couple of things in terms of the use cases -- it's about network outs that provide connectivity to the CSPs and the NSPs for the NEOs and the L&M. It's about AI inference notes for densely populated metro so a little bit of a different picture. And it's about fabric access to the enterprise customer base of Equinix. So that sums up the 3 things that we're seeing for the OUs of our environment.
Our next caller is Cameron McVeigh with Morgan Stanley.
I wanted to ask about the $140 million in pre-leasing activity. Just curious how tenant appetite is changing and if tenants are willing to commit further in advance for longer terms and really how that's translating to the terms for Equinix, whether through pricing, terms or deposits? Any color there would be helpful.
So pricing remains firm, whether we're looking at presales or bookings within the quarter. And I think the presales booking really provides our customers with security, security in terms of the infrastructure that they're defining and the opportunity to ensure that they are solving for their own compute and energy future. .
So this is something that I think we've done only in the recent past, but we're seeing a great benefit from that in terms of the conversations with our customer and our long-term ability to serve them.
Matt Niknam with Truist.
My question is more big picture on macro. Have you seen any macro dynamics, particularly around rising memory or fuel and energy costs and the prospects for higher IT costs later on in the year, affecting customer behavior at all, whether it's pulled forward demand or pushed out deals if customers are running into supply shortages?
I think as it relates to concerns about energy costs, Olivier mentioned our hedging program which means that we're in a position to be able to continue to support our customers at the price points that we're operating today. .
I would say based on the demand environment that we see that it is a very durable and broad-based demand environment. It is very diverse. And we're not certainly seeing any pullback from customers as it relates to increasing costs, et cetera, at this point in time.
I think you can see that reflected just in the sheer scale of the numbers of transactions and that those transactions occurred across all of our customer segments and also actually equally enough across all industries that were all growing at roughly the same percentage in Q1.
Our next caller is Frank Louthan with Raymond James.
As you see the rising demand for AI inferencing, is there any difference in the incremental capital required that you're seeing to fulfill those new workloads versus what you've traditionally seen? And can you quantify that if there is?
No, we don't see any difference in the capital that will be required notwithstanding the fact that our strategy has been to be very metro focused.
We are located in 77 metros across the world, and we will continue to build on that footprint but that's already embedded into how we've managed our capital because that's part of our 27-year history, and therefore, we don't anticipate any capital differences. I'm going to ask Phillip to add an additional comment here.
Yes. The only thing that I would add on to that, Frank, is that as we are always kind of skating to where the puck is going as they say. And thinking about the types of requirements that are needed for the deployments. And so when you look at some of our facilities that we're going to be bringing online in the next few years, the densities that we are building towards are much higher and much more suited for a lot of the requirements that we're hearing from our customers.
So we're always thinking about where we need to go and what the requirements are of our customers, we're building towards that.
Is that increasing or decreasing the returns that you're looking at going forward with that higher density requirement?
Now the density -- the returns we're underwriting against even those higher densities are still in that mid-20s percent that we've been talking about for a long time.
Our next caller is Vikram Malhotra with Mizuho.
I just want to clarify 2 things. One, just the bookings dipping sequentially. How much of that is seasonal? And maybe you can just some composition of traditional enterprise versus maybe chunky bits? And then just secondly, the interconnection business, given kind of the rapid tripling almost of the fabric business.
How is that playing into interconnection revenue growth overall? You mentioned sort of network enhancements needed there. So I'm just wondering like how does that flow through? Does that mean in the future, we see a greater pickup in the interconnection side?
Yes. So just to comment first on the sequential nature of our annualized gross bookings. First of all, where we've concluded Q1, and Q1 is seasonally a quarter that has traditionally been lower.
But I have to say that I am especially pleased with the performance that we had in given that we came off the back of such a large Q4. And so I think that the team worked really hard to deliver what was our largest Q1 ever and driving our largest backlog ever.
So I look forward to moving that into revenue in the future. And I'm proud that the delivery of our bookings in Q1 isn't just related to top line, but we did it at margins that are growing and profitability that is growing too.
Across the Q1 booking profile, we saw strength, as I mentioned already, across various different industries, but we also saw some very broad-based strength in our under 1 megawatt deal cohort.
As it relates to the second question around interconnection revenue and interconnection revenue growth. And we're obviously very pleased by the performance that we've seen here our Internet connection revenue growth was at 9% on a normalized and constant currency basis.
Fabric revenue growth was at 26%, and our fabric bookings grew 74% year-over-year. And this kind of growth, the value proposition that we're delivering to customers is really behind our investment strategy around our distributed hub and our fabric intelligence, which is in pre-preview with a number of customers and partners who are very positive about the outcomes that we're driving with this solution set.
Our next caller is Jonathan Atkin with RBC.
Yes, I wanted to just follow up on that last response and maybe ask you more directly. Is there a scenario over the next several years, their interconnection growth would exceed the growth that you're seeing and would represent a meaningfully increased percentage of your overall revenue composition?
I guess in some way, Jonathan, we're probably seeing that in our stabilized assets where our stabilized assets are growing at a 6% and interconnection within that asset group is growing at 9%. .
I do believe that there is opportunity for us to continue to grow our footprint and the range of services that we are offering to our customers here because we feel a very specific niche in the market in terms of providing that neutral environment where the ecosystem around AI converges.
And so there is potential for upside here, but that is not yet factored into our plans.
Our next caller is Irvin Liu with Evercore.
And welcome, Olivier. Appreciate the color on energy hedging -- just given your exposure to the Middle East, I wanted to understand whether recent geopolitical cross currency in the region have -- or have had any impact on your operations. specifically related to your ability to sell and/or add IBX capacity?
Yes. Thank you very much for the question. First of all, I think the most important thing for us is the safety of our employees, our customers and our partners, and that was our most important priority as we navigated recent events in the Middle East.
Thankfully, all of our people have remained safe, and our facilities are fully operational. We do have a limited footprint across the region.
We have a total of 6 data centers across the Middle East region, and they're comprising about 1% of total revenues. We have one project underway in Dubai at our DX3 facility. Construction project. And we have seen the RF state of that project be impacted due to the conflict. So limited operational impact, we were able to keep our facilities up and running. But we're watching the situation very carefully.
Our long-term view is that the region will continue to see growth in investment in digital infrastructure as the Middle East itself looks to position itself as a global AI hub.
Our next caller is Nick Del Deo with MoffetNathanson.
First, I want to congratulate Olivier on his appointment. And my question is also for him. I was wondering if you could elaborate kind of share with us your high-level capital allocation and operating philosophies. And whether your previous vantage point as a supplier to the data center industry provides any initial insights into areas where you think Equinix might improve the business or things you'll be focused on? .
Thank you for your question, Nick. First, regarding capital allocation, we're going to keep the course that has worked pretty well for the organization. First, what we want to do to fund our ambition -- ambitious CapEx program, growth program. We want first to use debt as a way to finance our growth.
We can do that based upon the leverage we have today, 3.8x. I mentioned that in my remarks. We will use equity on an opportunistic basis, but the key is going to use debt. Relative to impressions, I guess, that's the question you had as a supplier of Equinix in the formalized I was -- we were all of us very impressed by what we have seen.
We use Equinix always as pioneer in this market. And after 2 months, I've been -- it looks like a marketing comment, but it's true. Impressed by the quality of the team, the culture and also and mainly the rigor with which we run the operation. And what we have said before, you see the play -- we have high-quality data centers in top-tier markets.
We're connecting the world and we are ready to power the AI agent workload. So very happy. We are very differentiated and looking forward to help their and the team to grow this business even more.
Okay. Any particular areas where you're looking to drill down more or too soon to say? .
No. We want to enable the strategy that out there as a lineup, billboard, Solvesmarter, serve better. I'm going to be too many among many others, to enable this strategy, but no change today, not that there was a need to?
Thank you. Our next call is Richard Choe with JPMorgan.
I just wanted to follow up on the churn, 1.7% super low, but I think you mentioned some of it's delayed. And should we go back into the range. I mean, should be above range and -- or the rest of the year at the higher end?
Or could we be seeing a kind of maybe low end or towards the lower end for the full year?
Thanks very much for the question. As you saw at 1.7, we were below the low end of our range. And I think there were probably -- 2 elements as to why that was so. One was the timing of some churn, including our metal business moving forward into this quarter.
And others really is just the continued focus that we've had on the renewal process from our teams and so we're very pleased with the performance that we've seen in Q1. Notwithstanding that we don't want to call victory too early.
And therefore, I think to keep our churn in the range of 2% to 2.5% for the rest of the year, it's the right thing to do. We do believe that our focus on our available to renew contracts. We've been doing that much earlier in the cycle is actually starting to have an impact.
But we will watch those trends closely over the next several or so quarters. And obviously, our aim is to bring churn down consistently over time. But for now, we're holding into the 2 to 2.5 range for the year.
Our next caller is David Guarino with Green Street.
As we think about modeling in these large onetime fees related to xScale leases, I was wondering if there's any framework you can provide us to estimate and forecast how large they might be.
And then kind of tied in with that, we heard some rumors that the Monocle campus might have been pre-leased, but you guys didn't comment on that at all. So could you give an update on what's happening with that project? And how soon we could maybe expect another large xScale leasing fee after the Hampton one?
Look, these transactions are always very complex and multifaceted and particularly as we have very high demand assets locations that are energized within the right time frame in great locations. So I think as we look forward into the second half of next year in terms of Manuka, it is not timing that we have put into the short term is something that we are still working on.
We have a very robust pipeline of interested parties. And obviously, we want to ensure that we're maximizing the outcome for our customers, for our shareholders, for the company. As we look forward into the second half of the year and into 2026, the guide assumes a total NRR of approximately 5.8% for the full year, and a portion of that is associated with xScale leasing.
An additional comment, if I may, David. If you look at the balance of the year, with the exception of the xScale deal we have mentioned many times now, the rest of though the excel deals are relatively small in nature, and we believe that the risk is balanced for the rest of the year. Thanks .
Thank you. Michael Ng with Goldman Sachs.
Adaire, you talked about agents performing best when closer towards the edge -- have you seen some customer workload repatriation or a shift in investment away from public cloud as a result?
And then when enterprises decide to do more in the edge, could you talk a little bit about the customer decision tree between colocated data centers versus on-prem today?
Sure. And so I think the reality of the environment that our customers operate in is the environment that we've been describing on many of these calls, and that is a hybrid multi-cloud environment. where data sits across the plethora of all of those platforms.
And that creates the opportunity for a neutral platform like Equinix to serve customers who want to run agentic workflows across those environments, but need to access the information that fits in more than one location.
So I would certainly say that customers have a multi-cloud environment that they are, of course, looking at the cost associated with their environments as well as important considerations, particularly in locations like Europe around sovereignty and the compliance to the sovereignty legislation, which may mean that certain parts of their data set need to move into a private environment or be repatriated from cloud.
But I wouldn't say that this is a broad-based conversation that we have across our customer base. I think as we talk to CIOs, it's a conversation that is less about on-prem and cloud and more about the journey from token management, token cost all the way through to those kind of sovereign data controls that ensure that the organization is compliant to whatever set of data governance rules that they have in place for their own business.
And that's certainly a conversation that's an important 1 because we can help customers navigate that by providing through the distributed AI hub access to all of the players as well as to private SLL models, which companies have for smaller, less intense AA type activity. So I think the conversation is really about how you navigate from the token and the training all the way through to that compliance conversation often driven by sovereignty in some locations.
Our next caller is Madison Rezaei with Bernstein.
You've talked about potentially building multiple incremental gigawatts with the Build bolder program. With the full year CapEx plan now around $4.1 billion, is this a kind of annual spend we should anticipate for the next couple of years? Is it more front loaded? Do you think the intensity will ramp as you are sort of moving into more large campuses and a short follow-up to that, are you anticipating maintaining the cash-on-cash return level throughout that build process?
Okay. Thank you for the questions. Maybe we'll take that between us given that there's portions for each of us in here. First of all, as I think we mentioned in our materials, we have 3 gigawatts currently either in land under control or in development today at Equinix.
So that's the broad base of the portfolio that we are working with. But as Olivier mentioned in his prepared remarks, we are at the top end of the range that we mentioned for CapEx earlier at Analyst Day last year.
We are continuing to meaningfully grow our pipeline for new power land and capacity expansion opportunities to enhance what we see as the long-term growth prospects in key metros, which, of course, we know delivers very attractive returns.
So we're very pleased and excited about what we see in the business. We're very excited to position ourselves for growth. But you can see that we are at the top end of our range as it relates to from the Analyst Day event when we provided that guide last year. But perhaps I'll flick to Olivier and allow you to comment a little on the returns and so on.
So the diligence we have before to do deals, deploy new CapEx is very strong. The 25% is a target. That's not an aspiration. We are seeing that quarter after quarter. And we feel very comfortable with achieving that return target as we are in a market where demand is oversupply.
So we can be very selective about the deals we take. We are, and we are very differentiated today. And interconnection is more and more an important part of the value proposition of the company. So we feel very confident about this mid-25% target.
Our next caller is Erik Rasmussen with Stifel.
And Olivier, good luck and look forward to working with you. I wanted -- you talked about Maersk, one of your customer highlights. I know you had a liquid cooling deployment in Frankfurt. But maybe just overall, can you give us a sense of where customer demand is for liquid cooling activity today and how many active or signed deployments are using direct to chip or even immersion cooling? And how quickly is that moving from pilots and maybe scale production?
Yes. Thank you. Thank you so much for the question. So we had quite a significant quarter in Q1 as it relates to liquid cooling orders generally, of which Maersk was one I believe it was a 50% growth in terms of our liquid cooling deployments. And today, we have 36 deployments across our footprint of customers using liquid cooling to facilitate the workload and density of the systems that they have put in place. .
It's active across all our regions, and it's something that we continue to evaluate and work closely on with our customers. So that's, I guess, the landscape that we see as far as liquid cooling is concerned. I said, 36 deployment, 7 orders within Q1 across all of our regions, up 50% Q-on-Q.
Our last question comes from Joseph Osha with Guggenheim Partners.
Wow, I made it Kind of a follow-up from the previous question. As you think about these fairly power dense genetic workloads out at the edge of the network, are you encountering situations where either from a physical space of power or just a thermal standpoint, you're running into constraints?
I'm just trying to understand how much of a challenge that is.
I think probably the availability of power would be the largest constraint in our environment. So as densification increases, quite often, we would need to put some space on hold around that particular implementation in order to ensure that IBX, we're meeting not only the obligations of the workload that is the highly dense workload, but also the service level agreements and the obligations that we have with the other customers who are sharing that space and power. .
And that's, I think, one of the reasons why you see the yield on our MRR per cab grow so effectively up to our 2.5% to 4% of 7% year-on-year. partly due to the increase in densification and of course, the association of a value-added products like interconnect with every installation as one of the measures of that.
Thank you. I'll turn the call back over to you for any closing comments.
I just want to thank you all for joining us for our Q1 call. Have a great rest of your day.
Thank you. This concludes today's conference call. You may go ahead and disconnect at this time.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Equinix — Q1 2026 Earnings Call
Equinix — Q1 2026 Earnings Call
Solide Q1-Ergebnisse: starkes AI-getriebenes Nachfragewachstum, Guidance erhöht, xScale‑Timing verschiebt Quartalswirkung ohne Jahresänderung.
📊 Quartal auf einen Blick
- Recurring Revenue: $2,3 Mrd. (+10% YoY)
- Umsatz: $2,4 Mrd. (+8% YoY)
- Adj. EBITDA: $1,2 Mrd. (+13% YoY) mit 51% Marge (+300 Basispunkte YoY)
- AFFO: >$1,0 Mrd. (+11% YoY), AFFO je Aktie $10,79 (+10% YoY)
- MRR/Kabine & Churn: MRR pro Kabine $2.524 (+7% YoY); Churn 1,7% (Jahresziel 2–2,5%)
🎯 Was das Management sagt
- AI‑Fokus: Anteil großer AI‑Deals hoch (~60% der größten Abschlüsse); 8/10 Modellanbieter und 4/5 "Neo" Clouds mit ~110 Nodes bei Equinix.
- Produktstrategie: Ausbau des "Distributed AI Hub" und "Fabric Intelligence" als neutraler, latenzoptimierter Zugang zu Modellen, Clouds und Netzwerken.
- Kapazität & Nachhaltigkeit: 46 Projekte in 32 Märkten; Partnerschaft mit CPP Investments für Nordics (~800 MW Pipeline), Transaktion soll AFFO‑positiv sein.
🔭 Ausblick & Guidance
- Erhöhte Ziele: Full‑Year Umsatzwachstum nun 10–11% (+100 bps), Adj. EBITDA‑Marge ~51%, AFFO‑Wachstum 10–12%, AFFO/Aktie +9–11%.
- CapEx: Erwartet am oberen Ende ~ $4,1 Mrd. excl. xScale/Land; Ziel für unlevered Cash‑on‑Cash ~mid‑20%.
- xScale‑Timing: Hampton xScale‑Erlöse (~$80M Umsatz, $65M AFFO, $0,65 AFFO/Aktie) verschoben Q1→Q2, Jahresprognose unverändert.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- AI‑Nodes & Interconnect: Nachfrage umfasst direkte Inferenz‑Nodes, Fabric‑Zugänge und Netzkonnektivität; Fabric‑Revenue +26% YoY, Fabric‑Bookings deutlich zweistellig.
- Pre‑leasing & Pricing: $140M Presales; Management sieht feste Preise und frühe Commitments als Absicherung gegen Energie/Versorgungsrisiken.
- Kapazitäts‑/Power‑Risiken: Densifizierung erhöht Bedarf an Power; Verfügbarkeit von Leistung bleibt limitierender Faktor, Liquid‑Cooling‑Deployments steigen (36 aktiv).
⚡ Bottom Line
- Implikation: Equinix profitiert früh von agentischer AI‑Adoption: Umsatz, Margen und AFFO‑Ziele wurden angehoben; hohe CapEx ist gezielt und mit Renditeziel mid‑20% begründet. Kurzfristige Volatilität durch xScale‑Timing und lokale Power/Land‑Constraints bleibt Risikofaktor.
Equinix — Morgan Stanley Technology
1. Question Answer
Okay. Might as well get started. Thank you all for coming. My name is Cameron McVeigh. I cover communications infrastructure here at Morgan Stanley. And pleased to welcome Jon Lin, Chief Business Officer at Equinix.
Thank you, Cameron.
Welcome. And before we get started, I have to read this. For important disclosures, please see the Morgan Stanley research disclosure website. If you have any questions, please reach out to your Morgan Stanley sales representative.
Okay. Done. Jon, let's get started. Equinix reported fourth quarter and full year earnings in February. CFO, Keith Taylor, called it the best quarter ever. Jon, what in your view was the main driver of this momentum?
Yes. I think a couple of different areas there. I'd say, first and foremost, when you look at the performance of the business in terms of our bookings, which is how we treat our customer sales essentially best quarter ever. And I think in a recurring revenue business, we're always under pressure to do that. But to be able to deliver that in a momentum that we're seeing around that, I'd say, I think for the full year of '25, we end up delivering 27% growth in bookings year-over-year. I think for Q4 end up being closer to a 40-plus percent number compared to the previous Q4 of the prior year. So it really just shows, hey, you're starting to see continued momentum in the business in terms of customer demand manifesting across a number of different dimensions.
I'd also say in terms of managing the business, I'd say we're continuing to be -- see continued improvements on driving operating margins. Also, the treasury team has done a fantastic job of managing the balance sheet, continuing to do work on our capital raises, et cetera. So when you put all of that together, I think it just put us in an incredible position to win. And that bookings and that customer growth was also across a really distributed base. I think we had 4,500 deals across 3,400 customers. And so it's not one particular segment that ends up translating into across both service providers and enterprises and across different segments inside the enterprise base, really sustained demand.
Great. And as you just laid out, solid 2026 guidance was well ahead of market expectations in the previous guide given at the Analyst Day in June. Maybe just talk about your key priorities and key focus for the year.
Yes. I think 3 different areas there. First, continuing to capitalize on the customer demand that we're seeing out there, satisfying the requirements. It is definitely an area where, one, we've got to make sure we've got the capacity to be able to satisfy the customer requirements. We've got to make sure we've got the coverage and kind of mechanisms from a sales and marketing standpoint to get in front of customers, hear the requirements earlier to be able to understand and shape the demand as they're thinking about these AI requirements.
Over the course of the last 3 years, I think we've been looking at AI at large and our early read around the industry trend was going to be -- there's going to be a lot of activity on the AI training side, which I think we've all seen. There's going to be a lot of investment into that, again, which we've all seen. Our belief was always the durable value creator for AI is going to be around inference. And when that materializes in a real way, that's when we'll want to go ahead and continue to step up in terms of our activity. And I would say that's what we're seeing. I think some of the announcements that we had at Analyst Day around our CapEx intensity and the increase there was a real realization that we're starting to see the enterprise takeoff here around durable use cases, around value creation for them.
And it's not just on the service provider side where, of course, you'd expect service providers to invest early to be able to see like build in front of where the revenue capture was going to be. And so now we're seeing that kind of long-term trend across multiple different segments around various use cases, both ones that are going to be agentic in nature as we're all hearing about now around how that's going to change things around generative AI, around also though core machine learning systems across different modalities that are going to need different intersections with different data sources. And we believe our -- again, Equinix' fundamental value is when data is from different locations, whether that's geographic, whether that's in different clouds, whether that's from different counterparties, we're the logical place to interconnect all of that and really bring that to life. And so we're starting to see that demand.
So the priority #1 is keep building as fast as we can around that, keep delivering that capacity to support these requirements, keep staying in front of customers to understand not just where are those requirements to land immediately, but also where are those requirements into the future so that we can -- again, you've heard us talk about we're preselling more than we ever have in the past. We want to be able to capture those requirements to inform our development pipeline as well.
The second area is just we're continuing to drive improved operating margins for the business. I would say, again, using a lot of the tools that we're looking at for digital transformation that our customers are talking about, we're also seeing the opportunity to transform our lead-to-cash systems, our kind of back-office systems to be able to drive increased efficiency there, and really flatten the curve in terms of the growth of those costs.
And then the third area is managing the balance sheet. Again, capital-intensive business, making sure we've got kind of best-in-class cost of capital access to be able to deliver services and build as we're -- again, a lot of our construction can be multiyear in front of when the revenue is going to show up. We want to make sure we have the best balance sheet and structure possible to drive that.
Great. That's helpful. Jon, I wanted to ask on latency. How often does the issue of latency come up when you're speaking to customers? And are there any particular workloads that are latency sensitive? Maybe how do you expect Equinix to serve a greater share of those workloads going forward?
Yes. Certainly, all the time because we bring it up. But you think about it from 2 lenses on for interconnection requirements for our customers, there's both the latency and also the throughput required for these workloads for AI in particular, but across the board. And the way Equinix has decided where to locate ourselves geographically, operating in 77 metros in 37 countries now around the globe, it's to be closer to where the eyeballs are, right? We're not developing our data center campuses where there's cheap power. We're not like looking for empty farmland. We're actually located where the nexus of population and like fiber connectivity exists so that we can serve those workloads.
And so whenever we're out there, we like to say, I think we're within 90% of the world's population within 10 milliseconds, right? And so when you think about 10 milliseconds, it's faster than the blink of an eye, it really lets you serve almost any kind of workload that is latency sensitive, whether that's real-time interactions, whether that's gaming, whether that's financial trading, whether that's media distribution most effectively, there's a lot of different areas that we can drive around that. And so those conversations come up a lot.
I'd say for AI, in particular, it ends up being twofold. One, when you're -- when all of us are interacting with our chatbot of choice, like that's not particularly latency sensitive, right? We're all waiting for the dots there and like the token generation takes longer than the latency of the network. Where it does become valuable, though, is when you start actually dealing with multimodal systems, so different data pools that are coming in there being ingested by your AI, well, every time that machine needs to go out, establish a new connection, find a new data source, get that and process that, well, that's like essentially hair pinning that traffic back and forth. And so when you start seeing those effects, that's when you really start to see latency sensitivity come into play.
The second is any kind of machine-to-machine communication. Again, when you start interacting with humans, we're all slow, that's okay, especially on a Monday morning. But when you start seeing the machines actually trying to converse with each other, if you're not able to have the lowest latency possible, well, that's just costing you either like time to token or time to value, whatever your transaction might be. And so in the case of financial services, that might look like, hey, for risk management calculations for end of month runs, that's not particularly latency sensitive. When you're trying to do trading and you're trying to make sure that like you understand what your next decision is going to be on a purchase around that or you're trying to go ahead and inform what your next set of currencies that you might want to move during a day period might look like around that or commodities today, right? Like any of that, the latency sensitivity can be dramatically higher. And so like that's an example of a workload.
But I also mentioned like in addition to latency, the throughput has actually become a more and more important element of the conversation. And like for a long time, we've been dealing with data across the network is increasing. But I would say post-COVID, it had kind of plateaued a little bit, right? I mean HD content is HD content is HD content. 3D-s didn't come about. 4K like streaming is there, but it's not massively relevant in terms of passing this. So the part that we had, as an industry, been thinking about was like what's going to be the next big driver of traffic across the network.
And I would say AI is an example of that, right? The ability to process AI is entirely reliant on the ability to process data and actually like process those workflows quickly. Every time that, that data is hung up on the network instead of hitting your GPU, you're costing yourself money, right? The GPU is the most expensive thing on the planet right now in terms of bringing that to life. And you'll hear Jensen talk about that tomorrow, like the unit of value that is most important is making sure that these GPUs are maximized. And that's why we're focused so much around like, well, in order to maximize that GPU, you've got to make sure that data is flowing into that thing as quickly as possible. So that's increased the amount of throughput required.
So we have -- for Equinix, a software-defined network that we call Fabric. It connects to both the cloud and all of our locations together. When we started that, those were 1 gig circuits, growing to 10-gig circuits with like 10 gig ports, growing to 100 gig ports. And now it's like we're upgrading that network fully across the network to 400 gig ports with 100-gig DCs, right? And so a 10x multiple in terms of the throughput and capacity required. And that can be anywhere from our service providers that are looking to drive AI traffic and workloads into enterprise deployments in private clouds to, again, enterprises trying to move data and workloads from different clouds into a central data repository so that they can have their private AI work against that.
Great. Related to that point, during your presentation at the Analyst Day, you mentioned partnerships with NVIDIA, Dell, Groq. How is Equinix leveraging these relationships? How has the partnership evolved? How do you expect these partnerships to help capture more of these AI workloads?
Yes. We're in a unique position in the marketplace as Equinix, where like we've talked about the neutrality of our business, and that's been core to our thesis since we were founded 27-some years ago now. And neutrality means a couple of things. One is we're carrier neutral. So we invite all of the different carriers to come to our facilities and exchange traffic, but it also means we're technology neutral, right? So we want to make sure that we understand and can bring to life all of the most important technologies in the world to our customers. And that's both from a sales perspective, but more importantly, from how can we accommodate that and how can we bring that to life for these deployments.
Our partnership with NVIDIA started maybe 5 years ago, right, before AI was a real thing and before enterprise AI became a real thing. But what we saw was, hey, they're making incredible progress around machine learning, and that's going to continue to be more and more relevant. Well, when that infrastructure comes to life, how are we going to be able to support that for our customers in our data centers. And so a lot of our conversations start there. So they've ended up evolving and obviously becoming an incredible partner from a go-to-market perspective.
But first, we want to understand how can we help them bring this technology to the rest of the world's customers. Again, our customers are the world's digital leaders at 10,500 customers now, roughly divided, 50% of them are service providers. So we've got all of the major cloud providers, all the major networks and all of the emerging ones, the neo clouds that are developing and all of the enterprises that then need to consume those services.
So it's really important for us to then not just understand, but then also be able to take an opinion to these customers like when they're asking how can I support these liquid cooled GB200s? I have no idea. I don't have liquid cooling in my enterprise data center. We can tell them, oh, we've already thought this through. We've worked with NVIDIA for 18 months on designing solutions around this. We can operate this for you with the same reliability of any production facility tomorrow for you, right? And you can go ahead and start deploying. And so that comfort level that can come from that, but also the value then that they can get from that technology becomes very powerful.
That's helpful. And on the topic of liquid cooling, curious if you could provide an update on the rollout of these liquid cooling solutions in the new and existing capacity. And then just how important is liquid cooling for AI inference?
Yes. So Equinix has about 280 data centers around the world. Around 100 -- slightly more than 100 of them at this point across 45 metros, again, globally, are liquid cooling like able to support, right? We've done pre-engineering work, and these include facilities of ours that are 10, 15 years old, where we understand what the central plant looks like. We understand how to bring water in cooling systems directly to a customer infrastructure, and we're actually comfortable operating that, right? I'd say 3 or 4 years ago, if you asked a data center operator, oh, we're going to have water coming to customer equipment that's like heavily electrically loaded. Is that going to be okay? Everyone is like, that might be pretty challenging for us.
And so we spent a lot of time figuring out, well, how do you actually operationalize that, right? The plumbing is one piece, but knowing what to do in the event of a leak, knowing what to do in the event of a fire, knowing what to do in the event of an operational situation where if you lose cooling capacity into that liquid, these machines are so hot that you will thermally overrun essentially within seconds, like that's obviously a more complicated scenario, right? So to be able to do this in production and be globally consistent around that.
So we did that work about 2 years ago, right, in terms of understanding how to productize the capability for liquid cooling, bring that to life for customers and have been solving for that in what we would consider like a standardized, productized way. We had been doing this as one-offs though for customers for over a decade, right? And so like customers would ask us and we try and figure that out. So that is going great.
I'd say we continue to see customer demand scale now, which is super exciting to see. I think we built honestly, in advance of where those requirements were going to be. And now we actually understand that pretty well. We're doing this in a repeatable motion. It's still, though, from a like total percentage of deployments or like customer request basis, it's still the minority, right, to be clear. It's -- when we see these requirements, again, in the 3,600 transactions that we talked about there in the like low double-digit percentages of total deployment. So call it, maybe several dozen to maybe 100, we'll have inquiries around that and figure out how to support that.
So it's still relatively low volume. But these workloads are generally -- when they are liquid cooled, it's almost always going to be an AI deployment. That's probably the most expensive gear that's on the planet that's going into those deployments. And so we want to make sure that we're satisfying the customer on that delivery.
That's great. Jon, I wanted to hit on cabinet density. Maybe just an update on your power density across your existing portfolio versus some of the planned data centers coming online, and how we should think about the average power density currently and at what rate that might start to tick up over time?
Yes. It's an interesting one. Obviously, you look at like Grace Blackwell, and that's at 120 kilowatts of cabinet for liquid cooled deployment supporting the latest NVIDIA, and that's going to go up, right? We all know like NVIDIA is talking about 300 kilowatts of cabinet for future architectures around that. And that's true. Like, again, the deployments that we have supporting some of that are at 120 kilowatts of cabinet. But when you think about the cabinets that are also supporting that, right? So it might be 4 or 8 cabinets of 120 kilowatts a cabinet GPU capacity, it will need 20 cabinets of storage. It will need another like 5 cabinets of networking gear and infrastructure to support that. And so that average can actually come down pretty rapidly.
Across our new deals, I think new deals booked were at 6.6 kilowatts a cabinet across the entire Equinix fleet. Like our existing base, though, across all of the things that are deployed and live is somewhere just north of 4 kilowatts a cabinet. When we think about data center design for the future, we're certainly upticking that though, right? And like the latest design that we're deploying in Dallas, I want to say, is around 18 kilowatts a cabinet. We generally think somewhere between the 15 to 20 depending on the mechanical infrastructure that we have in place. That feels like the right average.
And the reason I say that is we'll have liquid cooling to support as dense as you want. I think the latest designs where the team was telling me it's more like 500 kilowatts of cabinet or maybe even a megawatt. It's just you need a bigger pipe fitting for that, which blows my mind. But the important part is it gives you the flexibility, though, right? Again, if we used up, let's say, it ends -- let's say we're wrong on density that ends up being overly dense. We can support that with the liquid cooling infrastructure that we've deployed there. All it means is we strand shell, right? And honestly, the shell of a data center is the cheapest part about the construction. We want to maximize the utility feed that we're getting out of the utility provider. We want to maximize our electrical and mechanical systems. So we're delivering that.
If we're wrong the other way, if you build too dense and you actually can't sell that dense, you've stranded all of your capital investment on all of your electrical and mechanical plants. So that's a really bad outcome. And what we've seen over the years is it's really hard to tell where the puck is going to land. Our data center investments when we're building them, this is not a 3-year investment, right? This is a 2-year construction project, and we're expecting that to be able to deliver revenue for us for the next 20-plus years.
Like we want to make sure we're thinking about flexibility of that infrastructure then and the long-term value that, that thing can drive for us because we're not just worried about the customer for today, worried about the customer on the renewal. We're worried about the computers and workloads that will be supporting there. And what we've seen over time is that can move, right? Again, everybody has been focused on GPU density and like the training in that density. It is certainly very dense.
When we look in -- and we've been talking with silica start-ups for the last 5 years, when you think about inference and even like NVIDIA's acquisition of Groq, the AI inference chips are actually much less dense, right? The compute required to drive that, the complexity of the silica is significantly lower. And when you think about inference, a lot of that can be air cooled, that can be lower density. And 5 years ago, everyone was saying, hey, Arm is going to be the -- replace all of x86 chips in every data center, densities are going to go down to 4 kilowatts a cabinet. And maybe that will happen, right? So we want to make sure we're designing though so that we can go ahead and drive revenue and value for the long term.
Got it. So I'm curious how you think about price elasticity of your customer base. Monthly recurring revenue per cabinet has been going up. And would you expect this to continue over 2026?
I think there's definitely some amount of price elasticity there. I think it's certainly something that we're always trying to identify and figure out, hey, where are the opportunities for us. And it comes from a couple of directions. One is our pricing per cabinet will go up like inflation is a real thing around the world, right? And like our input cost in terms of data center construction, development, all of that, it has been going up over time and probably will continue to. Utility costs are highly variable. That can go up over time. The density of the cabinet itself, we're delivering, again, more kilowatts into a cabinet than in the past. So that can drive pricing and yield up on a per cabinet basis. Our interconnection offerings continue to drive more and more value for our customers. And again, one of the reasons Q4 was so great for us, like when Keith says it's firing on all cylinders, like interconnection actually started to reinflect in terms of growth, and we're starting to actually see that go up again, that drives more dollars into that yield.
So I'd say, overall, it's a complex algorithm to be able to get to exactly how far you can push that. But I will say the part that's very like interesting over the course of the last like 2 years, especially around AI and the importance of the workloads that are being driven there, the value creation being done out inside of that infrastructure now and also the pricing of like the GPUs and that technology stack is significantly higher than your standard like web servers of the past, right? And so when more and more value gets created out of that deployment, then there's a lot more elasticity around like, well, it's going to cost more to make sure it relies -- runs reliably is always on and can be connected to all of the data sources that matter like people are like, okay, I'll pay up to be able to go ahead and make sure that I'm maximizing my dollar value out of this massive capital investment that we're putting in.
Great. Jon, I wanted to be sure we mentioned power and talk about it. On the last earnings call, Adaire had mentioned the 3 gigawatts of developable capacity is powered or close to being powered. Can you talk about maybe just the power procurement environment and potential challenges Equinix is seeing at the moment?
Yes. It's -- on a global basis, it's interesting and like for the first time to be able to see in the mass media like talk about data centers all the time. So infrastructure is sexy again, that's great, except when it's negative press. It's fascinating, right? I'd say, one, you have to be long-term thinkers in this space to be able to have the relationship with the utilities that matter, and they have to trust you to know that you're going to be there. And candidly, there's a lot of money that's come into the data center space. They aren't long-term operators. They're putting a lot of weird requests in. And as regulated utilities are, they have to respond to those, right? They're not allowed to just say like, I have no idea what you're talking about, and I've never seen you before, I'm not going to give you power. They have to respond to that.
And so that creates a lot of challenges for the entire market of like, well, how do you sort between all of these different requests that may actually be at the end of it with one customer underneath that load, right? And so you end up seeing gigawatts worth of power requests coming into one particular market or jurisdiction. And again, many of us in the industry are like, oh, we know exactly what hyperscalers are, that customer wants that requirement. It's not actually like 2 gigawatts, it's maybe 500 megawatts, and there's this many people that are all trying to sell to that one customer, trying to get power certainty on land.
So we've been working with the utilities, and I'm really, really happy with the work that we've done there and just say like, hey, like raise the bar, right? Like actually force people to make it a little bit harder to get access to the utilities actually put processes in place that require like payments for these load studies. So it can't just be random land developers doing that. We want to make sure that there's real long-term providers that are credible making these requests so that we can get some of the noise out of the system. Again, do it fairly. That's obviously very important for us, and we're very serious about our neutrality. Like we want to make the rules for everybody the same, but like just raise the bar a little bit so that you can get some of the noise out of the system. And that's been a great help.
And then the fact that we're willing to do that, and we're willing to invest in all of the development, and we've been very like loud and open with the communities at large, along with the utility providers like the data center industry needs to make sure that we're paying the fair share of what we're doing, whether that's net new generation creation or transmission costs that we're creating so that we're protecting consumer rate payers for paying for what we're doing as an industry, right? Because -- and one of those is just from an ethos basis, we take that very seriously.
Again, we're going to be long-term owners and operators of these facilities. Our people live there. I live in Northern Virginia. like I see the data center development. I want to make sure like my kids are having the benefit of the tax revenue, et cetera, around that. And so we're going to be in there for a long time, and we're really deeply partnered with the communities.
But the second part is like if we look like more selfishly around that or more commercially, if we're doing bad things and consumer ratepayers are like ending up being impacted, you're going to get regulated. And like that's not a good outcome and you're starting to see the pushback now, right? Because again, I would say some players that were working in this industry weren't thinking as long term around that and you start seeing people say like, we should put a moratorium, like these data center things are going to like impact customer housing.
So I would just say it's an opportunity for the industry as a whole to kind of grow up, take this seriously and work with government, right, work in close partnership to say like we need to do this. Like one of the good things that I'm seeing out of the administration right now is like seeing, hey, there seems to be that lean of -- we need to make sure we're protecting the consumers from the impact of this net new piece.
We've been working with whether it's ComEd or PG&E, you might see some announcements that went out over the past couple of months where, again, because we're working with the utility around this and consuming load of generation that was already there, it actually reduces the consumer payer's price, right? And again, we're paying for substation development. We're paying for actually upgrades to the transmission system to be able to take that. If you have unused generation that's out there in the system, well, the consumer is paying for that as well, right, in terms of a higher unit cost on their power. And so the ability to have that load is useful.
You're starting to see more and more happen in the space, though, right? And I think there's a lot of talk right now about, hey, if you're going to bring large load on to portions of the grid, you've got to go ahead and make sure that you're actually kind of bringing your own electrons, so to speak, creating net new generation around that. And like total believers in that, right? Huge believers that we need to make sure that this industry as a whole is paying our share of the way around that. And whether that's ourselves or our customers around that, like the total economic benefit that we're driving around this is high enough that we should be able to take that.
And I think that, that's a really important message to communities at large. When they hear about data center development, and I'm sure all of you guys have been covering something like that and watching the space, there's a lot of push like what are these things actually doing? And it's like, yes, the data centers are not producing like cat pictures and stuff like some are. But really, like it is the fundamental like driver of economic activity now, right? Like digital infrastructure is the factory of today. It's the economic -- it's the mall of today. It's the economic center that's happening because so much is happening inside of these facilities.
And so it's really important for us as an industry and for our investors, et cetera, to understand that and be able to tell that to your stakeholders around like, hey, like this is actually how like GDP is created now, right? It's a meaningful portion of that, that's going to show up digitally. That's what's happening in the data center, right? It's actually coming online, converting power into money for somebody. That money for power is actually not for the data center developer generally. It's for the customers inside that data center.
Great. And just a follow-up on that point. How does Equinix internally, how are you thinking about using grid connections versus some of these behind-the-meter power solutions, you think about fuel cells or turbines? How does that fit into the strategy?
Yes. I mean we're operating, like I said, in 77 markets across 37 countries. So it's really all of the above strategy. In some jurisdictions and again, in the vast majority of the time, we want to work with the local utility, right? Like grid power is the best solution because you end up creating more shared resource across a broader set of constituents to be able to do that. In cases where the grid is not able to accommodate our power requirements, so we have done and actually created like net new power generation.
And we're looking into the future around that as well as like, hey, how can we scale that up? How can we do that? It's -- on a global basis, post kind of World War II and kind of the industrialization of the global economy, like we've actually generally seen power utilization and draw go down, right, for -- I want to say like a 40-year period. And only recently is it starting to inflect back up because of electrification of the grid, electrification of vehicles, more efficiency around heat pumps, like all of that's driving electric utilization up and then data centers as well. And that was like before AI, like you were actually, for the first time, actually seeing like draw increase across the globe. And then now you layer on, hey, all of a sudden, there's also all of this data center activity associated with AI and the electricity consumed by that. So that's net new like load that's coming on.
And for a long time, again, because utility was going down, well, those power plants were still there, right? You hear about all these like shuttered power plants. It was like, well, they were created because we were smelting aluminum. And I will say, from an environmental impact to data centers far, far better than like having aluminum smelting in the community you're operating in. And so like that's kind of the replacement that we're talking about now, just like, okay, it's fundamentally converting power into financial benefits.
That's helpful. We have a few minutes left. I wanted to open it up to any audience Q&A, if there are any questions. Now you can think about them. I'll ask one.
Go ahead in front -- there's a mic running here.
Just want to -- if you could just talk a bit more about the 20-year life of the assets and how you see that playing out? What do you -- obviously, the CapEx you've spent, a 2-year build cycle and then you're talking about the 20 years. In terms of the upgrade cycle you expect to have to do to make that 20-year life cycle work for the assets. Can you just talk a bit more about that?
Sure. Yes. And I would say it's 20-year plus, right? Again, most of our assets we actually think about as essentially perpetual. Like we've constructed the data center. We're putting in the maintenance CapEx to keep it going there, but it's going to be generating revenue for the entire -- like outside of our planning horizon, I guess, is the way I would say it. Some of that does require maintenance CapEx, right? Obviously, we're putting that in on an annual basis. There's also requirements like for some of the longer lead elements of that, like we started categorizing like redevelopment CapEx to say like, hey, if we have to replace the 15-year plant, like some of the core data center infrastructure, whether that's the generators that are running or whether that's like some of the electrical switching gear or some of the central chiller plant, that could be like a 15-year asset, and we might be able to say, okay, we can put enough maintenance in there to get a little bit longer out of that. But at some point, you're going to go ahead and want to refresh that.
The plus side of all of that work is there's been so much additional work that's happened in terms of efficiency gains and like just upgrading and understanding of how to do that mechanical and electrical work more efficiently that we can upsize that, right? And so in a lot of cases, we've ended up taking like -- take our DC2 facility right now that's going through some of this redevelopment, we can add incremental power availability into that site from both efficiency and from upsizing the infrastructure, which means we can actually generate more revenue into the same facility, right? And so that's how we think about that from an underwriting perspective. But yes, I mean, we're essentially continuing to model our ability to generate revenue out of these things for a very, very long time.
Could you briefly touch on xScale? If you think about it 5 years down the line, has it become a bigger part of your overall business compared to how you thought about it a year or 2 ago?
Yes, it's a great question. I'd say yes is the answer. And certainly, that's the reason that we -- when we started xScale, we were thinking, okay, it's -- our customers have been asking for it for a long time. For folks who don't know what about xScale, basically, our core business for Equinix on the data center side, they're multi-tenant facilities that we call retail, right? In any given facility, we'll have anywhere from dozens to multi-hundreds of customers inside one data center. A large part of the market, like the hyperscalers and some of the other large customers may want an entire facility for themselves, right? And so when we look at that, our average expectation on returns across where we're developing capital for our core business, it's in the -- I think our target that we've said publicly is 25%. It's in the 20% like mid-20s and up range, right? And it's like, again, it's a beautiful business.
I'd say when you're developing a single-tenant facility for a customer, like your costs are pretty well known, right? It's pretty apparent to the market at large around that. And yields around those facilities are generally, call it, in the high single digits to low teens. You can take some leverage on that, work that up into the mid-teens. So for 2 reasons then, Equinix had not wanted to pursue that as one of our growth vectors: one, it can be highly capital intensive with a much lower return; and then two, from an actual like the structuring of that because you want to apply so much leverage to that, we thought we wouldn't be able to maintain or at the time when we were thinking about it, get to investment grade or maintain investment grade, if we were doing a bunch of hyperscale development around that. And that's largely been true, right? When you look at outside of the data center landscape, I think there's 2 maybe like depending on how you squint, maybe 4 public players right now. And that's the reason why, right?
And so when we looked at it, though, our customers were asking us loudly enough for this product that we said, okay, let's see if we can figure out how to do this. We ended up creating a development joint vehicle structure. Our first one was with GIC, the sovereign wealth fund in Singapore, then we did one with PGIM. Now we announced one recently in the U.S. with both GIC and CPPIB, the Canadian Pension Investment Board together for $15 billion in the U.S. So that's where we're doing kind of solving for the hyperscalers around that.
I'd say -- so yes, in the sense that our initial investment for xScale was we had gotten $7.5 billion of equity commitment there. We've tripled that in total size now with the equity commitment from CPP and GIC, and we're executing against that. And I'd say it's delivered what we were hoping out of that, right? One, it gives us capital efficiency, but still gives us the customer -- being able to solve for the customer demand in the ways that we wanted to. And it's also given us quite a bit more scale in terms of our procurement capability on utility as well as equipment. So it's been good, and we'll continue rolling forward with it.
Excellent. We are out of time. Jon Lin, thank you so much.
All right. Thanks all.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Equinix — Morgan Stanley Technology
Equinix — Morgan Stanley Technology
🎯 Kernbotschaft
- Kern: Kunden- und Buchungsdynamik treibt Wachstum: Equinix meldet starke Buchungen (27% FY'25; Q4 ~40% YoY) und sieht wachsende Nachfrage für künstliche Intelligenz (KI)-Inferenz, die hohe Durchsatz- und niedrige Latenz-Anforderungen erzeugt. Management priorisiert Kapazitätsaufbau, Margenverbesserung und Bilanzstärke sowie Technologie-Neutralität und Partnerschaften (z.B. NVIDIA).
🚀 Strategische Highlights
- Kapazität: Fokus auf schnelle Bereitstellung von Rechen- und Netzkapazität, preselling nimmt zu; Fabric-Netzwerk wird auf 400G/100G aufgerüstet, um Durchsatzbedarf zu decken.
- Betrieb: Verbesserung der operativen Margen durch Digitalisierung von Lead‑to‑Cash und Cost‑Efficiency; laufende Maintenance- und Redevelopment‑CapEx für langfristige Asset‑Nutzung.
- Partnerschaften: Neutralitätsprinzip bleibt zentral; enge Kooperationen mit NVIDIA, Dell, Groq unterstützen Liquid‑cooling-Angebote und Go‑to‑Market‑Strategie.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Konkretes: Management nennt >100 Rechenzentren mit Liquid‑cooling‑Fähigkeit in ~45 Metros; Liquid‑cooling bleibt aktuell Minoritätsvolumen (einige Dutzend bis ~100 Anfragen). xScale wurde skaliert (US‑Joint‑Venture ~$15 Mrd. mit GIC/CPPIB). Buchungen‑Momentum und erhöhte CapEx‑Intensität zur Unterstützung von KI‑Inferenz wurden betont.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Asset‑Leben: Management spricht von 20+ Jahren Nutzungsdauer, regelmäßigen Maintenance‑CapEx und punktuellen Redevelopments zur Upsize‑Leistung; kein detaillierter Refresh‑Zeitplan genannt.
- xScale: Nachfrage für Single‑Tenant Flächen wächst; Struktur mit Kapitalpartnern erhöht Kapital‑Effizienz, konkrete Mix‑Prognosen für die nächsten 5 Jahre bleiben breit.
- Strom & Netz: Power‑Beschaffung und lokale Utility‑Risiken zentral; Equinix arbeitet an Net‑New‑Generation, Community‑Absprachen und selektiven Behind‑the‑Meter‑Lösungen.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Deutliche Nachfrage‑ und Buchungsdynamik untermauert Wachstumsstory für KI‑Inferenz; Ausbau von Kapazität, Fabric‑Upgrades und xScale‑JV verbessern Marktzugriff und Kapitalallokation. Hauptrisiken: Power‑Beschaffung, Timing der CapEx‑Auszahlung und die Frage, wie schnell Liquid‑cooling/hohe Dichten zur breiten Masse werden.
Equinix — Citi’s Miami Global Property CEO Conference 2026
1. Question Answer
[Technical Difficulty] with us, Equinix and CEO, Adaire Fox-Martin. This session is for Citi clients only and disclosures have been made available at the corporate access desk. [Operator Instructions]. Adaire, we'll turn it over to you to introduce your company and team, provide any opening remarks, tell the audience the top reasons an investor should buy your stock today, and then we'll get into Q&A.
Okay. Good morning, everyone. Thank you so much for joining us so early this morning, and thank you to Citi for giving us the opportunity. I'm joined by Phillip Konieczny here, who is our SVP for Finance, our treasury function and our IR function reporting to Phillip. And together, we look forward to addressing your questions today. And then I will have Phillip read that disclosure. Thank you.
Am I on here?
yes.
Okay. Some of what we will talk about today contains forward-looking statements. Please read our SEC filings for information about factors that could affect these statements, and I'll turn it back to Adaire.
So the top reasons for buying Equinix stock. I mean maybe let me just do this. I'll just lay out 4 reasons, and then I'll come back and drill into each one and see how that lands. First, the demand for infrastructure is absolutely surging and Equinix is at the center of that demand. Second, Equinix provides an essential layer of connectivity. Thirdly, we're building as the backbone of AI inference economy. And fourthly, we're executing exceptionally well against the opportunity.
So maybe let me just go back and drill a little on each of those. First of all, the demand for infrastructure is absolutely surging. Customers are asking us the same questions that probably many of your companies are asking around how they can differentiate their business models, their business process, their business outcome with AI as an enabler of those process changes. And that question then leads to considerations about the infrastructure that will be necessary to support that. And there's no doubt that, that infrastructure is much more complex and much more distributed than it has ever been before, and this plays directly to a core strength of Equinix. So our infrastructure demand element is a key factor in driving the growth scenario that we're experiencing today.
Second, Equinix is the essential layer of connectivity. We are very much the neutral ground where AI, cloud and networking requirements converge. So we enable enterprises to connect and to extract real business value. And there are reasons why that is so. First of all, there are advantages that Equinix has built over decades. We have the market-leading number of cloud on-ramps. We are a global organization with presence in many critical metros. We have the broadest enterprise customer base in the segment and more than 0.5 million business-to-business interconnections that are active today. So we are that essential layer of connectivity. These are our core strengths, and we will continue to build and evolve on them.
In the Q4 that just passed, we saw the role that AI has in driving our business momentum. 60% of our largest deals in our Q4 portfolio could be attributed to AI workloads. Now interestingly, of that 60%, 50% of those were led by enterprises. So companies in the retail, financial services, health care and media sectors making use of Equinix to deploy their AI workloads. We also saw an uptick in our liquid cooling sales during Q4. We had 11 sales of liquid cooling during Q4 and 5 of those 11 interestingly went into New York campus to support financial services. So we're certainly supporting the ability to land these workloads in an Agentic world where we're supporting it with network diversity, with cloud proximity, with AI-ready interconnection and with the latency that these workloads require. Location and density do matter, and this is something that is important to us, and our platform continues to excel as every connection adds to the platform.
And then finally, strong top and bottom line growth. We're very much focused on delivering shareholder value. We do that through very disciplined execution. We focus on doing the important things well, on serving our customers so that we generate the highest return and that we deliver the AFFO per share that our shareholders would like to see and expect from us.
So 4 elements that we think are reasons underpinning why our stock is a good buy today, demand for the infrastructure, Equinix as this essential layer of connectivity, the backbone of the inference economy and very strong top and bottom line deliverables underpinned by excellent execution from the team over the last quarter.
Adaire, thank you for that. Maybe jumping in on some of what you were describing. Just from a high level, when you look at the business, what are the metrics that give you and the management team confidence in the durability of this retail-centric strategy given rising power density needs for IT infrastructure and as the hyperscalers are expanding their offerings to go after the same customers.
So I think that there are a number of signals around our KPIs that indicate the durable nature of the demand and also, I guess, the role that Equinix uniquely plays in fulfilling that demand for our customers. First of all, I think you can see it in the bookings performance in Q4. And I would say actually throughout the second half of last year, but particularly in Q4, we had a very, very strong bookings performance, delivering $474 million of annualized gross bookings. But I think it's less about the actual dollar numbers, although they are a significant growth that represents a significant growth on a year-on-year basis and on a quarter-on-quarter basis, but more about the sheer number of transactions that underpinned that number.
We did more than 3,400 transactions with over 4,600 unique customers. So in our model, we are very diversified. We're very diversified across segments. We're very diversified across industries. And we're very diversified across the workloads that we support from our customer base. So I would say one of the first leading indicators of the durability of the model is the bookings because bookings subsequently turn into revenue within that 90-day period.
The second indicator is our pipeline execution and our pipeline discipline. How we are managing to come into every quarter with a highly qualified pipeline of opportunities, which means that our conversion rate in situ in quarter is particularly high. This is nothing other than relentless discipline. And I think that the teams have been doing an amazing job looking at how we navigate our pipeline, but also how we navigate the opportunities that are there to the best location for that opportunity. Today, we're in a supply-demand environment that is very favorable to Equinix. And quite often, we find ourselves in a situation where we may have 8 or 9 customers who want the same piece of capacity in a particular location, in a particular metro. We work now to ensure that through a rubric mechanism, we identify the customer that we will work with to actually implement into that capacity, but that doesn't mean we tell the other 8 to go away. We work with the other 8 to demand shape the workloads into capacity that is available in our footprint. And that has been something that has been very beneficial both in terms of long-term customer relationship, but also in maximizing the use of our capacity.
So bookings, pipeline certainly a second measure. And then I would say the third from a top line perspective is how we are managing churn. When we look at our churn, we're at the lower end of the range that we've guided to. We guide to 2% to 2.5% churn. In Q4, we are at the lower end of that range. And a number of reasons for that internally. One, some new predictive capability that we built ourselves with AI to have a look at our customer base and define our customers into segments that we define as ATR, available to renew. So we know well in advance when a customer is up for renewal. Reconfiguring our customer success motion in order to have them focused on upsell and cross-sell opportunities and making those phone calls early. And we've started to see that have an impact on churn because obviously, keeping a customer means that the revenue continues rather than there being a gap in revenue when you implement a new customer into those environments.
So I think those are some of the top line measures that we're looking at in terms of growing our business. Obviously, we're very focused on our operational efficiency and effectiveness. How we utilize our power is a key component of that. And that's something that we have done very well. Also, we have had a tailwind because power prices have come down, surprisingly enough, given the narrative around energy over the past period of time, and that is something that obviously falls straight to our bottom line.
Very helpful. If we could also double-click on your comments around the bookings. So we think of Equinix as a very well-established company, been operating now for 27 years and you delivered 42% bookings growth in the fourth quarter after building momentum through 2025. So can you discuss as an organization, what has to come together to deliver that type of bookings result? And maybe give us a little preview of what that means also for the sales capability of your organization as you look forward?
Sure. So I think there are a few factors. I mean, first of all, we have a significant presence in all major metros as it relates to sales execution. So we have almost 700 quota carriers across our business who operate across the 10,000-plus customers that today are our customer base. And so when we open capacity in a new metro, we're not necessarily increasing our sales costs in order to prosecute that new capacity because it's already embedded in our metros and embedded in our team.
So first of all, we have a very focused sales force who have targets that they are obviously set to meet, processes that support them in doing that, systems that support them in doing that and looking as always for the opportunity to make that whole process as effective and as efficient as we can so that we convert as many opportunities as possible. I think another important measure of our success last year was our ability to accelerate capacity into the 2026 window, the 2025, 2026 window. Our design and construction team at any one time will have 50-plus projects, 50-plus major projects underway around the world. And our team were tasked with releasing more capacity into the sales force for the sales force to be able to execute against that. They accelerated 30% of the retail capacity last year. And they did that through a number of different techniques, but essentially, it resulted in an acceleration of 30% of capacity.
Now there's still some window to do some of that as we move into this year, but that will become a lever that you can only pull so many times once you've looked at your project processes. But I will say that our design and our construction team are generally accelerating builds and delivering capacity faster. So that was also a factor that enabled us to have the bookings that we enjoyed in Q4. And I think since we opened the visibility of bookings to our investors, we did that in June. You can see that bookings are ticking up and moving to the left -- beg your pardon, moving to the right. And we hope that we're in a position with our pipeline to at least be able to continue that trajectory because certainly, the demand in the market is there. But I would say that bookings can also be variable from a seasonality point of view and so on. One of the things that we've done is try to iron out seasonality across our year. And to have the teams really focus on Q1 and Q2 as 2 quarters that build in current year MRR for the current year, which is obviously how we're judged. And then 3 and 4, 2 quarters that then set us up beautifully to exit into the next year. So my team don't call Q1, Q1, they call it Q5, so that we continue to build on the momentum that we had last quarter.
Maybe just to add one other thing. I think another motion that's relatively new for us is because of the capacity that we've been able to pull forward is what we call kind of a preselling motion. And so we've opened up the window with which we're -- our sales team is allowed to sell into new IBXs that are going to be coming online that used to be -- if you were to ask me 5 years ago, that would have been about a 3-month window, 3 months before our site is going to go live, sales will be able to sell into that. Now we have extended that out to about 12 months. And so we've talked about a presales balance that we have of $170 million, which sits on top of the bookings. And the way to think about that is that will turn into bookings in the future periods. So we're able to derisk some of this capacity that's coming online for us in the future quarters as well.
For example, Mike, in Q1 at our earnings call, we indicated that at the time of earnings call, we'd already closed 45% of our Q1 pipeline, and we had $100 million in presale at the time of earnings.
And that's on top of the $170 million that you started with?
Just as we think about efficiencies internally for the company, how are you thinking about the opportunity from AI deployment internally? How are you thinking about build versus partner versus buy and those solutions and opportunities?
Probably like every other company, looking at it through the lens of how does this help us be accretive to our core measure. There are certainly some things that we would buy, but there are areas of our business where we have, we believe, a unique approach and that process differentiates us and enables us to execute in an extrapolated way around certain topics. I'll give you, for example. We have built AI capabilities into our capacity visualization, which is something that is quite challenging to manage in a retail colocation facility. Remember, we have hundreds of customers sitting across our various different data centers. And in many cases, you're managing your capacity a little bit like a Tetris block. So one customer may take this small piece here and another customer a small piece here and then you have to look at the capacity that's available in that location and see how you best configure that in order to make that available for our customer. So making that visible to our sales team through the lens of AI and being able to look at in real-time potential configurations of that available capacity is something that's been highly valuable.
And just providing a single source, enabling us to work with customers across regions, across geographies, just one example of where we self-build. We've also self-build an AI capability around our cage configuration. We collect a terabyte of data a day. It's incredible to think of the data that we collect and have available every day. And when we look at our customers, they're often in more than one location with us. And so we know already from engaging with them pieces of how they like to make use of Equinix and what kind of configuration they like to have in Equinix. So rather than start with a blank sheet of paper, we start with a twin. Based on all the data of their previous implementations, we can now say things where we visually build this cage, we can say to the customer, "Hey, you always have the camera in the top left corner. Is that where you wanted in this cage." And then we just place the virtual digital camera in that environment, regenerate the cage specs again. And so by the time that we get to closing that transaction, we're very close to understanding what actually has to be implemented. It just passes across, which means that we reduce the time frame between booking and billing, which means then that we can get faster to MRR. So lots of examples of where we're using this also on our construction side, too.
Thanks. And for our last 15 minutes, I'm going to give a little preview of the topics that we're hoping to hit? And then if there's any other questions or topics that our group here wants to hit, please raise your hand or use the system. So real quick, we'll talk about AI inference, the financial guidance. xScale enterprise a little more and atNorth, which was recently announced. So maybe first, moving over to -- or staying on this whole theme of AI. Can you describe a little bit more from a customer perspective, what you're seeing in terms of the uptake of the inference models? And what are the milestones that investors should be looking for as they try to gauge the timing and magnitude of benefit for Equinix, including what enterprises could contribute to this?
So first of all, we have the privilege of spending a lot of time with our customers. I meet a lot of customers every single week in different parts of the world from different industries. So you get a lot of anecdotal information around our customers' use of this tech based on those meetings, those conversations and the work that our technical teams are doing with our customers. I would say that we are like very early days really in this. If you think about your own company, probably like I have just described, many of you are making the move from proof of concepts that have demonstrated some business value to the implementation of a solution in real production environment.
And the vast majority of companies are no different to the kind of journey that you and your own companies are on. So I think it's very early to specifically call milestones at this point. But there's no doubt in our minds that the demand is extremely sustainable, and that we will see this continue to augment the broad base of workloads that we support in our data center environments. I think that 60% figure is an important indicator, but that was of our top deals. Today, we are working on the systems to enable us to capture that information all the way through the segments of transactions that we capture. And I guess we'll get better to let me when we achieve that. But today, it is early to call specific milestones, I think, but we can absolutely see architectural and infrastructure discussions, I mean, that take into consideration things like the fact that most customers will be multi-cloud. Most customers, particularly if they're regulated, will maintain a part of their data either with us, usually with us or behind their own firewall. Most customers will have complex requirements when it comes to managing the underpinning network and the connectivity that an Agentic workload may require. And data gravity and access to your customers are key components of being successful here. And I think these are all elements that play to the Equinix value proposition.
And then moving on to the financial guidance. Just given the bookings momentum that you were describing earlier, what are the opportunities to grow recurring revenue at the upper half of the range or better? And maybe also it's an opportunity just to bridge how the AFFO per share growth outlook has evolved from back from the Analyst Day, which is mid-single digits. Now you're in upper single-digit territory.
Yes. I think there are probably 3 reasons why you see a difference between now and Analyst Day, and then I'll get Phil to drill in with a degree of specificity. First of all, our bookings performance, our top line performance was better than we expected in the second half. And I think we have -- specifically as we ended the year, and I think we have built momentum and muscle memory into the system around that bookings performance.
Secondly, from a capital perspective, we were able to raise at a lower cost than we had initially envisaged at Analyst Day. And we also were able to utilize that capital very efficiently and capitalize it. So that also, I guess, was a second reason why you would see a difference in terms of where we are, and I'm completely having a blank on the third. Yes. And the third was the capacity that we were able to accelerate into the year, which I have already mentioned to you.
So I think those are some of the differences between where we were on Analyst Day in June and where we are now. And we're very pleased with that performance and very pleased with the momentum that we see in the business. And so working to ensure that we continue to drive for value creation and that we continue to drive as hard as we can towards the top end of that range that we guided to.
Yes. And maybe just to add on a little bit just on some of the numbers specifically. So on the AFFO per share guidance that we gave of 8% to 10% for the year, so 9% at the midpoint. That does include 100 basis points of benefit from the timing of a transaction moving from Q4 to Q1. So we want to make sure we normalize for that. But it's still, I think, to your point, Mike, 300 basis points of improvement relative to what we saw last summer, all to the reasons that Adaire kind of just pointed out and what's driving that. So we feel really good about the momentum there. And I guess just one last point that I would make around when you think about the underlying performance of the business, obviously, it all drops to the bottom line on AFFO per share. But really one area to continue to focus on is our MRR growth, our recurring revenue growth, which really talks about the underlying fundamentals of the business. And again, we've seen incredibly strong momentum around that in 2025, and that's obviously extending into 2026. So that's the key -- one of the other key metrics, I think, to focus on as we go through the year.
We have a handful of questions that are coming in through live Q&A. So we'll make sure to get to those. One of them is, are you comfortable with the return and control you give to capital partners at xScale? Will you adjust that in the future?
Sorry, can you repeat the first bit? We didn't catch that.
Sure. It said, are you comfortable with the return and control you give to capital partners at xScale? And will you adjust that in the future?
I think our partnership with our xScale partners is working exceptionally well. we continue to evolve and grow our xScale portfolio with their support. So no, I don't see that changing in the short term or medium term.
And so with xScale, maybe one other question is just an update on the pipeline that you're seeing for xScale and the regional expansion opportunities beyond the Hampton facility, which I think Equinix has described in the past is expecting to lease up during this calendar year.
Yes. We have a very strong pipeline for our xScale opportunities. It's a model that allows us to serve a very strategic set of customers. It's also important to remember that many of those customers also have a very strong position in our retail footprint. And that joint adjacency between xScale and retail is something that is a value add both for them and also for the broader customer base who require cloud adjacency for their workloads.
And I was just going to say that some of -- you've seen some of the land acquisitions that we talked about last year that we've done. Some of those we anticipate will be contributing to the xScale franchise here in the U.S. But I think it also points to -- we've got ambitions to do more in EMEA and APAC as well with our xScale business. And some of what we've talked about that we have acquired, we anticipate standing up additional JVs in those theaters as well.
And can you discuss how you look at the TAM expansion opportunity from going after what I think are described as more midsized deployments from your enterprise customers? And maybe dovetailing into the atNorth announcement, how does that play into your enterprise strategy? And maybe just help people understand how to frame that in the broader portfolio in xScale.
Okay. So when we look at our enterprise TAM, I think what you're referring to there, Mike, is that our customers are certainly asking us for larger footprints than we have been previously asked for in the past. And this is something that we factor into our acquisition strategy, both our land, our power acquisition strategy, our capacity development strategy and the design of our data centers. The latest data centers that we're designing are being designed to a higher density than the ones that we would have built, for example, 10 years ago.
We are still commanding high pricing and strong pricing against that demand backdrop. And I think that our flexibility to be able to support the multimodal requirements of our customers from those in -- who operate in the KVA space up to those who operate in the megawatt space is something that marks us as a little unique across the segment because we manage across 3 footprints from wholesale to large footprint all the way through to retail colo. In addition to the TAM at the enterprise level for large footprint, I also think that as we begin to navigate through our channel strategy this year that, that will unlock more TAM for us as we will have sellers on the street who are not part of the cost of sales specifically or the SG&A costs of Equinix, and that is something that we're actively engaged on this year looking at how we -- with some of the tools that we've developed, really activate our channel partners to sell and represent Equinix.
And then as it relates to the atNorth acquisition, Phil was very close to that, so I might allow him in a moment. But we're very pleased with the acquisition. We're very pleased with the partnership as it continues to evolve with CPPIB. We believe it's a very complementary acquisition. First of all, in a theater of operation that's extremely important to us. Secondly, with a company that has a 17-year history and shares many of the ethos and values that we do around power and the sustainability narrative in that region. But thirdly and more importantly, releasing capacity for us in EMEA, where we know we have a very, very strong demand profile in a time frame that will be critically important to us.
And then fourthly, knowing that as soon as we close this transaction, it will be immediately AFFO accretive. So a lot of very positive elements about the atNorth transaction, which, of course, is announced but still subject to regulatory process.
I just want to hit another one that came in. What is your exposure to the software industry? And how do you view the risks this industry is facing from AI?
So when we think about the software industry, I'm assuming that there's an underpin around some of the Software-as-a-Service providers here that would make use of Equinix as an environment. Our exposure is extremely limited. Less than 3% of our total MRR would come from companies in that segment. So our exposure is extremely limited. I think, again, just to reiterate, we have an extremely diverse customer base across all segments, across all industries, across all geographies. So we have very little risk concentration in either a single segment or a single customer across our revenue mix. I do think what's unfolding in the software industry will take some time because when you think about many of these solutions, they are the backbone of operations for many companies, and they are not something that can be simply just switched off or simply replaced. But to answer the question around exposure, it is less than 3% and speaks to the diversity of customer base that we enjoy at Equinix.
Great. That brings us to our rapid fire. So on what KPI would you pick as the most important for your category? And what is your expected growth in that metric for 2027?
Well, for us, AFFO per share is the most important measure, and I think we've already indicated our growth prospects.
And then just Will the data center sector have more or fewer or the same number of companies a year from now?
Probably roughly the same, but we do know that there are some that are looking to go public this year, mostly in the wholesale space, but we'll see how that pans out.
Terrific. Thank you.
Okay. Thank you.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Equinix — Citi’s Miami Global Property CEO Conference 2026
Equinix — Citi’s Miami Global Property CEO Conference 2026
📣 Kernbotschaft
- Kernaussage: Equinix stellt sich als neutraler Konnektivitäts‑Layer und Backbone für AI‑Inference auf. Management betont starkes Buchungs‑ und MRR (Monthly Recurring Revenue)‑Momentum (Q4: $474M annualisierte Brutto‑Buchungen), breite Diversifikation und operative Hebel (Presales, Kapazitätsbeschleunigung), die kurzfristig AFFO per share (Adjusted Funds From Operations per share)‑Wachstum stützen.
🎯 Strategische Highlights
- AI‑Nachfrage: 60% der größten Q4‑Deals auf AI‑Workloads, davon 50% Enterprise‑geführt; Liquid‑Cooling: 11 Verkäufe in Q4, 5 in New York (Finanzsektor).
- Vertrieb & Pipeline: $474M annualisierte Brutto‑Buchungen, >3.400 Transaktionen mit 4.600 Unique Customers; ~700 quota carriers, Presales‑Balance $170M erhöht Vorverkäufe.
- Kapital & Metriken: AFFO‑Fokus, 30% Beschleunigung von Retail‑Kapazität, niedrigere Finanzierungskosten und niedrigere Strompreise als Ergebnis.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Guidance: AFFO per share‑Ausblick 8–10% (9% Midpoint) enthält 100 bp Timing‑Effekt; Management nennt ~300 bp Verbesserung versus letztes Jahr.
- De‑risking: Presales $170M als Rückhalt für künftige Buchungen; atNorth‑Akquisition (mit CPPIB) soll sofort AFFO‑akkretiv wirken, steht noch unter regulatorischer Prüfung.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- AI‑Metriken: Investoren fragten nach klaren Meilensteinen; Management sieht frühen, aber nachhaltigen Trend und kann konkrete zeitliche Meilensteine noch nicht präzise angeben.
- xScale & Expans.: Pipeline für xScale stark; weitere JVs in EMEA/APAC geplant; Hampton‑Projekt wird 2026 erwartet.
- Konzentrationsrisiko: Exposition gegenüber Software‑Firmen <3% des MRR; Kapitalpartner‑Kontrolle bei xScale aktuell akzeptiert.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Implikation: Der Call bestätigt eine Nachfrage‑getriebene Wachstumsstory mit konkreten operativen Hebeln (Presales, Kapazitäts‑Beschleunigung, niedrigere Kapitalkosten). Aktionäre profitieren kurzfristig von erhöhter AFFO‑Erwartung, sollten aber Konversion von Buchungen in MRR, Kapazitätslieferung und regulatorische Schritte (atNorth) weiter beobachten.
Equinix — Q4 2025 Earnings Call
1. Management Discussion
Good afternoon, and welcome to the Equinix Fourth Quarter and Full Year 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Also, today's conference is being recorded. [Operator Instructions].
I would now like to turn the call over to Philip Konieczny, Senior Vice President of Finance. You may begin.
Good afternoon. and welcome to our fourth quarter conference call. Before we get started, I would like to remind everyone that some of the statements that we will be making today are forward-looking in nature and involve risks and uncertainties.
Actual results may vary significantly from those statements and may be affected by the risks we identified in today's press release as well as those identified in our filings with the SEC, including our most recent Form 10-K filed on February 11, 2026, and our most recent Form 10-Q. Equinix assumes no obligation and does not intend to update or comment on forward-looking statements made on this call. In addition, in light of Regulation Fair Disclosure, it is our policy not to comment on its financial guidance during the quarter unless it is done through an explicit public disclosure.
On today's conference call, we will provide non-GAAP measures. We provide a reconciliation of those measures to the most directly comparable GAAP measures in today's press release on the Equinix Investor page at equinix.com. We have made available on the IR page of our website a presentation designed to accompany this discussion, along with certain supplemental financial information and other data.
With us today are Adaire Fox-Martin, CEO and President; and Keith Taylor, Chief Financial Officer. At this time, I'll turn the call over to Adaire.
Thanks so much, Philip. Hello, everyone, and a warm welcome to our call today. I'll start by saying on a personal level, how deeply pleased I am with our performance in 2025 and particularly in Q4. I Demand for our solutions has never been higher, and our teams have stepped up exceptionally well to capitalize on it.
To our employees around the world, I'd like to say a huge thank you for all you are doing to achieve our goals. I also want to thank our customers and partners for the trust they have placed in Equinix as we intensified our investment in growth, investment that is already paying off.
Our bookings have accelerated dramatically. Our recurring revenue growth rate continues to climb, and we are managing our spend with great discipline. All of these factors are combining to fuel an expansion pipeline and growth in AFFO per share materially ahead of expectations. Given our momentum exiting 2025, our confidence in our 2026 plan has grown. This is reflected in both our revenue and our AFFO per share outlook.
Our performance and our outlook demonstrate 2 things: The first is that Equinix is connecting the fastest-growing segments of technology infrastructure and the value of our platform is increasing with every connection. The second is that our execution continues to improve. This winning combination delivers superior customer outcomes and stronger shareholder returns. Not only are we on the right track, we're moving far faster along it.
Now our momentum is clear across several key metrics. Monthly recurring revenue, the most powerful driver of long-term value creation grew 10% in Q4 and 8% for the full year on a normalized and constant currency basis. And for bookings, the leading indicator for revenue performance, the story is even stronger. We delivered annualized gross bookings of $1.6 billion in 2025, up 27% year-over-year. Our Q4 bookings were $474 million, up 42% year-over-year and 20% from Q3, well ahead of our plan.
And we delivered record capacity to meet growing demand. including 23,250 cabinets in our retail footprint and more than 90 megawatts in our xScale business in 2025. We delivered more than 30% of this retail capacity ahead of schedule, which we believe will accelerate our growth in 2016 and beyond.
Now Keith will go deeper into our metrics shortly, including recommendations on how to model the Hampton transaction. As you saw in our release, the expected timing of this transaction shifted from Q4 to Q1, which, as we have shared in the past, simply reflects the fluid nature of ex-scale lease signings.
Before I turn the call over to Keith, I'd like to provide some additional perspective on why our business is performing so well. For starters, we are building on the strength of our fundamentally differentiated value proposition. Our decision to double down on the digital infrastructure and connectivity requirements of enterprise customers is fueling our success, particularly as they implement AI across their operations.
In Q4, approximately 60% of our largest deals were driven by AI workloads. That's up from approximately 50% earlier this year, a trend line that we believe will continue as we are really only at the beginning of this journey. Equinix is the neutral ground, where enterprise infrastructure converters, and we provide the essential layer of connectivity that make it all work at scale to unlock real business value. This is a long-term tailwind for our business, particularly as AI inferencing expands across industries.
With market-leading native cloud on-ramps, the largest global footprint across the most critical markets and the broadest enterprise customer base, we deliver what AI inference demands, network diversity, cloud proximity, AI-ready interconnection and low latency. These are structural advantages we have built over decades, and we believe they will continue to set us apart.
In 2025, we completed over 17,200 transactions, up 6% year-over-year with over 6,100 unique customers. Our Q4 transaction volume was the highest ever at over 4,500 deals with more than 3,400 unique customers. We saw an uptick in volumes for all workload sizes from single cabinet requirements up to our largest page configurations. And more than 60% of our existing customers added new services last year.
Now let me share some recent customer wins and use cases that really showcase what's driving this demand. Salesforce chose Equinix to create a private multi-cloud networking there for the engine inside their data and AI foundation. This is our largest global fabric cloud router sales to date. By deploying Equinix Fabric cloud router across 14 countries and 21 metros, we are enabling private network connectivity between Salesforce's presence in AWS, Azure and other cloud service providers.
Alembic, an AI-powered marketing analytics platform selected Equinix for the scale and consistency of our global operations and the richness of our interconnection ecosystem. We are working with Alembic as they deploy the NVIDIA DGX superpad with NVIDIA Grace Blackwell systems to expand their addressable market through distributed AI. Signet, a leader in AI-powered workplace safety and operational intelligence shows us because Equinix Fabric security connects their edge devices, cloud providers and customer networks. This enables them to deliver real-time AI-driven quality control for industries ranging from food processing to manufacturing.
Leading quantitative trading firm, Hudson River trading, selected Equinix because our global footprint and our advanced cooling solutions enable them to achieve the latency and the density requirements they need to power their next-gen AI trading workloads. And Fortune 500 multinational Honeywell Corporation expanded its relationship with Equinix because of the secure flexible solutions and global fabric connectivity we provide, including for key metros such as Shanghai, Tokyo and London.
This is the first of many projects driving the integration of internal AI applications and the wider transformation at Honeywell. These are just some of the use cases underpinning our momentum. Our progress is a direct result of the changes we have made through our Serve better, Solve Smarter and Bill bolder initiatives.
Starting with Serve better. Customers continued to secure both near-term and long-term capacity across our global platform. Our $474 million in annualized gross bookings in Q4 were supported by an incremental presales balance of $170 million. with more than $60 million occurring in the quarter. larger footprint requirements from enterprises and service providers contributed to this performance.
Our pipeline is strong. and we have already booked approximately 45% of our Q1 2026 target and signed an additional $100 million plus of presales as of today, already our largest presale quarter ever. As we accelerate growth, we are committed to a disciplined pricing strategy that's commensurate with both the strong and durable demand patterns we see and the differentiated value our solutions provide. This translates into our strong cash and cash return profile and the premium yields we secure.
We continue to underwrite our newest projects with these principles in mind. With Solve smarter, we are helping customers connect and simplify their infrastructure. Interconnection revenue grew 9% year-over-year on a normalized and constant currency basis. We added 7,800 net interconnections in the quarter, including our adjustments.
We also crossed an extraordinary milestone in Q4, surpassing 0.5 million interconnections worldwide. To put this into context, that's more than double our nearest competitor. As AI amplifies the need for massive real-time data movement, Equinix is delivering the connectivity infrastructure that enterprises depend on the most.
As part of our Build Bolder initiative, the work we are doing across our global development portfolio is strengthening our competitive advantage. In Q4, we delivered more than 12,000 cabinets to our retail business across key metros. Our development engine remains exceptionally active with 52 major projects underway across 35 markets, including 9 xScale projects. Since October, we have added 10 new expansion projects.
We also closed on a number of strategic land acquisitions last year, adding approximately 1 gigawatt to our powered land under control balance. This positions us well to meet long-term demand from both enterprise and hyperscale customers.
Our xScale business achieved a key milestone in recent weeks. In January, we contributed our Hampton asset to the Americas JV, an important first step towards deploying $15 billion of capital across major metros in the U.S. The Hampton facility will support approximately 240 megawatts of IT capacity when fully built out.
The signing of the lease for half of this facility to a hyperscale customer is expected in Q1, and we expect the site to be fully leased later this year. In addition, we have established a healthy leasing pipeline, demonstrating the value of our ex-scale strategy. Of the approximate 3 gigawatts of capacity that can be developed close to 1 gigawatt is currently earmarked for our Excel business.
Further, our land acquisition pipeline continues to grow as we maintain our focus on major metro expansion opportunities where we are confident of significant long-term demand. As such, we expect xScale will continue to contribute to NRR over the next several years as we execute our strategy. Overall, we're winning where it matters most. By connecting the infrastructure that powers the AI build-out happening across industries. And we are laser-focused on expanding our category leadership through disciplined execution that drives healthy revenue growth, margin expansion and superior shareholder returns.
I'll now turn it over to Keith to take a closer look at the numbers behind the quarter and our outlook.
Thanks, Adaire, and a very good afternoon to everyone. First and foremost, I'll start by briefly building on Adaire's comments. Simply, it was an outstanding close to 2025. From my perspective, Equinix delivered its best quarter ever. By far, closing the last quarter of the year with over $470 million of annualized gross bookings and more than $60 million of presales activity, well ahead of our expectations and certainly any prior quarter.
The magnitude of our quarterly activity both across a substantial number of diverse deals, but also with over 3,400 customers underscores that our strategy is working. -- and meeting the opportunity in front of us. Also, I'd say that is our retail business that's the standout, delivering record bookings across each of our small, medium and large size of deal categories. And alongside our strong sales execution, the teams continue to operate the business with great focus and discipline, and we're only getting started.
This created better-than-expected margins. We raised our capital more efficiently than planned and investor to utilize the cash more effectively, creating better-than-planned cash flows. Suffice it to say, our performance is creating momentum in the business to drive attractive recurring revenue growth and the scaling of healthy AFFO per share performance.
Now I'll cover some of the highlights for the quarter as depicted on Slide 7. Note all growth rates in this section are on a normalized and constant currency basis. First, as we indicated last quarter, our Q4 guide assumed the execution of a large ex-scale lease for 2 of the 4 buildings on the Hampton campus. As Adaire noted, this transaction is now expected to close in the first quarter.
We also had some onetime planned benefits, which will not repeat themselves in Q1. That being said, our fundamental underlying performance was meaningfully better than our expectations from top to bottom. Please refer to Slide 15 that bridges our quarterly revenues from Q4 2025 to Q1 2026.
Now let me move specifically to revenues. Q4 revenues were $2.4 billion, up 7% over the same quarter last year, fueled by continued strength in our monthly recurring revenues, which was up 10% over last year and as you likely noted, a steady quarterly improvement throughout 2025. Q4 revenues, net of our FX hedges, included an $8 million currency headwind when compared to our prior guidance rates.
Global Q4 MRR churn was 2.2% lower than planned. And for the full year, our average quarterly MRR churn was 2.4%. Looking forward, our teams remain highly focused on reducing MRR churn, which includes the development of AI predictive tools to help identify opportunities to eliminate or defer any MRR churn. Global Q4 adjusted EBITDA was $1.2 billion or approximately 49% of revenues, up 15% over the same quarter last year. Q4 adjusted EBITDA, net of our FX hedges included a $4 million FX headwind when compared to our prior guidance rates.
Our 2025 margin improvements reflect our continued focus on delivering higher operating leverage across the business while also investing in growth. As it relates to 2026, we expect to continue to deliver improved adjusted EBITDA margins while also absorbing both accelerated and increased expansion drag, the byproduct from our growth investments. Global Q4 AFFO was $877 million or up 13% over the same quarter last year, including the seasonally higher recurring CapEx spend.
Q4 AFFO included a $2 million FX headwind when compared to our prior guidance rates. And our nonfinancial metrics continue to demonstrate strong momentum across our core or key metrics of net interconnection additions, net new cabinets billing and MRR per cabinet pricing. Our net interconnection additions increased by 7,800, including both physical and virtual connections and also include our adjustments. As Adaire highlighted, we've now surpassed the 0.5 million interconnection milestone across our ecosystem, an unmatched competitive advantage, which has been curated over 25 years of history.
Turning to our cabinets billing. We added 4,300 net cabinets billing in the quarter, including cabinets from our Main One portfolio. Our underlying net cabinets billing increased by the highest level in 3 years, driven by strong bookings performance across each of our 3 regions. Our backlog of cabinets sold, but not yet installed, stands at a record given the bookings performance, especially in the second half of 2025.
And finally, we continue to drive attractive MR per cabinet yields, stepping up $65 quarter-over-quarter on a normalized and constant currency basis, driven by very favorable pricing backdrop, increasing power density and strong interconnection attach rates.
Turning to our capital structure. Please refer to Slide 10. As of year-end, our balance sheet increased to approximately $40 billion, including cash and short-term investments, totaling about $3.2 billion. Our net leverage was 3.8x our annualized adjusted EBITDA. We -- during the quarter, we issued $1.8 billion of senior notes at an effective rate of about 3.2%.
Throughout 2025, our diversified capital raising program allowed us to raise debt at very attractive rates, which helped us optimize our 2025 net interest expense.
Looking at 2026, we plan to continue to raise debt in Loracost locations, either directly or synthetically. -- including Canada, Singapore and Europe. And now looking at our capital expenditures for the quarter. Please refer to Slide 11.
Capital expenditures were approximately $1.4 billion, including our planned seasonally higher recurring CapEx of about $140 million. We opened 16 major projects across 14 markets since our last earnings call, adding important retail capacity to several of our key undersupplied metros. And we announced 10 new projects, which will be added to our global portfolio over the next few years. Revenues from owned assets are 70% of our recurring revenues.
Our capital investments delivered strong returns as shown on Slide 12. Related to our now 187 stabilized assets, revenues increased by 6% year-over-year on a constant currency basis. These stabilized assets are collectively 82% utilized and generated a 27% cash on cash return on the gross PP&E invested on a constant currency basis.
Now given our strong underlying Q4 results, our 2026 outlook is expected to be meaningfully ahead of our expectations that we shared with you at our June 2025 Analyst Day. Our strong pricing discipline, coupled with our best-in-class capital allocation efforts should allow us to generate industry-leading durable cash flows with attractive cash yields, thereby delivering revenue growth and long-term value for our shareholders.
Please refer to Slides 13 through 17 of our summary of 2026 guidance and bridges. Do note all growth rates are on a normalized and constant currency basis.
Starting with revenues. For the full year 2026, we expect total revenues to grow between 9% and 10%, which includes a modest 40 bps attributed to the NR from the XL lease timing. We expect our monthly recurring revenues to grow between 8% and 10%, driven by strong 2025 bookings performance, including presales momentum. MRR churn is anticipated to remain comfortably within our targeted range of 2% to 2.5% per quarter.
We expect 2026 adjusted EBITDA margins to be approximately 51%, an expected 200 basis point improvement over 2025 and reflecting anticipated revenue growth and focused expense management. 2026 AFFO is expected to grow between 9% and 11% compared to the previous year. AFFO per share is expected to grow between 8% and 10%, which after adjusting for 100 basis points of ex-scale lease timing is 300 basis points higher at midpoint relative to our prior expectations from past summer.
2026 CapEx is anticipated to range between $3.7 billion and $4.2 billion including about $280 million of recurring CapEx spend. We have not included any on-balance sheet xScale spend as we do expect to be reimbursed for these costs as we transfer these assets into the XL JVs. And finally, we expect our quarterly cash dividend increase by 10% over 2025 on a per share basis. As a result, our total 2026 cash dividends paid will approximate $2 billion. So let me stop here. I'll turn the call back to Adaire.
Thanks very much, Keith. As this is my first opportunity to address all of you since Keith's retirement announcement, I wanted to take a moment to acknowledge his tremendous impact on Equinix over the past 27 years. His leadership has been integral to our success and has helped us lay the foundation for our future. I am particularly grateful for Keith's partnership since I joined the company, and I look forward to his continued support as a special adviser over the next year.
Our process for selecting Keith's successor is well underway and we look forward to updating you when we have news to share.
Before we turn to questions, I want to leave you with a final thought. Equinix is at the center of a historic multiyear infrastructure investment cycle. To deploy AI at scale, enterprises need to connect and manage increasingly complex and distributed technology ecosystems. Equinix is the neutral connector that unlocks business value for our customers. It is what we do best. It is where we have continued to focus and our focus is paying off. We were built for this moment, but execution is everything.
And we will continue to prioritize doing the most important things exceptionally well, so that we delight our customers whilst delivering structurally higher returns and AFFO per share growth for our shareholders. That's exactly what we did last quarter, and it's what you should expect from us going forward.
So with that, let's open the line for questions.
[Operator Instructions]. Our first question comes from Eric Luebchow with Wells Fargo.
2. Question Answer
Adaire, maybe you could touch a little bit on kind of the bookings momentum that you talked about that came through in Q4, and it sounds like you're off to a really good start in Q1. I think you said 60% plus of the largest deal came from AI workloads. Are you seeing more of these kind of coming from traditional enterprise companies adopting AI? Is it coming more from the hyperscale? Or you're just putting edge nodes in your facility? And as you kind of look out, do you think that is going to continue to rise throughout the course of the year.
Thanks very much for the question, Eric. Let me perhaps unpack a little of that stat for you. And I think the value that we provide is obviously something that's been amplified, thanks to the continued investment in this sector overall and the excitement around it. I think for us, the breadth and scale of our product continuum, they're very -- it's very uniquely aligned to meet this demand. And as I mentioned in my prepared remarks, and you just repeated there, 60% of our largest deals were driven by AI workloads.
Now during the course of the quarter, when I look at that 60% related to AI, interestingly enough, nearly half of them were deployed by noncloud and IT companies but they were deployed by companies in the retail, e-commerce, manufacturing, financial services and content sector.
So I think this demonstrates increasing enterprise AI adoption outside of the service provider community. We also had 11 liquid cool deployments in Q4, 5 of which were in our New York City facilities underpinning the requirements of our FSI customers to support elements, use cases like algorithm training in that sector.
So I think this also demonstrates continuing strong diversity, and from an interconnection lens, we see a very healthy growth in the AI service provider ecosystem, although it's still early days, given, I think, the breadth and depth of our established ecosystem density. So interesting to see that it was -- of the 60%, 50% driven by noncloud and IT providers, really demonstrating the growth in enterprise application of AI processes to business. And we see this as a continued positive tailwind for our company.
Our next question comes from Jonathan Atkin with RBC.
I was interested if there was any update to your multiyear guidance provided at the Capital Markets Day last June. And are those targets still relevant? Or should we be thinking about 9% as being the new baseline for AFFO per share growth?
Jon look, first and for foremost. Thank you very much for the question. I think what's most important is to understand just the underlying momentum of the business. As Adir highlighted both in her prepared remarks and certainly in the commentary around our booking activity. The business is performing well. We sort of said and we've said it over the last 2 quarters, and we're sort of -- we're talking about it this quarter. It's the execution on the top line is the management of the cost as well as efficiently raising capital and deploying it appropriately.
And so I think we're on the right trajectory. We're delighted with what we've delivered for 2026. I just feel it's a little premature to talk about 27 and beyond. But as you can appreciate, -- the momentum is windowed or back. And I would add to that, I think currencies are going to continue to be winded or back as an organization. So the combination of really strong performance, the ability to maybe invest faster than we were anticipating, as Ralph sort of bringing forward as many of the assets as possible. I just think we're in a really good spot.
And I think it's just a bit early to talk about 2017 and beyond. But I know you can do math very, very well. And so I'm going to leave it to you to sort of interpret both how we're performing this quarter being Q1 '26 and what that really implies is exiting 2026. So again, feel good about our position, but let's defer the '27 discussion until later.
Our next caller is Aryeh Klein with BMO Capital Markets.
First, I guess, Keith, congrats on your career and wishing you the best moving forward. I guess, just going back to the previous question around AI in that 50%. Do those deals look differently than different than some of your more traditional deals, be it from a size or location standpoint? And then, I guess, from an underlying demand standpoint, it seems like things have meaningfully accelerated since the Investor Day back in June. Can you just pass that, what specifically has, I guess, driven that acceleration momentum?
Yes. So let me comment perhaps on that accelerated momentum first, and then I'll address the second part of your question, which is around the characteristics of some of those AI deals that we saw in the first quarter. I think when I look at the gross booking outcome that we saw in Q4, in fact, it was an acceleration from Q3 all the way through to Q4, very much across the second half of the year.
And as we've mentioned, in Q1, we already see some early acceleration in the current quarter. So when I look at the characteristics of what is driving that, I think it's, in large part, 2 very specific but very different themes. The first is the external one, and I'll speak to that in a moment, and the second is the internal one. So if I think about the external one, we're seeing robust demand right across all workload types.
And what was extremely interesting about the demand profile more generally across our Q4 performance was that it was right across the different segments that we serve. We saw all segments and all verticals grow. So it was a very robust, broad-based demand across numerous different types of workloads. We, of course, saw specificity around AI opportunity where there was connectivity requirements for near metro connectivity requirements or connectivity requirements to unlock the value in that process.
So very robust demand across workloads, across all industries, across all regions and across all of the segments that we serve. Then there is the internal piece, which is the execution of the team against this particular opportunity that we saw in the market. First of all, we did accelerate some capacity into the year. And that was a helpful element in terms of our output and our performance.
But we also had a phenomenal pipeline conversion rate. So the team converted at around 49% in Q4 which speaks, I think, to the quality of the pipeline that we had coming into the quarter. And as I've mentioned previously, we've been putting a lot of focus on ensuring that we're forecasting the future pipeline with the same intensity that we're forecasting the current booking pipeline and really building our footprint strongly as we enter each quarter so that we know that we're executing on very highly qualified, very highly qualified opportunities.
Interestingly, it was also great to see some very firm pricing right across all of those segments and across all of those regions in Q4. So great disciplined internal execution that kind of met the market moment where the market was at -- and as it relates to the characteristics of the transactions that set in that 60% contingent, it was, of course, some of our larger transactions were related to our AI opportunity.
And I think one characteristic of all of them, I've shared with you some of the use cases already across the different segments that we facilitated this functionality into. But 1 characteristic was that we saw a 33% increase in density compared to the non-AI deals. So an average of about 10 kVA per cab for these transactions.
Our next question comes from Michael Rollins with Citi.
Keith, I also want to extend my congratulations and best wishes on your upcoming retirement. Maybe going back to some of the comments from earlier in the call, Keith, I think you were discussing the opportunity to improve churn. And curious, as you're preparing these new tools to help get that churn down, how much of this is in the company's control versus how much of it is just simply customer optimization of workloads that the churn will happen irrespective of how Equinix tries to get in front of it.
And then just a secondary clarification on the 6% stabilized revenue growth, can you unpack that a little bit in terms of what's delivering that incremental strength relative to the recent history.
Yes, Mike, this is Adaire. I might take the churn question, and then Keith answer the question around the 6% stabilized growth for you.
Let me unpack the churn commentary. So over the course of the past 2 quarters, we saw that our churn has set more at the lower end of the range that we guide to that at the higher end. And this is a combination of access to data and unpacking the data, the tool that we're working on and have some early pilots in place that Keith alluded to in his prepared remarks, the fact that we identify much earlier in the process, what we call ATR or available to renew. So much earlier in the process, the cohort of our customers that sit in that ATR category and then being able to deploy our customer success team onto that ATR cohort of customers in order to make phone calls much earlier in the process than we've been doing in the past and to facilitate not just a renewal, but even potentially an upsell opportunity.
One of the things that we saw in Q4 was that 60% of our existing customers added additional services from Equinix to their portfolio. And every time you have a call with the customer, you have an opportunity to share what we're doing around new services. So I think it's the combination of those elements, ATR, telemetry and visibility into our data -- the customer success team focused on this and tools that help us predict more accurately.
And there is, of course, as you quite rightly point out, a proportion of churn that is not addressable by us. And that is now something that we have visibility into, and it means we focus our resources, our efforts on the proportion where we can actually address an outcome for the customer and for the business.
Michael, first, thank you for the nice comment. I appreciate it. To respond to the question on stabilized assets and the growth rate. The beauty of what we shared, number 1 is that there's more and more volume going through basically the stabilized assets that isn't necessarily cabinet related because our utilization is 82%. So that's number one.
Number two, you got higher density per average cabinet. And so that that's working in our favor. Number three, which I think is really important. And then also sort of refers back to 1 of the comments I made in my prepared remarks, where we have some one-off benefits that don't necessarily repeat themselves at least quarter-over-quarter. And that's basically price increases, price increases relating to the fourth quarter. And so it's a combination of all those that really delivered a strong stabilized growth rate on an asset abate that's really quite substantial. And so feel very good about what we delivered. I probably would say, though, and to try and give you some steer if you will, as you look forward. We still generally feel good about the stabilized assets, growing 3% to 5%. That's the typical range.
We are going to have these these periods were slightly higher and sometimes we might be a little bit lower just based on the timing. But overall, we feel really good about the 3% to 5% growth rate attributed to stabilized assets.
Next caller is Frank Louthan with Raymond James.
So part of your footprint expansion was to be able to capture some of the increased power demand from enterprises and we've definitely seen the demand ramp up. So where are you today with regards to your ability to offer -- to meet that customer demand for folks needing incrementally new levels of power from enterprises. Have you caught back up on that? Where are you in that process?
I'll answer that for you. Thanks for the question, Frank. So obviously, power and the sourcing of power is a very significant factor for us as a data center operator. having power means that we're able to secure the compute and energy future of our customers. As we indicated, we currently have of developable land under control, and it's not develop a landfill stop. It is powered land or land that we are close to securing the power on.
So I guess we're not in the business of sortitiously buying a block land if we're not sure that we can power that asset. And so that means that as we look at our capacity and our build profile moving out, we are building against powered land portfolios, which, therefore, will enable us to continue to advance and evolve our footprints and our facilities to meet the density requirements of our customers.
As I mentioned, we saw already in the AI workloads that that we enjoyed in Q4 being 33% more dense than non-AI workloads, and we can certainly see that density increasing across our footprint. So we believe that we're very well positioned to address those requirements of our customers.
And Frank, maybe just adding on to what Adaire said because I think it's important is we have 52 projects currently underway. They're energized projects. And that -- I'm talking about generally the retail space. And as we shared with you at Analyst Day, whether you look at a DC 17 or our new Dallas build, they're coming with scale and size, but they're not so big that maybe there's excess focus on it. And so I feel really good. We talked about the 167 megawatts. And so it gives you a sense of we're building capacity in markets where there's a sort of broad need for that capacity, and they're the important markets, the Chicago, the New York, the Dallas is the Washington and you go around the world and think about all those critical markets and that we're trying as hard as we can to build out on that capacity. And.
So with the 52 projects currently underway, it sort of just -- it adds to what Adaire saying that we have the current opportunity and then we also are creating the future opportunity for ourselves as well.
Our next caller is Michael Funk with Bank of America.
Yes, Keith, first, congratulations there. over the years. So in the prepared remarks, you mentioned a disciplined pricing strategy. Keith, just curious kind of the magnitude of how much higher you can take pricing? And then you mentioned a minute ago, the 3% to 5% projected range for growth with some variance. Can you add any more comments around what would cause the variance, whether seasonality timing? And maybe a final part of my question would be, -- are you seeing ability to change contract terms on renewal, whether that's increased escalators or other factors?
Okay. I'll take the question, and Keith can add some components to it as needed. As I mentioned, we experienced very firm pricing throughout Q4 across all segments and for all regions. And we're very disciplined around the approvals and the approach that we take with our customers. because we recognize that in the platform that is Equinix, there is a range of differentiated value that allows us to accelerate the pricing opportunity.
Our pricing commanding yields as a result of our interconnection density as a result of our cloud on-ramps -- and of course, the metro locations, which becomes even more important when we look in a low latency world around certain applications of AI workloads. So I think from a pricing perspective, we're very disciplined. We're very focused on that, and we know that we have opportunity to accelerate that in that regard.
The vast majority of our contracts auto renew, and they renew with a particular pricing increment applied to them. But this is also an opportunity for us to have a conversation with our customers. And that's why the ATR program is an extremely important 1 for us because it does allow us to look at customer usage, not just of the space and power within our footprint, but some of the additional and incremental services that Equinix offers and then allows us to enjoy the price point that those services represent in terms of value for our customers.
Our next caller is David Guarino with Green Street.
Your stabilized cash gross profit growth has been excellent all year, is in 2025. And part of that, I know, was due to shrinking expenses. So wondering do you think that trend of reducing cost will continue or at some point, are you going to have to increase staffing levels if this outsized pace of bookings continues?
David, let me take that one, Adaire, jump in as needed. So one of the comments we made is that we're just getting started. I think when you step back and look at the organization, we're driving the top line. Ralph and his organization is doing a great job of managing the IV access to the gross profit line and then you have the rest of the organization. And today, for round numbers, you're 18%, 19% SG&A as a percent of revenue, right?
We have a stated goal that we really would like to get -- we'd like to improve that. And that's through bending the cost curve. It's not necessary -- it's not always about eliminating costs, it's bending of the cost curve and becoming more efficient. -- so our goal is to get to 15% over some period of time. And so the combination of managing into the different markets and also managing the spend while also investing behind [ Hermine ] and her efforts to, I guess, to create efficiency in our organization through processes through systems, through tooling -- it's a combination of all these things that I think can make a difference over the years and still early, but we're offering up this year a guide of roughly 200 basis points of improvement is coming from the top line, is coming certainly from Ralph's organization, and we're still investing in the business to develop future opportunity for us.
So I'm not necessarily sort of subscribing to what you said that we need to throw more bodies at it. We tend to be a little bit more head count dense than almost anybody else out in the marketplace. And I would argue that we get more leverage from that as we introduce more assets into our environment. You don't -- if you build another -- put up another building in Dallas, as an example, you don't need to necessarily go higher more SG&A to support that asset.
And so I feel very comfortable that when you look out that we can become an increasingly more efficient business. And consistent with the comments we made at Analyst Day that we're certainly on a nice trajectory, but we said 52% plus. And there's a very good reason why we put the plus at the end of the 52. So it's a journey that we're going to be on together, and I'm excited.
Our next caller is Michael Elias with TD Cowen.
And congrats on the results. question for you regarding the bookings. Obviously, great to see big bookings quarter in 4Q. What I'd like to get a sense of is how would you rank order the contribution to the bookings from the cabinets that you have coming online in capacity-constrained markets, obviously, brought on cabs and Nova as well as Frankfurt, both of which we're capacity constrained versus it being a structural acceleration in demand.
And really, what I'm trying to get at is how sustainable is the 4Q bookings level because that obviously has implications for forward revenue growth?
Okay. Michael, I'll have a stab at the question and then Keith can jump in if I -- if we need additional clarification on a couple of points. I guess, over the course of the last year, we began to show our annualized gross bookings to you as a metric. And the reason for doing that was to give you with the combination of the presales number to give you a sense of the momentum that we see inside the business in any given quarter.
And since we've done that, we've seen our annualized gross bookings moving upwards every quarter. And certainly, Q4 was no exception to that particular outcome. We have a very strong pipeline going into Q1. We've already closed 45% of our Q1 target. And we've had a meaningful presales experience in Q1 to date that has given us our largest presell quarter even though we're just halfway through.
So I think looking forward, our bookings growth will continue to be a very strong indicator of underlying help I think the best line of best fit is up and to the right, but that's where we see the demand. But obviously, there will be some variability quarter-to-quarter seasonality and other elements kick in. So that's something that we will manage as we look at it on a quarterly basis.
Then as it relates to the cabinets, Keith, do you want to...
Yes. Michael, I'll just add a little bit to what Aldaire said as well. I think our expansion tracking sheet gives all the people on the call and a pretty good sense of where we're making our investments. we need more capacity, and we're going to continue to invest more capacity. And as Adaire alluded to, we have roughly 3 gigawatts that we're considering over a period of time, while we're still building currently I think the combination of continuing to make the current investments while thinking longer term, while at the same time, demand shaping to markets -- and you've always heard us talk about the right customer with the right application going into the right data center, and that will continue to hold true.
But particularly in markets where they're constrained, not just for us but for the industry, we feel that we can demand shape that opportunity into other markets that are proximate or within the fiber route sort of environment that would make it suitable for our customer to consume -- and so I would just say that there's a lot of things that are going into it, different markets, they're going to have different sets of circumstances. But this is what we're focusing on as an organization, not only increasing the density, but making sure that we demand shape to the right markets in support of the customers' needs. And that also plays in a little bit to the pricing as well.
So hopefully, that gives you a bit of a sense that, yes, we understand that some markets are more constrained than others, but we're we're also going to build in adjacencies such that we can maybe continue to enjoy the opportunity that's in the marketplace.
Our next caller is Nick Del Deo with MoffettNathanson.
And Keith, congratulations on your upcoming retirement, and thanks for all your help over the years. At Dare, earlier in the call, you noted the strength in the interconnection franchise some of the big cloud service providers that you work with have announced and are developing products to help customers go to multi-cloud route I was wondering if you could talk a bit about the puts and takes of those efforts as it relates to your interconnection franchise.
Thank you for the question. I guess at Equinix, we have always understood and always appreciated the importance of the network. And I think some of the announcements that we've seen around connectivity is a validation of connectivity and the importance of the network as part of the broader AI ecosystem and landscape. And of course, we have continued to invest in our network products, in our interaction product portfolio, and it is a significant part of our footprint and a significant part of our global revenue.
We recognize that many of the clouds have made a cloud-to-cloud connectivity announcement. But this is a very simple use case. -- cloud to cloud is a simple connectivity use case. In reality, the reality of our customers is much more complex than this.
We've always believed in a multi-cloud hybrid world. And that requires a much more complex consideration around connectivity and networking strategies for our customers. And the interesting element for us, of course, is that for many of these clouds, they are very valued partners of Equinix and they use a large part of our infrastructure to help create their value proposition in terms of networking positions and network puts -- now we're always evaluating our strategy here and always looking at what is emerging around the ecosystem.
And that's why for us, we recognize the inherent value of our interconnection franchise. The role of fabric continues to evolve within that franchise as we see provisioned VC capacity stepping up quarter-over-quarter.
We have a range of very exciting developments around our footprint here, our product footprint here and developments that will simplify the networking journey for our customers, developments that will support as it relates to the augmentation of AI agents and AI workloads and development that will really enhance the optimality -- sorry, I'm stumbling over that word that our customers enjoy on our network.
So a lot happening in this space for us but we really see that many of the announcements really validate the role that the network plays in any AI ecosystem and is really, I think, a validation of the connectivity opportunity that we see ahead of us and is 1 of the reasons why we've continued to invest in this space.
Last question comes from Cameron McVeigh with Morgan Stanley.
I just wanted to echo my congratulations to Heath. And Secondly, you've spoken in the past about the shift from training to AI inference workloads. And curious if you have any updated views on the timing you've seen -- and then secondly, this may be a follow-up to the last question, but just how important interconnection offerings are to drying AI inference workloads from enterprises?
On the first part of your question, I think when you look at how our deal profile has moved through the course of into 26, an uptick of 50% to 60%. We can see this tailwind of opportunities perhaps margin earlier as an enterprise footprint than we originally thought when we presented in summer of last year. And so I think that's a really good news because it is taking the promise of AI and putting it into the hands of consumers of citizens and customers all the way around the world. And as it relates to the role of interconnection in AI workloads, I think there's a very significant element here for us to consider.
And in some ways, the sales force example and that I shared in prepared remarks is a really great example of where our connectivity capability was able to provide a very unique service to sales force around creating private network connectivity. And so we're very excited about the opportunity to serve our customers' evolving needs, needs in a complex hybrid multi-cloud world.
We think it's a very fast-growing space. We think it's something that would be additive to our colo capabilities because it will broaden the range of customers and that it will continue to strengthen our platform and our ecosystem. So this is something, as I've mentioned before, that we're very excited about the opportunity and see that we have a very strong competitive differentiation when it relates to others in the segment with this interconnection footprint.
Okay. Great. Well, thanks, everybody, for joining our conference call today, and have a great afternoon.
Thank you all.
Goodbye.
And this concludes today's conference. Thank you for participating. You may disconnect at this time, and have a great rest of your day.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Equinix — Q4 2025 Earnings Call
Equinix — Q4 2025 Earnings Call
📊 Quartal auf einen Blick
- Umsatz: $2,4 Mrd. (+7% YoY)
- MRR: Monthly Recurring Revenue (MRR) +10% YoY; Q4 sukzessive Verbesserung im Jahr
- Buchungen: Q4 Annualized Gross Bookings $474 Mio. (+42% YoY); Gesamt 2025 $1,6 Mrd. (+27% YoY)
- Adjusted EBITDA: $1,2 Mrd. (~49% Marge, +15% YoY)
- AFFO: Adjusted Funds from Operations (AFFO) $877 Mio. (+13% YoY)
🎯 Was das Management sagt
- AI-Treiber: ~60% der größten Deals in Q4 durch AI-Workloads; deutlich mehr Nachfrage von traditionellen Unternehmen, nicht nur Hyperscaler
- Build & xScale: 52 Entwicklungsprojekte, 9 xScale; Hampton-Asset in Americas JV als Start für geplante $15 Mrd. xScale-Investitionen
- Pricing & Ausführung: Diszipliniertes Pricing, hohe Presales-Konversion (49%) und Fokus auf Margen/kapitaleffiziente Finanzierung
🔭 Ausblick & Guidance
- Umsatz 2026: Wachstumserwartung 9–10% (MRR 8–10%); enthält ~40 bp Timing-Effekt aus XL-Lease
- Margen & AFFO: Adjusted EBITDA ~51% (+200 bp vs. 2025); AFFO +9–11%; AFFO pro Aktie +8–10% (adjust. +3ppt für XL-Timing)
- CapEx & Dividende: CapEx $3,7–4,2 Mrd.; Quartalsdividende +10% vs. 2025 (~$2 Mrd. Gesamt)
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Nachhaltigkeit Buchungen: Diskussion über strukturelle Nachfrage vs. kapazitätsbedingte Effekte; Management sieht generelle Aufwärtsdynamik, aber Quarter-to-quarter-Variabilität
- Churn-Reduktion: Einsatz von ATR/Telemetrie und Customer‑Success-Teams zur Vorhersage und Vermeidung addressierbarer Churn-Anteile
- Kapazität & Power: Aussage zu entwickeltbarer, „powered“ Land-Pipeline und 52 laufenden Projekten; Nachfrageformung in eng gezeichneten Märkten als Pricinghebelfaktor
⚡ Bottom Line
- Konsequenz: Starke Q4‑Performance und deutlich optimierte 2026‑Guidance sprechen für beschleunigtes, margenstarkes Wachstum. Kurzfristige Risiken bleiben Timing einzelner ex‑scale Leases und die Realisierung benötigter Power/Fläche, langfristig jedoch positiver Ausblick für AFFO‑Wachstum und Dividendenrendite.
Equinix — Q3 2025 Earnings Call
1. Management Discussion
Good afternoon, and welcome to the Equinix Third Quarter Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Also, today's conference is being recorded. If anyone has any objections, please disconnect at this time.
I would now like to turn the call over to Phillip Konieczny, Senior Vice President of Finance. You may begin.
Good afternoon, and welcome to our third quarter conference call. Before we get started, I would like to remind everyone that some of the statements that we will be making today are forward-looking in nature and involve risks and uncertainties. Actual results may vary significantly from those statements and may be affected by the risks we identified in today's press release as well as those identified in our filings with the SEC, including our most recent Form 10-K filed on February 12, 2025, and on our most recent Form 10-Q.
Equinix assumes no obligation and does not intend to update or comment on forward-looking statements made on this call. In addition, in light of Regulation Fair Disclosure, it is our policy not to comment on its financial guidance during the quarter unless it is done through an explicit public disclosure. On today's conference call, we will provide non-GAAP measures, we provide a reconciliation of those measures to the most directly comparable GAAP measures and a list of the reasons why the company uses them in today's press release on the Equinix Investor Relations page at www.equinix.com.
We have made available on the IR page of our website a presentation designed to accompany this discussion, along with certain supplemental financial information and other data. We would also like to remind you that we post important information about Equinix on the IR page from time to time and encourage you to check our website regularly for the most currently available information. With us today are Adaire Fox-Martin, CEO and President; and Keith Taylor, Chief Financial Officer. Following our prepared remarks, we will be taking questions from sell-side analysts.
At this time, I'll turn the call over to Adaire.
Thank you, Phillip. Hello, everyone, and a very warm welcome to our Q3 2025 earnings call. Equinix delivered a very strong third quarter. Our performance that continues to demonstrate our ability to rapidly invest in significant expansion whilst growing our top line and improving profitability. This performance was underpinned by 3 highlights. First, top line growth. We are seeing continued revenue acceleration, delivering MRR growth of 8% year-over-year on a normalized and constant currency basis. Further, we also achieved record annualized gross bookings of $394 million, a meaningful 25% increase year-over-year and up 14% over Q2.
Importantly, this accelerated growth comes from a highly diversified set of customers across geographies, industries and segments. Second, profitability. We again delivered strong adjusted EBITDA margins for the quarter, and AFFO was up 12% year-over-year on a normalized and constant currency basis. This was better than expected and reflects strong flow-through of our operating results, favorable net interest expense and timing of recurring CapEx spend.
As a result, we are raising our adjusted EBITDA, AFFO and AFFO per share guidance for the full year. Third, expansion. Given the strong demand backdrop, we are advancing our build bolder strategic move where our intent is to double capacity by 2029. We have recently closed on substantial land acquisitions in our greater Amsterdam, Chicago, Johannesburg, London and Toronto metros. Which will support over 900 megawatts of retail and xScale capacity. These results indicate that our strategy is gaining even more traction and resonating with our customers. as we continue to deliver differentiated infrastructure, products and levels of service. On the topic of customer resonance, we achieved significant momentum in Q3. Closing over 4,400 deals with more than 3,400 customers. This volume reflects continued demand for a wide variety of latency-sensitive AI and non-AI workloads, supporting significantly increased data residency and sovereignty requirements and delivering seamless connectivity to distributed data sources. Our rich ecosystems continue to proliferate across a variety of sectors. Including key verticals such as automotive, financial services, networks as well as cloud and AI service providers. Hyundai Motor Group, for example, runs its proprietary [indiscernible] cloud platform at Equinix. Using Equinix Fabric, Hyundai connects to multiple cloud providers in Asia Pacific, the U.S. and EMEA. This enhances customer experience and improved service quality for over 10 million Hyundai connected car subscribers worldwide. Zetaris, an AI data lake house platform provider relocated its AI workloads to Equinix. Using Equinix's distributed AI infrastructure, Zetaris is helping its customers develop agentic AI and other AI applications 6x faster and at 1/3 of the cost. ING is making a strategic shift by migrating its core banking infrastructure in Germany to Equinix, showcasing our ability to help customers meet strict regulatory standards and requirements. Nitori, the largest furniture and home furnishing chain in Japan with over 1,000 stores across Asia and the U.S. partners with Equinix to connect its Osaka and Tokyo operations with low latency to Oracle Cloud.
This helps them simplify their network for future expansion. And supports Nitori's growth objectives of tripling their branches worldwide. In addition, we saw continued momentum with key AI-related magnets and enterprises, including Ally Bank, Bristol-Myers Squibb, Nebius and Groq, amongst others. As I've shared in previous earnings calls, our strategy comprises 3 strategic moves orchestrated across the business, to accelerate our expansion, innovation and profitable top line growth. We continue to deliver strong results and see accelerating momentum against each.
The first strategic move is SAR better. As evidenced by our recent customer wins, SAR Better is rooted in delivering value to customers at every stage of their engagement with us. Customers are increasingly looking to secure both their immediate and their long-term infrastructure requirements. This robust demand profile resulted in a record $394 million of annualized gross bookings in Q3. For clarity, this annualized gross bookings number represents the bookings we expect to start generating revenue within the next 90 days.
Additionally, we have a presold balance totaling $185 million of annualized gross bookings. This presell cumulative balance will start generating revenue beyond 90 days. As of yesterday, we have closed more than 40% of our Q4 bookings plan. We have ample pipeline to achieve our Q4 bookings targets and to build momentum heading into 2026. Our second strategic move, Solve Smarter, is focused on simplifying the consumption of our solutions and extending the value of our leading interconnection capabilities. Our interconnection products had an exceptional quarter. We added 7,100 net physical and virtual connections in Q3. We bringing our total to more than [ $499,000 ]. Interconnection revenue grew 8% year-over-year on a normalized and constant currency basis. To $422 million, driven partially by a 57% year-over-year increase in our fabric bookings in Q3. We also added 2 new native cloud on-ramps in Barcelona and Dubai, adding to our market-leading share of native private cloud on ramps. These results highlight the critical importance of low latency and proximity to end users and our ability to deliver it as both enterprises and service providers manage their distributed architectures.
In September, we unveiled our distributed AI infrastructure solution. This includes a new AI-ready networking backbone and fabric intelligence software designed to support enterprise inferencing workloads. We showcased these capabilities at our first AI Summit, together with key partners and industry leaders. Including NVIDIA, Dow, Groq, HPE, Adobe, Zayo Zoom and WWT. Our customers and partners provided use cases to highlight how Equinix is uniquely positioned to comprehensively deliver on their demands and requirements at enterprise level. And finally, Build Boulder. Through Bill Boulder, we are both accelerating and innovating the delivery of capacity around the world and securing our future through strategic land acquisitions. As mentioned earlier, we are excited to announce that we have recently closed on land acquisitions in several high demand markets to serve customer demand across both our retail and xScale businesses.
This brings our total developable vocasity to approximately 3 gigawatts and nearly 50% increase from last quarter. These are the latest steps towards doubling our available capacity in the next 5 years. Since our last earnings call, we added 7 new projects, including our Dallas 12 development. which is expected to deliver roughly 3,700 cabinets or approximately 67 megawatts of capacity to this key metro. We now have 58 major projects underway globally including 12 xScale projects. 20% of our retail capacity has been considerably accelerated from the initial delivery date. We also opened our 77 market in Chennai, India as we continue to invest in this fast-growing region.
More than 75% of our retail expansion is in major metros, and more than 90% of our expansion CapEx is on owned land or where we have long-term ground leases. Our stabilized cash-on-cash return expectations for these retail expansions are approximately 25%, which is consistent with our existing portfolio. Our North American JV continues to show exciting progress with the closing of our Chicago land acquisition, which we anticipate will be contributed in large part to our xScale business in 2026. In addition, we are in late-stage negotiations for the lease of the entire capacity at our Hampton campus with potential xScale customers. The overall demand picture for our xScale business remains robust. As key players continue to seek capacity in major metros aligning with our xScale strategy.
As our results show, we are consistently delivering on the immediate needs of our customers and the expectations of the market, whilst expanding our salable capacity in anticipation of even greater sustained long-term demand. And we are doing this very profitably. We have been built for this opportunity, and we will continue to build for it.
Let me now turn it over to Keith to share more on the quarter and our Q4 outlook.
Thanks, Adaire, and good afternoon to everyone. Further to Adaire's remarks, the business delivered a very strong third quarter, which immediately translated into solid financial and nonfinancial results. Nearly every key metric was at or better than expected. Our sales team has delivered a record annualized gross bookings across our diversified customer base, resulting in very healthy net bookings in Q3. To further demonstrate the strong momentum in the business, Adaire highlight that we now have $185 million of annualized presales, which will be recorded as bookings in future quarters. Over 40% of the current presales balance was signed in Q3. As customers increasingly look to secure their future growth within our ecosystems. And we continue to deliver accretive value to the bottom line with AFFO well ahead of our expectations for the quarter.
So our strong performance in Q3, coupled with our strategic efforts to continue to secure land for future growth in our major metros is setting the stage for 2026 and beyond. And given our balance sheet is a strategic differentiator, it provides us with the flexibility to invest into a robust demand backdrop and the financial capacity to secure our future energy needs. Finally, our relentless focus on best-in-class capital allocation for our investors while delivering durable long-term value remains a key priority for us as we execute against our Build Bolder initiatives. As it relates to our nonfinancial metrics, they continue to demonstrate positive momentum across nearly all dimensions, including net interconnection additions, provision BC capacity, pricing, volume of transactions and cabinets billing. We added a healthy 7,100 net interconnection ads in the quarter supported by cloud and enterprise connectivity. Cabinets billing stepped up 2,500 cabinets led by strength in the Americas region. With our record Q3 gross bookings performance, we expect our Cabinets billing metric to continue to be strong in Q4.
Our global MR per cabinet yield stepped up $41 quarter-over-quarter on a normalized and constant currency basis, primarily due to increasing densities strong interconnection and firm pricing across each of our regions, consistent with the broader supply-demand dynamics in the marketplace. As Adaire highlighted, we continue to make great progress with our Build Bolder strategy. Our recent land purchases will support more than 900 megawatts of incremental capacity across our full product continuum once built out, meaningfully increasing the capacity to be developed across our portfolio.
The capacity to be developed now stands at 3 gigawatts positioning the Equinix to serve the expanding market opportunity across hybrid and multi-cloud and AI. Our investments remain focused on either enhancing our strong existing ecosystems or laying the foundation for both current and future AI inferencing solutions, which will be built on top of our highly differentiated platform.
Now let me cover the highlights for the quarter as depicted on Slide 7. Do note that all growth rates in this section are on a normalized and constant currency basis. Global Q3 revenues were approximately $2.32 billion, up 5% over the same quarter last year. Our recurring revenue growth stepped up 8% and which is underpinned by the continued bookings momentum of the business. As expected, our nonrecurring revenues moderated sequentially, largely due to lower xScale fees. Q3 revenues net of our FX hedges included a $9 million FX headwind when compared to our prior guidance rates. Global Q3 adjusted EBITDA was $1.15 billion or approximately 50% of revenues, up 8% over the same quarter last year. Q3 adjusted EBITDA, net of our FX hedges, included a $4 million FX headwind when compared to our prior guidance rates. Global Q3 AFFO was $965 million, up 12% over the same quarter last year and meaningfully above our expectations due to strong operating performance, disciplined balance sheet management and timing of recurring CapEx spend.
Q3 AFFO included $2 million FX impact when compared to our prior guidance rates. As expected, global MRR churn in Q3 stepped down to 2.3%, and we expect Q4 MR churn to be within our 2% to 2.5% quarterly guidance range. And now looking at our capital structure. Please refer to Slide 10. Our balance sheet was approximately $38 billion, which included cash and short-term investments totaling $2.9 billion. Our cash and short-term investments stepped down from elevated levels in Q2 as our capital and real estate investments stepped up, and we repaid $1.2 billion of senior notes. Our net leverage was 3.6x our annualized adjusted EBITDA. During the quarter, we issued U.S. dollar equivalent $500 million in Singapore denominated green notes at a rate of 2.9%. We also published our green bond allocation and impact report in September. Equinix has now issued approximately $9.5 billion in green bonds with $7 billion in net proceeds allocated to eligible green projects.
Turning to Slide 11 for the quarter. Capital expenditures were approximately $1.14 billion, including a recurring CapEx of $64 million. We opened 8 major projects across 7 markets since our last earnings call adding retail capacity in key metros, including in London, Miami, Montreal and Washington, D.C. We opened 2 new data centers, one in Chennai, India, the other in Monterrey, Mexico. Revenues from owned assets are 69% of our recurring revenues. Now moving to Slide 12. Our capital investments continue to generate strong returns. Our now 180 stabilized assets increased revenues by 4% year-over-year on a constant currency basis and are collectively 82% utilized and generate a 26% cash-on-cash return on the gross PPE invested.
And finally, please refer to Slides 13 through 17 for an updated summary of 2025 guidance and bridges. Do note, all growth rates are on a normalized and constant currency basis. For the full year, we're maintaining our underlying revenue outlook with a 7% to 8% normalized and constant currency growth rate. Our expected quarter-over-quarter MRR step-up is greater than $60 million. A significant year-over-year increase, highlighting the underlying momentum in the business and gives us the confidence as we look into 2026. And as we previewed in July, our Q4 revenue guidance also includes a meaningful step-up in nonrecurring fees attributable to the xScale business. As Adaire mentioned, our discussions with potential xScale customers are in their advanced stages. But as with transactions of this size and complexity, the timing of contracting can be fluid. Hence, the expanded revenue guidance range.
Given our strong profitability in Q3, we're raising our underlying 2025 adjusted EBITDA guidance by another $21 million. Adjusted EBITDA margins are expected to range between 49% and 50% for the full year. We're also raising our underlying 2025 AFFO guidance by another $31 million. AFFO is expected to grow between 11% and 13%, while AFFO per share growth is expected to range between 8% and 10% compared to the previous year.
And finally, 2025 CapEx is now expected to range between $3.8 billion and $4.3 billion including approximately $290 million of recurring CapEx spend.
So I'm going to stop here. I will turn the call back to Adaire.
Thanks very much, Keith. So in closing, we remain excited and optimistic about the future and our differentiated and durable market position. We are focused on executing against our Q4 expectations. And building our momentum for 2026, and we are very much on track on both accounts. Our intent is to continue to build on the outcomes that defined this quarter. Greater capacity, increased revenue and improved profitability and accelerate them as our strategy achieves even greater traction. We were built for this moment. And I am confident we will continue to make the very most of this opportunity in regards to both the long-term growth and long-term value creation for our shareholders.
So I'll stop here and open it up to questions.
[Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from Nick Del Deo from MoffettNathanson.
2. Question Answer
You have a very strong position with cloud on ramps, and that's obviously helped point a lot of enterprise business over time. you've been starting to land some neo cloud on-ramps and network nodes. Adaire, I think you mentioned [indiscernible] In your prepared remarks. I guess how strategic do you think these deployments will be relative to some of the more traditional cloud on ramps? And what are you doing to attract -- to actively attract AI magnets like these?
Yes. Thank you very much for the question. Yes, you're right. We have a market-leading position in native cloud on-ramps, which is, I think, a very important part of the connectivity narrative that we have for our customers, and we're in a position to add 2 additional on-ramps this quarter to our installed base. We also, as you mentioned, have a very strong presence in terms of AI magnets sitting inside the Equinix ecosystem. Companies that I mentioned in my prepared remarks there like Zetaris [indiscernible] , who is a GPU as a service provider in Germany, Block [ rockwitht ] Q out rider Nebius [indiscernible] to name about a few. Many of these neo clouds are using Equinix as a point of connectivity and a point of presence. And I suspect there's an element of a traction in terms of our 10,000-plus enterprise customers who are also making use of neo clouds for data storage and for connectivity. So our team, particularly our team in the Americas focuses on this aspect of our customer cohort and manages and engages those relationships appropriately in order to ensure that we have the right magnet representation in our ecosystem going forward.
Next, we'll go to the line of Aryeh Klein from BMO Capital Markets.
On the strength in presale activity, I think you changed your approach with sales not that long ago, enable them to sell capacity for their outcome delivery. Is that some of what you're seeing helping to drive the strength there? And then maybe on a related basis, there's a lot of capacity that's set to come online in some of your most important markets. How much pre-leasing actually you're seeing for those?
Aryeh, do you mind -- you broke up there just when you asked...
First part of your question. Yes.
Could you repeat that, please?
Yes, sure, sorry. Just on the strength in presale activity, I think not that long ago, you changed the approach enabling your sales force to sell capacity further out from delivery. Is that some of what you're seeing helping to drive the strength there? And then just on a related basis, there's a lot of capacity set to come online in some of your most important markets. How much pre-leasing activity are you seeing for those?
Okay. Thanks very much for the question. For the repeat, I think that you saw in Q3 in additional in addition to the annualized gross bookings of the $394 million that the team delivered. We also shared the cumulative total presold balance of $185 million of annualized gross bookings, which will be recognized in future quarters. This presales motion is a relatively newer motion for our core retail business, and we have recently extended the window for our sales team to be able to sell retail capacity ahead of delivery for the next 12 months. Previous to that, it was a 3- to 6-month window. This presales opportunity is something that gives our sales team critical capacity to sell into. And it actually is a degree of comfort for our customers because it enables our customers to know where their deployments will be placed when they need them.
And I think in the overall macro environment, with the demand continuing to outpace supply, we actually have seen the velocity of presales increase over the course of 2025, through to Q3. I think Keith mentioned in his remarks that 40% of our total presales balance was signed in Q3 of 2025. So providing these 2 elements, I think provides greater visibility to our investor community. That being said, when we look at the presales activity fairly evenly spread across the capacity that's coming online. We certainly have seeing very significant activity around locations like Frankfurt, London and others where capacity is in short supply, New York, et cetera. Yes. So definitely seeing the uptick in this, which is why we decided to share that data point with you.
Aryeh, maybe I'll just add one other comment, on to what Adaire said, I think it's also important to realize that part of the reason that we've sort of entered into another sales motion as Adaire refers to is the fact that you've got a supply and demand environment that has shifted. And we're -- right now, we're chasing demand. We're trying as hard as we can to bring new supply into the business. And so we want to make sure that our sales organization has the ability to have that visibility. At the same time, having Ralph and his organization, Global Design and Construction, accelerate as fast as they can, some of the builds that were out there to a quarter or potentially 2 quarters sooner than we originally had planned.
So it's the combination of basically -- demand-rich environment, and also as chasing the ability to deliver capacity into the market as fast as we can that really allowed us to enter into the sort of presale arrangement -- and so as Adaire said, the combination of the $394 million, the $100 million, $185 million, it just gives you a real sense of how much momentum there is in the business relative to where we were, not only 2 quarters ago, but certainly last year.
The one other remark that I think it's important just to reiterate, the presale relates to our retail footprint. So not to the entirety of our business. When we look at our ex-scale business, That, of course, is -- we're looking at through the lens of preleasing. So presale is entirely within the retail business. Thanks, Aryeh.
Next, we'll go to the line of Eric Luebchow from Wells Fargo.
Great. I appreciate you guys taking the question. I just wanted to touch on -- what you're seeing in kind of the pricing environment today, you said you're doing more presales -- are you seeing firm pricing or improving pricing just based on some of the capacity constraints we see in the market? And maybe just if I could squeeze one more in, I know you guys have kind of preguided to about a 5% AFFO growth rate next year. I know there's a lot of moving parts as we think into next year, and obviously, interest rates, financial costs looking a little better than you guided to. So any thoughts to some of the moving parts as we kind of roll our models forward to 2026?
Okay. Maybe I'll take the second piece first, and then make some comments on the remarks. Big part on your questions around pricing. So I guess, as we look ahead into 2026, we're certainly focused on our execution in Q4. So revenue is a very prime focus for us, ensuring that we have a very strong exit from Q4. We're certainly feeling very confident about the demand that we're seeing. And I guess our presale and our Q3 gross bookings is evidence of that demand. And Keith also mentioned the ability of our amazing design and construction team to be able to accelerate forward RFS states. We are monitoring and forecasting RFS with the same intensity that we do for revenue. And we did see a 20% acceleration on the 58 projects that we have underway. So the first, I guess, 2 elements of our 2026 color is this focus on revenue, this focus on RFS acceleration date.
We will also continue to focus on cost and how we are operating the business from an efficiency and effectiveness perspective. In order to ensure that we're delivering a very strong operating performance. And I think you can already see some very positive trends there as it relates to that. And then, of course, there is the capital model and the astute management of our capital and our CapEx requirements, which Keith you may want to comment on?
Yes. And so Eric, the -- as it relates to the balance sheet, the one thing in addition to all the good news that sort of -- Adaire was sharing with you there. The other part of the story is slightly different than where we were at our Analyst Day is that a rate of -- the cost to borrow, not only presently, but as you look forward is lower today than it was. So that's the positive news. Add on to that, our ability to raise capital in this environment across different markets and really get a fairly effective low cost of borrow. And as we look forward, we're probably going to continue to as I mentioned maybe in some of the last calls, continue to look at markets like Canada, Europe, whether it's synthetic or otherwise, we're going to raise more capital. And so we'll continue to drive down our over cost to borrow.
The other thing I would say is we have the ability. Again, we run the business on a global basis, as you understand. And so when we repatriate the capital into the United States, we get a higher return on that capital. And so the ability to sort of manage our balance sheet really effectively as well as the cost line that goes through the P&L is we're quite effective at that. And maybe the last part I would say is, as we've started to increase our construction in progress, no surprise to you, we're continuing to look at how we capitalize the interest expense associated with those construction initiatives, whether it's the prebuy or it's the development of land and you can see that over -- not only this quarter, but as we look forward, we'll spend more and more on land in powered land, and so we'll continue to capitalize interest into those projects appropriate with the business.
All right. So maybe let me just come back on the pricing question. We're certainly not seeing any dilution in our pricing, very firm.
Our next question goes to the line of Jonathan Petersen from Jefferies.
Great. Thank you. You talked about the 900 megawatts of land acquisitions that you did in Amsterdam, Chicago, Johannesburg, London and Toronto. Can you give us just some more details on if any one or two of those sites are particularly larger than the others and where you might be expecting to build ex-scale versus retail within those markets on that new land?
Okay. Yes, thank you very much. We were very excited about those land acquisitions. We believe they are very meaningful and associated closely with the metros where we have a lot of demand from our customers. So as you know, these recent land acquisitions have really brought our land under control. to a very significant level, enabling us to -- actually since last quarter to increase land under control to nearly by nearly 50%. And -- in terms of how we view the various different elements of the portfolio here in alignment with the long-term capital investments that we detailed at Analyst Day, we do plan to double our overall capacity, both inclusive of retail and xScale by 2029. And whilst we're not providing a very specific breakdown of the anticipated megawatt delivery between retail and xScale within these recent land acquisitions, we do anticipate that a significant proportion of London and Chicago land purchases will be earmarked for xScale business and will be contributed to the JV for which we will be compensated.
And I think our global design and construction teams also remain highly focused on delivering critical capacity across the portfolio. And so to some extent, the split of megawatts between retail and xScale is somewhat fungible because of the full product continuum that Equinix offers across traditional retail, larger footprint retail and xScale. And so really, we're looking to maximize the value based on the opportunity that we see for each of those land acquisitions.
Next, we'll go to the line of Michael Elias from TD Securities.
I'm going to see if I can press my luck here. I was looking at the municipal filings for the Manuka campus site. And from what I found in the minutes of the meeting, I think there was a talk about a split for that Chicago site, some of it being for xScale, some of them being for retail. I'm just wondering if there's kind of any direction you could give us in terms of what you're leading is for that campus for retail versus xScale. And then also as part of that, just curious, you talked about signing a bank deal in this quarter. We're seeing some large bank deals out in the market. I'm curious if xScale, you're still thinking about reserving that for hyperscale customers or maybe you'd be willing to take on some large enterprise customers within that space?
All right. So 2 questions. Let me address them one at a time. So certainly, the concept of the mega campus considers the possibility of jointly co-locating xScale with retail on a single campus. And that is certainly something that we are actively reviewing and considering as we plan out our mega campuses and something that I think will be a value add to all the participants, whether they are a participant in the xScale ecosystem or in the broader Equinix ecosystem. As it relates to transactions with the banks, certainly, it was interesting to see financial services as a very dominant sector in our Q3 results. And emerging requirements, for example, in series of operation like EMEA, where the door regulation is requiring a different level of resilience for financial services organization. This is also something that's helping to augment the demand that we're seeing in the Financial Services segment.
Certainly, we believe that our capacity is somewhat fungible across our xScale and retail footprint. And if there was an opportunity to service a large footprint through an xScale capacity that was available, then we would certainly work with our partners to ensure that, that would be something that we could consider for that customer.
And Michael, maybe I'll add on just one other thing. You made a reference to Manuco, which obviously, many hundreds of megawatts of capacity in that market. As Adaire alluded to, we look at the test fits and understand what is the best structure for for both the partnership and for the retail business because quite overly, we want a certain amount of capacity to come into the retail portfolio because we need that capacity in some of these larger markets. And so we're going to continue to look at that. The team, as part of any of these large campus type builds. We'll look to see how to bifurcate the land so that the portion stays in the ex-scale structure and then a portion of it can be owned by Equinix directly.
But again, I'd just say appropriately, you could appreciate that there is some of these larger markets, and Adaire alluded to London London and Chicago. But the other one that's out there is Amsterdam, which is in the greater Amsterdam area and something that we really are putting a lot of attention to. So hopefully, that gives you a little bit more color on the large-size opportunities that are in front of us.
Next, we'll go to the line of Michael Rollins from Citi.
So a couple of questions. First, with respect to -- there, you just referenced the larger footprint retail. And from the Analyst Day, that was one of the incremental uses of capital and investment for Equinix. So curious what you're seeing on that front in terms of demand? And are those the types of deployments that you should also see some significant pre-leasing as you get closer to bringing them online commercially. And then just one clarification. Keith, you mentioned the the width of the revenue guidance. I think this year, for 4Q is $120 million versus $40 million when you're coming into the fourth quarter of [ '24 ]. And just kind of curious like if you could frame the nonrecurring revenue toggle of what if all of that opportunity for xScale bookings gets pushed into 2026 versus maybe being able to get all of what you'd like to see in the fourth quarter of '25?
Could I go first?
Yes.
Thanks, Mike. So as it relates to large footprint, we actually had a very healthy mix in our Q3 revenue mix of large footprint deals but also a very, very healthy retail and interconnection uptick in the quarter. As it relates to the applicability of large footprint to the presale sales motion. Certainly, we're seeing -- customers who require capacity that is contiguous as part of that presales process because that's one way of securing that contiguous capacity long term, particularly in high demand markets.
And then the -- the second question, which is we really highlighted on Page 15 of the earnings deck. And I know some of you might not have seen the deck yet, but we sort of give a breakdown of bridge on sort of what's happening in. Clearly, there's a meaningful step-up in revenue between Q3 and Q4, and you can see that at 7%, and that also translates into revenue -- sorry, EBITDA profit, 7% quarter-over-quarter growth. embedded in that, in the prepared remarks, we sort of noted that $60 million plus will come from recurring. Again, a very steep increase from where we historically have been on a recurring basis, and it's very reflective of the comments that Adaire made on the strength of our booking activity and how quickly that turns into sort of a billing line. And so that deal -- that's sort of the $60 million as part of it. But going from sort of the normalized Q3 to midpoint of Q4, it's $153 million step-up. And so it tells you that there's roughly $90 million nonrecurring. Of that, of that, I would say, roughly 1/3 of it is traditional nonrecurring activity, 2/3 is this large potential transaction that we have been working on for months.
And so part of the reason we expanded the range quite simply is we have a certain assumption that's based in the fourth quarter here. We want to live within the guidance range that we're guiding you to. Our intention is, and we are highly confident that we can close this transaction in this quarter, but we wanted to give you the range on what would happen if it didn't close this quarter and it closed in Q1, which is not our intention. So again, I think it's just an appropriate way to manage the -- again, the large nonrecurring activity. I might leave you with one other thought. Again, Adaire sort of alluded to it already, as we work with great confidence with, again, potential party to this transaction, it is for the full build -- it is for potentially the full build-out, and that's 240 megawatts. Those 240 megawatts are split into 4 buildings at 60 megawatts each. Embedded in this number is roughly half of that. So you can get a sense that to the extent that we do the entire transaction, that sort of puts us in a different part of the range than where we typically try and run at midpoint or better.
So hopefully, that gives you the color that you need. And -- and because it was a complex response, we probably would happy to let you ask a follow-up question if you need to.
That was super helpful color. So Keith, thank you so much. But since you're giving me the extra question, I have to take advantage of it. So just curious, one of the things I was looking at was when I look at the Slide 7 -- actually, sorry, 8 and 9, and I'm looking at the regional performance. And then looking at the normalized constant currency type of growth rates in each region relative to the EBITDA and trying to think about margins, what's happening in the segments where it looked like margins accelerated significantly in the Americas. You had less EBITDA growth in EMEA and kind of middle of the pack in APAC. And is there anything unique about this quarter in terms of the way investors should be thinking about operating leverage or just continuing to expand margins as revenue grows in each of these regions?
Yes. Thanks for the question, Mike. I think one, it's a very fair question and and one that we certainly want to talk about. Adaire alluded to earlier in our comments, in addition to driving the top line growth, which you're seeing, obviously, the magnitude of increase in our annualized gross bookings. In addition to that, you can throw on the presales, the business is performing really well. But we are actively going after the cost. And the thing that's unique about the Americas, remember, we break our business into 3 segments. And embedded in the Americas business is basically all the corporate SG&A, which, of course, is a lot of the SG&A line that sits on our financials. And so by attacking the cost line, you're seeing a lot of benefit coming into the Americas region for those reasons.
The second thing I'll talk about is you've got some one-offs. And like anything, when you have xScale and you have transactions and particularly last year in EMEA, there's some transactions in the xScale space that didn't repeat themselves and so the profitability shifts between the years. But I would say that just fundamentally, there's one-offs in EMEA this quarter to the tune of roughly $10 million. And if you compare it to the same quarter last year, there was a $10 million benefit in the quarter. And so you have a $20 million swing. And that has a big enough move in the EMEA business to cause some movement around the margin line. Fundamentally, you can see when you look at APAC, you look at Americas and ultimately, when you take out sort of the seasonal aspects of power costs and some of the one-offs from xScale, the fundamental business, the profitability is increasing in all 3 regions of the world. And that's something that, again, Adaire has been pushing us on across the markets and also the corporate functions to make sure that we're as judicious as possible with our spend.
Next, we'll go to the line of Jim Schneider from Goldman Sachs.
A little bit of a left field question. Given the 12 xScale projects you're working on, maybe give us a sense about your level of confidence of power availability and scheduling for those additional projects? I'm assuming you feel relatively confident, but maybe kind of give us a sense of the time frame for planning those. And then any changes you're seeing in terms of your anticipated use of power, whether it's grid power or other alternative sources for those?
Yes. All right. There's a lot to unpack in that question, because I think -- there's a lot to unpack in the power and energy narrative around the data center space. And there's no doubt that this is a complex area, and the complexity is certainly growing by the day. I think Equinix has a number of significant benefits here when it comes to navigating power as a constraint in the industry. First of all, your 27-year history. Which has a very clear profile of how we use power, how we minimize and optimize our use of energy and also the relationships that we've developed over that period of time with all of the utilities who provide us service and partner with us from the grid. And this is something I think that's held us in good stead as we are looking at this issue holistically across the business.
I think the second thing that we can see is that there is a change in terms of the customer supplier dynamics between the data center and large NG users and the utilities overall in that, in many cases, for many of these land acquisitions there is a contract that you enter into in order to secure the load ramp that you have identified for this acquisition, and that often requires a CapEx investment in order to secure that power commitment. I think as Keith mentioned earlier, we're extremely fortunate to have a very, very strong balance sheet and to be able to meet those requirements in a very differentiated way. When we look at the land acquisitions that we've made recently for the land that's under our control, either the power for these lands is either already fully committed or we're in very advanced stages of discussions with the power providers because as I'm sure you know that we're not in the business of speculatively buying -- speculatively buying land.
As it relates to our 12 xScale projects that are underway, all of our current 12 projects all have power secured. So power is not a constraint on the 12 xScale under development scenarios. I hope that gives you a picture of where we are in terms of the 12 xScale projects, but also the broader power continuum.
Next, we'll go to the line of David Guarino from Green Street.
A question on the annualized gross bookings and now the new metric, presold gross bookings, I'm admittedly still trying to wrap my head around what a normal run rate each quarter should look like. So -- was this a one-off quarter? Or is this the normal run rate we should expect going forward? And then similarly, on that comment, Adaire, just to clarify the comment you made earlier. There is no price difference for customers committing to capacity 12 months out versus committing today. Is that correct?
Yes. Maybe the first part of your question, I'll try to address. Look, I think when you look at our bookings history and of course, this is a relatively new measure that we revealed on Analyst Day for the first time. And we did provide a little historical perspective when we provided that number on Analyst Day. You can see that it is a relatively consistent growth story across the annualized gross bookings measure. But in fairness, it is also a measure that could be quite volatile depending on how a particular quarter would play out. I think as it relates to our position as we move into Q4 and executing now as we are on Q4, already 40% of our Q4 budget and target is already closed at this point of the quarter. And the pipeline that we have as it relates to Q4 is a very strong pipeline. And so our standard conversion rates applied against that pipeline would lead us to believe that we will meet our Q4 budget.
So I think for the period of time that we have shown this data you can see a relative degree of consistency in terms of growth over quarter-over-quarter, but I would make the point that bookings can be inherently volatile. And therefore, it's not possible to predict that bookings themselves will always be up and to the right even though we believe that the underpinning demand in the market and the momentum in the market is up and to the right.
And David, maybe just one sort of add-on to Adaire's comment. To the extent that we don't have capacity in certain markets, and as we talked about, there's -- presale isn't in that number, that [ $394 million ] and so to the extent that we say we run out of capacity and given a sort of highly sought aftermarket, you might see a scenario where presale activity moves. So as Adaire said, you can have some volatility and we used to have more seasonal volatility. But because of the supply-demand dynamics, I think that's very different today. But that also presents a scenario where you could have maybe more presale activity than you would have basically annualized gross bookings. So there's going to be these trade-offs. And again, we don't -- can't give you a number right now, but I think to the extent that we see things happening, we're going to guide you to it. I'm going to say, "Hey, we're out of capacity in these 5 markets, we anticipate more more presales than we'd say annualized gross bookings, which turn into revenues much sooner than a presale item.
Next, we'll go to the line of Frank Louthan from Raymond James.
Talk to us about the uptick in the cross-connect revenue and the ARPU there. What's driving that? Is that more power densities or customer mix? And is that strength you're seeing in the Americas replicable in other markets and other areas of the world? Is that sort of a is that agreeing to see the lead there in the Americas?
Yes. Thank you. Certainly, the Americas is the leader in terms of the demand that we're seeing for our interconnection portfolio. We added 7,100 physical and virtual interconnects. And as a result of that, our interconnection revenue grew 8% year-on-year. The cohort of customers, you can see the technology and infrastructure providers, the cloud being the ones who are driving that demand, primarily in the Americas business. And I guess, as we start to see those organizations and segments proliferate into other markets, then we will see that continue to evolve and grow in other theaters of operation. But you're quite correct in your assumption that this was largely driven by our Americas business this year -- this quarter rather.
And was it power densities or customer mix? Or what's sort of driving that?
Customer mix -- customer mix.
And for our final question, we'll go to the line of Michael Funk from Bank of America.
Yes. Thank you for the question. So First for you, Keith. I heard the comment on the call about accelerating some of the builds and also your comment about capitalizing some of that expense. But does any of that change your thought or outlook on the level of AFFO or the shape of AFFO growth that you laid at Analyst Day? And then second, for you, Adaire, putting your tech hat back on, as you think about distributed AI infrastructure solution and other emerging solutions at Equinix, can you size the addressable market for us for those and how you think about it?
Yes. Why don't I take the first question, then we'll pass it back to Adaire. So as I said in my sort of -- in response to one of the earlier questions, the company has had the ability to raise capital at a lower rate than originally planned, even though the majority of it, we're going to do a lot of refinancing in '26, '27 and '28. The underlying assumptions have changed as well. And I would say, I don't want to take this as an opportunity to shift guide on, as you know, we'll spend time in February on what we're going to do for 2026. But it's fair to say that our cost of [ barrel ] is lower. We're getting good return on the cash that's sitting on the balance sheet, and we are capitalizing a little bit more largely because we have more construction in progress. And as a result, you should expect capitalized interest increase a little bit.
To give you a perspective in Q2, we capitalized roughly $14 million, if I got my numbers right, $14 million. In Q3, we capitalized $27 million. And then in Q4, the number will be somewhere between $20 million and $30 million of capitalized interest. And so that's a little bit higher than what it was before. But we're spending faster. We're accelerating faster. Again, we really ask Ralph to Raj and the teams to to really build as fast as they can. And so with the acceleration of the capital spend, you would see more capitalized interest into the balance sheet.
As it relates to the product portfolio, certainly, you can see this increase in our interconnection revenue up to $422 million in the quarter. And a very specific focus on fabric with a 57% year-over-year increase and actually continuing to provision at record levels, are now up to 110 terabits in terms of fabric provisioning. So I think all of this speaks to the connectivity narrative and opportunity that Equinix represents and the range of services that Equinix can provide to customers who are considering AI and non-AI-orientated workloads. The connectivity of the company is certainly the secret sauce and I do feel that there are opportunities for us to look at potential for this aspect of our product portfolio.
But I would say that connectivity is not just the only dimension around which people are considering Equinix when they look at solving for deploying inferencing and inferencing base workloads at Equinix. Latency is one dimension, but there are others around model provider flexibility around edge processing so that you're reducing the cost of bringing data back to the center. Around data residency and compliance so that sensitive data is being processed in [ situ ] and also around intellectual property protection. And all of these elements are considerations around the platform that is Platform Equinix when our customers consider workload deployment and workload placement with us.
So I think this represents a very viable opportunity for us to continue to evolve and grow.
Thank you, everybody, for joining the call. and go ahead. Yes. Thanks, everybody, for joining the call. Have a great afternoon, everybody.
Thank you all for participating in the Equinix Third Quarter earnings conference call. That concludes today's conference. Please disconnect at this time, and have a great rest of your day.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Equinix — Q3 2025 Earnings Call
Equinix — Q3 2025 Earnings Call
📊 Quartal auf einen Blick
- Umsatz: $2,32 Mrd (+5% YoY, auf normalisierter/konstanter Währungsbasis)
- Adjusted EBITDA: $1,15 Mrd (~50% Marge, +8% YoY)
- AFFO: $965 Mio (+12% YoY; AFFO = Adjusted Funds From Operations)
- MRR: Monthly Recurring Revenue wuchs +8% YoY (normalisiert, konst. Währung)
- Bookings: Annualized gross bookings $394 Mio (+25% YoY); presold Balance $185 Mio (Start der Umsatzerfassung >90 Tage).
🎯 Was das Management sagt
- Build Bolder: Ziel, Kapazität bis 2029 zu verdoppeln; Landkäufe in Amsterdam, Chicago, Johannesburg, London, Toronto für >900 MW.
- Solve Smarter: Fokus auf Interconnection/Fabric—7.100 Nettoverbindungen, Interconnection-Umsatz $422 Mio (+8% YoY), Fabric-Bookings +57% YoY.
- Produktinnovation: Einführung einer Distributed-AI-Infrastruktur (AI‑backbone + Fabric‑Intelligence) zur Unterstützung von Inferencing‑Workloads.
🔭 Ausblick & Guidance
- Umsatzprognose: Volles Jahr 2025: Wachstumserwartung 7–8% (normalisiert, konst. Währung) beibehalten.
- Profitabilität: 2025 Adjusted EBITDA Guidance um $21 Mio angehoben; Marge erwartet 49–50%.
- AFFO: Guidance um $31 Mio erhöht; AFFO‑Wachstum 11–13%, AFFO/Share +8–10%.
- CapEx: 2025 erwartet $3,8–4,3 Mrd (recurring ~ $290 Mio). Q4 enthält bedeutenden nicht‑wiederkehrenden xScale‑Upside; Timing kann in Q1 2026 verschoben werden.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Presales: Sales‑Window auf 12 Monate erweitert; $185 Mio presold, davon ~40% in Q3 signiert; Presales erhöhen Visibility, können volatil sein.
- Land & xScale: Management sagt, Teile der London/Chicago/Amsterdam‑Flächen voraussichtlich xScale‑geeignet; Split bleibt flexibel, Beitrag zur JV möglich.
- Power & Pricing: Sicherheit der Energieversorgung für 12 xScale‑Projekte bestätigt; Pricing laut Management „firm“ (keine Verwässerung festgestellt).
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Starkes Quartal: beschleunigtes organisches Wachstum, Rekord‑Bookings und Margenverbesserung; Guidance wurde zur Profitabilität nach oben angepasst. Kurzfristiges Risiko bleibt am Timing großer xScale‑Transaktionen; mittelfristig stärkt die Land‑ und Powerposition die Fähigkeit, skaliertes AI‑Demand profitabel zu bedienen.
Equinix — Global Communications Infrastructure Conference
1. Question Answer
I'm Jon Atkin with RBC. Pleased to be spending the next 20 minutes on the fireside chat with Keith Taylor, Chief Financial Officer of Equinix. Welcome, Keith.
Thanks, Jon. I'm going to be making some forward-looking statements in all likelihood. So please do refer to our SEC documents. Now you can go.
Well done. So maybe just to kind of set the stage because there's a mix of folks in the audience, and you did have your Investor Day in June where you laid out kind of multiyear guidance. So maybe just to level set, remind us kind of what you see yourself doing over the next several years around top line EBITDA, AFFO and so forth?
Yes. So we did -- June 25, we had the Analyst Day. I think many of you are aware of it. Really, it was a story about growth. Investing for the future, taking up our CapEx, roughly $1 billion a year for the next 5 years, to $20 billion to $25 billion of investment over -- through 2029. Obviously, we felt revenue continue to grow with an aspiration to get to double-digit revenue growth.
And then AFFO. The underlying business is going to grow healthily. But with refinancing and the raising of additional capital, we have a little sort of -- we have a little bit of an investment horizon in 2026, and that sort of 5% to 9% growth. And then the dividend would continue to accelerate.
And I thought -- one of the things, Jon, I know you didn't ask for this, but I'm going to give to you anyway. I thought it was a very forward-leaning sort of investor-focused sort of presentation because I also said we're going to only raise debt. We're going to use our balance sheet and the cash that we generate, plus debt, and we're going to invest in this growth. And I think all of you -- or many of you probably already met Adaire. And if you haven't, she's a force to be reckoned with. Great lady, great CEO. And her aspiration is to grow as fast as we can.
But the challenge that we have is the time line to grow the business because it takes 2, 3, in some cases, 4 years to develop the capacity, the time horizon of when you invest versus when you realize the fruits of that investment are beyond the planning cycle. And so our aspiration is to grow as fast as we can with a margin that will be 52% or plus over that time period, by the time we get to 2029.
So your global. Have been for quite some time. A lot of it organic, some of it inorganic. But as you look at kind of the pie chart of Americas versus EMEA versus APAC, where you're allocating capital? Where you see the kind of the demand opportunities? What's different compared to today around geographic mix?
Well, I think probably for many in this room, I mean, the opportunity is immense around the globe. And we're investing heavily in the United States. But we also have some very critical markets around the globe in Asia and in Europe. xScale is a little bit different. At least xScale, our 2.0 exercise, is first focused on the U.S., but you'll see us talk about major metro -- or sorry, larger campuses in Asia and Europe, hopefully in the not-too-distant future.
But that's the appetite. It is a global opportunity. The markets are growing. We tend to be a little bit different than a lot of the other players, largely because we -- if it's not xScale, we're selling 4,000 transactions a quarter to 3,000 customers, or something of that order of magnitude depending on the quarter.
Where xScale is you're selling to a large hyperscaler and a lot of people are chasing those opportunities. We've got one project that's currently underway that quite openly when you step back, we thought it was sizable at the time, but it's really 240 megawatts. Seems like it's not that significant anymore.
Having said all of that, it does feel like it's going to be a really good market to build in, which is outside Atlanta. We're already preparing the land, and we're going to get the buildings up as fast as we can because the appetite for that type of offering is very real. But let me just stop there and make sure I answered your question.
Yes. So kind of still global and maybe opportunity driven in terms of...
I think it's opportunity-driven, but there's markets around the globe, as we all know. I think all of you know is they're very difficult to build in. And so you have to recognize that, that is the case, and Singapore is a perfect example of that. And we're building out our Singapore 6 asset, which is 20 megawatts, but we want more capacity in Singapore. That's almost SGD 1 billion market for us. And so because you can't build maybe at the rate and speed you want to, we're also building in Johor, in Kuala Lumpur in Malaysia. We just opened up our Indonesian site. We just opened up Chenai. We just bought a business in the Philippines. We're preparing land in Thailand, in Bangkok. So there's a number of things that we're doing that I think really matter to that part of the world.
We're investing heavily in Hong Kong. Although there's one building that we -- at the end of last year, we said that we're going to take a charge against. It was more because it was an old building that came with an acquisition, but we're investing heavily in the Hong Kong market because we think it's really important. Largely because Chinese companies coming to the Greater Bay Area of China, which includes Hong Kong. We think that's going to be an entree from Chinese companies coming out of Greater China into Southeast Asia and other parts of the world. And so we remain very excited about these -- the markets in Asia, and equally so in Europe.
And then there's emerging markets that we think are really attractive. And 1 day, I'd love to say that we have an asset in Riyadh. We're building out in -- where we have business in Abu Dhabi, in Dubai, in Oman, in Muscat, in Salalah. And so we're going to continue to invest in that part of the world. And then the U.S. is, I think, I mean, it's just a great place to build right now. And so it's an exciting time for the industry.
So you talked a little bit about growth indirectly through, say, tuck-ins or new market entry. There's also just pricing. There's less churn. Churn can be maybe at the lower end of the range. There could be revenue optimization. There could be head count in terms of solutions engineers and quota-bearing headcount.
How do you kind of view that all of those sort of things trending because they all do influence the top line as well as EBITDA? So a lot to unpack there. So start with sales...
We only have 20 minutes, so we're going to throw all in as much as we can anyway.
No, I think there's different aspects of it. Certainly, there's a volume play. And I think many of you probably feel that demand isn't an issue. And the real issue is supply. And so getting the supply into the market. So that's number one. So I think if we have the inventory, we'll be able to sell it, particularly in the markets that are very rich with opportunity.
Pricing is firm. Firm is maybe an understatement. Depending on the market you're in, pricing is strong. But then there's markets that tend to be a little bit softer based on the competitive dynamics and the supply coming into the market. And so each market has to be analyzed to optimize against the opportunity.
Having said all of that, then you have you have the ability to operate quite efficiently at the asset level, but then you've got all the corporate costs and the borrowing cost. And I'd say we're managing our -- we're managing our cost model very effectively. We're investing heavily in Harmeen, who is our new CDIO, and AI and all things system-oriented. That includes processes, and that will take costs out of our equation.
We've got a new CCRO in Shane Paladin. I think he has go-to-market strategy and all the things that we do to create demand and keep customers insight. Our assets are going to be important, including the AI initiatives that we put into understanding the predictive analytics on what's going to drive outcomes. And so between investing in those areas that we can drive down, I think, our cost to operate. And then we're going to invest heavily in our go-to-market, the front end of the customer-facing initiatives.
And at the same time, I said at Analyst Day that we're going to continue to raise capital, is going to be debt oriented. We're refinancing what we have. But the capital that we raised -- the last deal that we just did a couple of weeks ago was in Singapore. Again, USD 500 million equivalent at 2.9%. So well below the average rate that I assumed at 4.9% at the Analyst Day.
And since Analyst Day, we almost had a 100 basis point move in the 10-year treasury. And so we're going to be able to raise capital eventually in the United States, but the next port of call is going to be probably in North America, not in the U.S. And then we're going to go back to Europe because I think the opportunity is right. And so we'll be able to drive that. I think that cost to borrow further than -- probably lower than where we were guiding to, largely because the market, as I said at that time. If the markets allow or permit for it, will borrow money cheaper.
And then we're really undertaking a very strict review on capitalization because the market had asked us to do that, or the investors did. And so we're doing that as a team and looking at that. So a number of things are working very much in our favor.
Maybe the last thing I would say, and I've said it to some of the people in the audience already. When the market speaks, whether or not you agree with our posture, the market has spoken. So we need to respond to the market conditions and what our investors are expecting of us. And Adaire is -- and Adaire and I are very, very much aligned on what we need to deliver for 2026, which was the low end of that range. And let me just leave it that. The message was delivered, and so we will respond accordingly.
And then customer retention, a couple of words on that?
Well, churn for us, it ebbs and flows. I've said a couple of things with our investors today. But suffice it to say, I would love to see us get our churn rates down. Largely, as your base gets -- starts to increase, keeping a churn rate of 2% to 2.5% is generally in that range. It's hard as the base gets bigger and bigger and bigger. And so our goal is to find ways to get that -- our churn percent down. But right now, I'd say we're not shifting our thoughts on that right now.
And I think the work that we're doing on our analytics and reshaping our go-to-market positioning, we -- just to give everybody a sense, our entire go-to-market, plus the support functions, are roughly about 3,000 employees -- 2,500 to 3,000 employees. And so you want to make sure everybody is selling from the right vantage point. And I think the -- obviously, there's work that we can do to make sure that we do better.
And then at the same time, work on the churn analytics and get the predictive behaviors of our customers analyze through an AI lens that will help us get ahead of it. And I think that's going to be an opportunity for us as well. Maybe not over the next couple of quarters. But as we look into '26 and beyond, I think it's going to -- it will pay dividends for us.
So as more workloads become associated with AI, whether it's from hyperscale customers that also reside in your data centers or enterprise. How does the latency -- the traditional kind of latency value prop of Equinix play into what you see as coming -- the coming wave of AI inference workloads?
Yes. I -- Look, I'd like -- I don't think I'm wrong in this assumption. I liken it very much to the advent of cloud and just where cloud was going. A lot of compute was done in locations. But at some point, you need to aggregate or deliver an availability zone, or aggregation node, or network node. And I think that holds true for AI as well.
The models will get trained. And whether they're sovereign, or foundational, what frontier oriented models, they will continue to develop over time across different markets, and across different regions of the world. They will eventually need to converge and inference will become a bigger part of it. And I thought we're pretty clear that we'll be the beneficiary of inference, less about training and in sovereign models.
It doesn't mean that we won't have -- we won't create value from that. I just think that's not really where our sweet spot is. And so having the diversity of network, the diversity -- pardon me, the diversity of cloud on-ramp, the cable landing stations, both origination and termination. These all play into a strategy and then you can get into satellite and the like that I think we're going to be the best representation of that opportunity as we continue to work with customers to distribute the AI opportunities.
And let me give you another example. I mean you've heard us talk about it. We're really excited about just what Groq's doing with us around the globe. And that's just -- that's the front edge of these opportunities. And if they get it right, then we got it right, because that is where inference will start to accelerate and there's more and more companies that will start to look more like them. Not to mention there's the GPU as a service, the private AI cloud. They're all the service providers that are going to have AI-oriented solutions. And it's the combination of all of those that I think will make a difference for Equinix because we are low latency. Because we have the on-ramps. We have the networks. We have the latency sensitive environments.
So it sounds like in the early innings of this journey, it's identifiable inference because Groq, G-R-O-Q, obviously, that's their business model. Inference as a Service. And you've got tech companies that are driving this.
Where is the enterprise, because you mentioned the analogy with cloud? So as enterprises start to do inference within their own environments, do you have a view yet as to how soon that might happen? Early days? Any early kind of reference cases that you can cite?
I think we feel 2027 is going to be a real turning point for the industry as it relates to inference. That all said, we have reference points whether -- it's the large pharma bioscience companies that are doing local AI, sort of AI, private clouds that are very much used GPU clusters to optimize basically research, or development and output. So you see that to other companies that are in the services space that are selling basically their services to enterprises.
Again, that's the front edge of, I think, the beginning of opportunity. You're starting to see liquid cooling applications go into our environment. We're liquid cool available, but you want to see the consumption of that type of architecture because that tells you the realness of what's coming into play.
And then the other part, I would say that not all -- not all -- not at all AI -- let me say this differently. Not all AI deployments need to be liquid cooled. A lot of it can be air-cooled depending on the concentration. And that's, again, an indication that we cater to a wide array of customers with different parameters that need to live in a co-located, or multi-tenant data center environment.
We're not selling to one customer that architects itself uniquely, that has to compete with everybody else in the space. And so that's why we have a different offering inside the retail space versus the xScale space, which creates a host of other issues.
So on xScale, you've got a lot of deep-pocketed competitors that are willing to take leverage higher that might be willing to build even bigger than, say, 240 megawatts.
So how do you sort of see the competitive landscape? Is demand such that you don't focus so much on the competition? Or is it a factor that you have to kind of contemplate?
Well, we -- I think it's fair to say, I mean, we're a public company, and so you have to live within the confines of what a public company can and kind of not do. When you have a shareholder in a private equity environment that is willing to take their tolerance up to 10x or 15x, that's okay because it's short-lived and they can monetize off of that. We can't do that in the public environment.
And so we focus on what we can do and so that's the comfort of realizing that we can't compete maybe head-to-head, but then we have our joint ventures and we have really strong partners. GIC is an awesome partner. CPP is an awesome partner. PGIM is an awesome partner. And there are other partners out there that we can potentially do business with. So it's the recognition that we will need to partner with somebody, to make sure that we can accelerate the growth opportunity in front of us.
And we're already between Hampton and then the other sites we're talking about. And they're only -- I'm only talking about three sites. That would be -- that in itself if we execute against that over the not-too-distant, that will deliver over 1 gigawatt of capacity. And that -- and we're only scratching the surface as a company.
So I think you're going to see Equinix start to accelerate. Largely because of how we're investing and what we're doing to shift the emphasis in the xScale environment.
Time for one quick question if there is one from the audience.
[indiscernible]
Yes, we are hosting AI Summit really to provide -- I was saying -- some investors, the community, the potential customers, the hyperscalers, the opportunity to understand how we're going to approach the AI initiative, and why we think we're going to be very relevant as we look forward in the future. And so some about technology, some about understanding just what we're doing and where we're doing it, and then also just the depth of our team.
Question at the end? Yes.
[indiscernible]
Well, the beauty is that we have the...
So question was about older carrier hotel assets, and how you future-proof yourself?
Yes. Look, I think, number one, those networks aren't going away. Two, we have Fabric, which basically connects all the sites together as if they're one. Three, the density factor in a carrier hotel is very different than basically a high compute environment. And so we have capacity that's available. To the extent we don't, we're building around it, and making sure that we connect it, connect the assets.
But simply put, we typically have built them in campuses, or approximate to a campus. And so we have the ability to grow and scale. And you don't need to, per se, future-proof it in the sense that you sell the right customer with the right application at the right center, and you're not going to put a large AI, or a cloud-oriented workload in a network data center. And so we have the ability to continue to sell. And our goal is looking for ways to augment those carrier hotels where we can.
So you mentioned Fabric. It's obviously not a very capital-intensive product. Just within that segment then, is it growing at kind of a steady pace? Or is there any reason to think that the growth rate around Fabric would either accelerate or decelerate?
Well, I think -- I don't think you should decelerate, but I think it is a steady rate, but we want to see it accelerate. And so that's part of our goal for '26.
Very good. Well, thanks for your time.
Thank you.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Equinix — Global Communications Infrastructure Conference
Equinix — Global Communications Infrastructure Conference
🎯 Kernbotschaft
- Kernaussage: CFO bestätigt Analyst Day-Story: hohes Investitionsprogramm (CapEx) für Wachstum, Fokus auf Umsatzwachstum und Margensteigerung bis 2029.
- Finanzrahmen: CapEx ~ $1 Mrd/Jahr, Gesamtinvestitionen $20–25 Mrd bis 2029; Zielmarge ≥52% bis 2029.
- Kapital: Finanzierung primär über Schulden und Eigenmittel; aktive Refinanzierung zur Senkung der Kosten.
🚀 Strategische Highlights
- Geografie: Starke Priorität USA, parallel Ausbau in Asien (Singapur, Malaysia, Indonesien, Indien, Philippinen, Thailand, Hongkong) und Europa; Emerging Markets geprüft.
- xScale: xScale (Hyperscaler‑Campusangebot) 2.0 startet in den USA; ein laufendes Projekt ~240 MW; weitere Großprojekte geplant (z. B. Atlanta).
- Produkt & Tech: Investitionen in AI/Analytics und CDIO (Chief Data & Information Officer) zur Kostensenkung; Fabric als wachsendes Netzwerkprodukt.
🆕 Neue Informationen
- Refinanzierung: Kürzliches Singapore-Finanzierungsinstrument ~USD 500 Mio Äquivalent zu 2,9% — deutlich unter der Analyst Day‑Annahme von 4,9%.
- Zeithorizont AI: Management sieht 2027 als Wendepunkt für inference‑Workloads; Equinix positioniert sich primär für Inference (nicht Training).
- Kapitalprüfung: Aktive Überprüfung der Kapitalstruktur; Partnerschaften (GIC, CPP, PGIM) als Hebel für Ausbau.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Nachfrage vs. Angebot: Analysten fragten nach Schwerpunkt Regionen; CFO betont starke Nachfrage, tatsächliche Begrenzung durch Kapazitätsaufbau (Supply‑Constraint).
- Wettbewerb xScale: Wie mit tiefer fremdfinanzierten Privaten konkurrieren? Antwort: Partnerschaften und Joint‑Ventures statt reiner Leverage‑Konkurrenz.
- Churn & Fabric: Fokus auf Reduktion der Abwanderung (Ziel ~2–2,5%); Fabric soll weiterhin wachsen, Management will Beschleunigung für 2026.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Kein Strategiewechsel — klare Bestätigung des Analyst Day: großes CapEx‑Programm, Ziel hoher Margen und gezielte Fremdfinanzierung. Positiv: niedrigere Refinanzierungskosten und frühe AI‑Referenzen (z. B. Groq). Risiken bleiben: Ausbau‑Tempo (Supply), Kundenbindung und Kapitalallokation.
Equinix — BofA Securities 2025 Global Real Estate Conference
1. Question Answer
Kick it off now it's 12:45. So I'm Mike Funk, I head up the telecom, comm infrastructure, comm software research here at the bank. So great to see you all again. Really happy to have Equinix with us once again for our Global REIT conference. So thank you, Stu. Thank you, Katie. So Stu is SVP of Global Real Estate at Equinix. Is that right?
Yes, that's correct.
And Katie is from Investor Relations. Katie does have disclaimers. She wanted to read quickly. Just to cover the basis, then we'll get right into the Q&A. So thank you, Katie.
Thanks, Michael, for having us. Some of what we may talk about today is forward-looking in nature, so please check out our SEC filings for all of our risk disclosures. Thank you.
Great. Thank you for that, Katie. Maybe to set the stage, Stu. What do you do on a day-to-day basis in Equinix? What is the Global Head of Real Estate do at Equinix?
Yes. Thanks, Mike. Just -- I've been with the company for almost 14 years now, largely with corporate development and real estate for the whole time. My previous role, just as a way to set it up to answer your question. My previous role was running all corporate development for our EMEA region and before that for the Americas region. And real estate was embedded inside those corporate development teams.
What our leadership team has done is carve out real estate specifically from corporate development, make it its own global organization and then asked me to run that globally. So day-to-day, we're looking at how we execute our Build Bolder strategy, which is really how do we locate land and power in the markets we need our customers want to be. And just given that's the building blocks of our product offering, it's really, really critical. So I manage the real estate teams. We're looking at these transactions from, I guess, Tokyo to Montreal and everywhere in between.
And I do want to come to the Build Bolder strategy later because there are a lot of questions about the strategy but also kind of the market and where the market is going today. So I'm going to put a pin in that for a minute and maybe start higher level.
A key theme right now for data centers is obviously the demand environment, power availability and what operators like yourself are seeing in the current state of the market, whether it's on the demand side, the ability to access power to meet that demand. So maybe to set the stage with your broader views on demand, power availability and how you're meeting that?
Yes. Look, demand signals are good. We just -- at our Q2 announcement, Katie can give you sort of the data specifically around that. But we closed over 4,100 deals over 3,300 individual customers, $345 billion of bookings. And so just from those numbers, I mean, you can tell the demand side has been really strong. We continue to get really strong demand signals from our customer base. We have 10,000-plus customers across all of our 3 regions. And so yes, we are still seeing very, very strong customer demand.
And then, Mike, you're asking how does that translate into the pursuit of land and power. Look, it's definitely a challenging environment, but we've been looking at a power first strategy for our land strategy for about 3 or 4 years now. And so really, we're looking at acquiring land and we're acquiring power and solutioning the land around the power, power being the key ingredient.
And look, I think the good thing is, we've been in business for a long time. We've been in these markets for a long time. We've got good relationships with individual municipalities, the individual power companies, they know us really well. And so we've been able to leverage those relationships and make sure that we're doing the right land deals in the right spots for our customers' growth.
And then another important piece recently been pricing and re-leasing. And at least in the hyperscale side, the wholesale side, we've seen very strong re-leasing spreads. Some carriers we're talking about, 10%-plus re-leasing, [ active ] is like about 5%. What are you seeing for pricing dynamics and colocation in the U.S. international?
Katie, do you want to take this one?
Yes, happy to. I'd say we continue to see a healthy and firm pricing environment as measured by our MRR per cabinet yield. So we're able to generate across the portfolio. I think when we take a lens of pricing, we're always very thoughtful in terms of approaching pricing with customers, just recognizing that we are the premium price provider in the marketplace, but feel like we have market permission to do so based on the superior value that we delivered to our customers.
But also recognizing it's not, for -- as Stu was just talking about, it's not getting easier to bring that capacity online. So we want to make sure we're earning an appropriate return on our capital in terms of how we're approaching pricing with customers.
And our xScale portfolio, those are generally longer leases, right? So we don't have as much re-leasing risk given our xScale program is not that old.
Okay. That makes a lot of sense. I think in recent probably 12 or 6 months, there's some question about where demand is flowing specifically on the hyperscale would be xScale for you. We're seeing builds from AI companies out in place like Lubbock, Texas and Kettering, Ohio or places like that, nontraditional data center market. So can you just talk a bit about why or if location is still important in data centers. That was really the hallmark of the Equinix business going back a long time.
Yes, for sure. Look, we continue to believe that Equinix is playing the best hand in the industry. We've been focused on location for a long time. We've been focused on interconnection-rich locations and really curating a broad portfolio of customers so that we can build an ecosystem that's got durable value, not just for our shareholders but also for the customers, right? They want to be close to other parts of the ecosystem, other customers want to interconnect with them. And so that's still going to be a focus of ours.
We've looked at our xScale business as additional to our retail business. And we don't see us getting out too far out of these core markets, so that we can still take advantage of our interconnection and really create that durable franchise going forward. So we might not be in Lubbock, Texas, for example, but we still want to be close to core markets where we can connect back easily to our ecosystems.
Foundation model training is the first step for AI and then there's been expectations that inference is going to pick up the slack or at least be additive, right, in terms of data center demand, I don't think we've seen that shift yet, but part of the investment thesis for Equinix was that given the quality and location of your data centers that you would capture a large portion of that inference demand. I think it's a more robust debate today, if that's true or where the inference is actually going to sit. Can you give us your current view on why Equinix is well positioned to capture inference? And then what indications that you might be seeing that would support that?
Yes, we'll give Katie chance as well after I'll say a couple of words. Look, it's early days in this adoption. We liken it to the cloud adoption, that happened a decade plus ago. Again, early days, but certainly, inference is what we're focused on. That largely is latency sensitive. Those applications need to be relatively close to the eyeballs. You saw a similar thing when it came to some of these connectivity nodes and cloud on-ramps with the cloud deployments.
Just as an example, we have over 35% of the cloud on-ramps in the markets that we're in, and we're clearly the #1 provider there. And we intend to do that same model, repeat that same model for AI inference. And the inference is going to be latency sensitive, no question about it. You've got to have these models perform for the end customer and for the end user. And so we think we're incredibly well positioned with our current portfolio and the portfolio we continue to develop to be successful.
Yes. I'd just add on Stu, when you think about the enterprise, particularly in terms of inferencing like every enterprise today, like if I ask all you guys in the room here to like raise your hand like everyone is using some form of like agenetic AI, but really, enterprises are still trying to figure out how to incorporate AI into their broader just operations overall. And so our customers and if you ask anyone on your sales team like they will tell you it's part of every sales conversation they're having today, like enterprise is trying to figure out okay, like what data do I need for AI? Is the data structured, properly cleaned, is it in the right form? And then like how can I incorporate that in my operations?
And the key question everyone is trying to answer is how I'm going to monetize or generate a return on this investment over the longer term. So feel like we can help customers with that and the attributes that we've built over the 27-year history of our ecosystems of the cloud on-ramps, the networks that reside inside of Equinix feels like that gives us the opportunity to pursue that -- to pursue.
Yes. The last thing I'll say on this, Mike, is that our global reach is a real differentiator for us, right? We're in 70-plus markets. If you look at the last place that I was in, was EMEA, we've got 30-plus markets there. GDPR is really important. Where the data resides is important. And a company like Equinix, we have a natural advantage because we've really invested in our global reach, right, and global sales team, and we can operate in all of the markets that our customers want us to be in. And we continue to push out that global reach.
So we continue to think location is really important. Our customers are still going to drive where we end up being. We've announced new locations in Manila recently as well. So we'll continue to push that global reach out. It's been a real differentiator for us.
Can you translate all of that for me into the income statement. So how demand from inference is going to drive accelerating top line growth or even accelerating AFFO growth in your existing facilities, your same-store growth, for example, your occupancy is relatively high, right? I don't think you've seen a lot of increase in price in those. So is it primarily through taking more price from inference customers. So that requires some churning of legacy customers. What is your capacity to add capacity to legacy facilities that are bringing in more power or space. So how do you, I guess, translate the inference demand that you're talking about into greater top line growth, AFFO growth in the existing facilities.
Yes. I'll let Katie jump on that first question. I'll come back to your how do we look at existing facilities?
Yes. I would say to start, thanks Stu. I would say, overall, when you think about the inferencing opportunities, it continue to add to the ecosystem overall. And so in many respects, like we see AI as another ecosystem to cultivate inside of the Equinix platform and making sure we're cultivating those highly magnetic customers in terms of their networking nodes or things of that nature inside of our facilities.
And part of -- and you heard from this -- from us at Analyst Day back in June is as you think about our Build Bolder strategy that we've talked about, really is in response to customer needs. And as Stu mentioned at the top, like we have such strong customer diversity that we're not beholden to just one technology trend. So, yes, AI is very top of mind and very exciting, but there's also broader digital transformation. There's hybrid and multi-cloud happening inside of our facilities. And so it's just a continuation of building out those ecosystems and customer deployments to making sure we have the capacity available across the portfolio when and where we need it.
Yes. And just on existing data centers, we spend 3-ish-percent of revenue on our existing data centers to improve them to replace aging equipment, about 1% of our CapEx goes to that. But really, we're focused on developing the next generation of data centers to further our AI strategy. It's going to require a lot of capacity. And certainly, you've seen us announce quite a big expansion into our CapEx program, about $3 billion to $5 billion, right, annually is what we've announced.
[ Annually ] correct?
No, in terms of the CapEx that we outlined at Analyst Day back in June, the $4 billion to $5 billion, it's roughly $3 billion to $4 billion per year of CapEx to support our retail business with about 80% of that going towards expanding and bringing on new capacity and then roughly about $1 billion per year of land purchases and pro rata share of contributions to the xScale joint ventures.
Which is about 20% only, right? So a lot of this is we are still seeing -- and I think the message you should take away here, Mike, is that we are still very bullish on our core value prop, which is retail colocation, right? A lot of that capital is going to our retail business. The primary share of that capital is going to our retail business, which we still see a ton of growth there.
Does this shift probably more to your primary role. How do you evaluate for site selection, procurement? How do you manage these different pieces of your role and then selecting a slight negotiation. How do you manage to make sure that you have enough equipment on the procurement side that your build times are on time? And how do you manage all that?
That's a great question. Look, let me highlight a couple of teams that don't report to me, but I work very closely with. One is the public policy team. They're great. They work hand-in-hand with the real estate team to create -- as well as the local leadership on the ground. We have great managing directors in every one of the countries that we're in. And we all work hand-in-hand to work with local authorities, to work with the local power providers to make sure we've got those really good relationships so that we can continue to grow in those markets.
And the other team I'd like to highlight is our procurement team. I think we've got 1.4 gigawatts under control of forward equipment, right? We're pre-buying cooling and power equipment so that we can continue to deliver these sites on time in a predictable way for our customers, which is really, really critical.
So I mean, look, it's never been more complex than right now. But I think Equinix has great talent that we've grown up in the business as well as folks coming in that really know how to operate in a complex environment, really scale the business. And things like our prebuy program have been great for us. Again, like having control over 1.4 gigawatts of capacity just in the kit you're going to deploy, I think, is a really powerful message. Anything to add Katie?
I would just add on to, we also have a pretty holistic power team. So thinking just about power availability to make sure we have the power needed across the portfolio. We also have a dedicated team thinking about our sustainability efforts and renewable energy coverage, recognizing is very important to our customers and the communities in which we operate. And we also have a team that's focused just solely on like our power purchasing as well. And so having just that in-house expertise that we've built out over the course of our 27-year history continues to be a differentiator for us.
It actually blends on to my next question, which was how far before you break ground, you have to actually secure power? I don't know if either one of you have a sense of the sequencing of the timing around securing power versus breaking ground of the facility?
That's a good question. I don't know if we'd look at it exactly that way, Mike, but let me go back to what I said earlier, which is we're securing power first. In some markets, you can secure power. Independent land, a lot of loan markets you cannot, right? So we're locating where the power is and then solutioning the land around that so that when we come out of the ground with a project, we have the power solutions already. And that's really, really critical for us before we start breaking ground for a foundation. We know where that power is coming from. We've got it secured and that we're coming out of the ground with a project that can be powered.
And can you just remind me how much power you've actually secured today? How much you have contracted?
I don't know if I've got that.
In terms of what we shared at Analyst Day is through from a utility procurement perspective, there's roughly 1 gigawatt secured and then another 2 gigawatts either applications in progress that we've submitted. And then the team is continuing to pursue other additional opportunities behind that.
Okay. And then Katie, you mentioned it earlier, and Equinix has always been at the forefront of alternative energy and trying to go down that path. Can you just remind me how much of your power you're currently getting from alternative sources? And then what your target is and how much of that you've actually contracted?
Yes. It's a good question, Mike. So in terms of power, typically, we are tied into the utility grids across the markets in which we operate. And as Stu mentioned, we operate in 70-plus markets around the world. So power availability and the availability of renewable energy is going to vary quite differently across each and every one of those markets. And so from a renewable energy perspective, we talked about in terms of coverage, just given that at the size and the scale in which we operate, if we put solar on our facilities, that's not going to cover the entire load of the building. And so we typically look for -- our preference is for virtual power purchase or power purchase agreements with either like solar or wind farms, we're adding additional green electrons to the grid.
Recognizing that, that might not be available in all the markets in which we operate, so we'll use a variety of other different mechanisms such as energy attribute certificates or RECs to meet that need. And then from a holistic just power availability standpoint, we do continue to take a long-term lens on like all different types of power across the portfolio in terms of what we're able to support. And so there have been a couple of instances that we've actually done self-generation across our portfolio to meet the needs of our customers. So it's kind of a tool in our toolkit in the event that we need it, whether that be natural gas turbines or fuel cells. So we have a variety of different options and continue to take a long-term lens in terms of looking at other power options as well.
And I'll say again, we stay very close to our national partners as well as local partners when it comes to this sort of thing. I mean, the governments around the world are looking at what are the alternatives to their current mix of power sources, including SMR and other things to help fuel the digital economy. Governments around the world don't want the grid or any capacity conscious to be the limitation, right, on their own digital transformation because look, it's not just competitive inside the country, but they are competing with other pool markets, right? And so even at the national level, there's multiple countries that we're working with that are looking at how do we change the narrative?
Do you think SMR is a viable short term solution? Most estimate probably 5 to 7 years before the cost analysis makes sense for SMR.
Yes. Look, I think there's some challenges with SMR for sure. I mean you've probably seen Katie talk about some of our announcements that we've made. It's just one of the technologies that we're following and are looking at. I think there's challenges around SMR. But I think it's really going to be a mix of those technologies, right, that are going to be the solution.
Well said, Stu.
There's been a perception in the market that Equinix being the leader by far for years in terms of quality of location and your customers would effectively accept whatever price was out there because they had to be an Equinix facility, right? And the perception is that maybe the customer service relationship management wasn't maintained the way that it could have been during that period of time and that you've lost some deals recently or maybe the customers didn't come to you because of that historic relationship and the perception, right or wrong. I think there was a recent management addition, right? I think Chief Revenue Officer, added.
But I think in part was to help rebuild the customer relationships and management. And if I'm right, can you just kind of tell me what you are doing maybe to change that interaction, the go-to-market with your customer and change that perception.
Do you want to start, Katie, I have some comments.
Perfect. I'll start. I will say we did have a recent new addition. So Shane Paladin joined us over December as our new Chief Revenue Officer, backfilling a role that our CEO, Adaire was actually wearing the interim hat, as interim CCRO. I would say, at Equinix, like we've always put the customer at the center of everything that we do and want to be long-term partners to our customers, and that continues to be like our guiding light as an organization.
I would say, as you think about our strategy that we outlined at Analyst Day, when we're talking about serve better to our customers, that's really making sure that we are delivering exactly what the customers are looking for and how we can be long-term partners and solution providers to our customers and having that holistic conversation with them of not just about their infrastructure needs today, but the infrastructure needs over the next 3, 5, 10 years plus and having that long-term customer relationship with them. Stum do you want to add on?
Yes. I'll just say like all of the execs on our leadership team, our C-level execs, the next row down like myself, SVPs, VPs in our company. we all meet with customers. I'm going to fly back home tonight to meet with the customer tomorrow morning. And I think that's really, really critical. So not just like our C-level execs, but guys like myself who are on the front end of the business who are candidly kind of far away from the sales motion, right, procuring land and working with the power team, et cetera.
But it's really important for all of us to hear what our customer needs are, where do they want to be? What value are they accreting out of Equinix? And so I would say like at least from my lens, Mike, like the customer is the most important thing. I go to customer meetings even in my job, you would think I'd just be kind of kicking dirt all day. But no, like I do customer meetings quite a bit to make sure that the whole company is really customer-focused and customer sensing. That's what I'd say about that.
And those conversations that you sit in, what's the common thread for what customers want from Equinix and where they're going?
Yes. Look, I think a big topic is new markets, like what new markets. Our customers want that global reach. They love the fact that we're global and they can have a conversation to us about Manila, right, or Joburg or wherever in some of the new markets that we've been in. The reason why we are going to those new markets because we're customer-led for those markets. And so a lot of the conversations I have is, hey, look, Equinix, this is where we need to be. Here's the application we want to put there. How can you help us, right?
And then it's really about like, okay, what does our entry into that market look like? Are we going to do greenfield there? Will we acquire a business in that market, et cetera? And then the other part of the customer conversation is around like what kind of deployments do they have? Who do they need to connect to? Where do they need to be relative to their existing data? How many milliseconds away? What is their latency requirement? And how does that interact with their existing deployments and their existing requirements?
And a little of a tangent here, but you touched on latency requirements. And in these conversations, do you see latency requirements increasing or decreasing? And then how does AI and then inference of the foundation models? How does it affect the latency needs of your customers?
Well, I'll say like more and more of the customers that we're seeing are saying, look, we need 3 or 4 locations. Let's just take Europe, that's where I last moved from. We need 3 or 4, 5-megawatt locations, and they need to be x milliseconds apart, right? That's a different conversation that we used to have, which was like, I need to be in Paris and Frankfurt with 250 kW. So that's really how the conversation has changed. They're seeing application level performance as the most important ingredient and how Equinix can really impact that.
And what are the applications and use cases? I don't know if it's about 10, 20 milliseconds of latency you're talking about, but what are the applications or use cases that are driving latency requirements to a lower number? Because historically, we thought silicon requires 10 milliseconds or less with things like autonomous driving, right? And maybe real-time 3D, things like that. Most of the applications, they could handle higher latency, right? So what are the applications that are driving your customers?
I think sometimes we can get lost in the AI over a little bit and what that means to Equinix. But look, we still handle billions and our customers still have millions and millions of digital payments, for example, right? Trading for New York City today. Trading is a huge part of our ecosystem here in the New York City metro area, right? So those kind of things are all very latency sensitive, right? I don't know, Katie, if any other examples come to mind.
No.
And then I wanted to shift to xScale for a second and what you think that the legacy Equinix portfolio or brand adds to the xScale portfolio, how bringing those 2 together maybe is greater than the sum of the parts.
Yes, for sure. I think that's really true. I think when we look at our Build Bolder program, we want to be doing things at a much larger scale. And part of that is co-developing. In my part of the business, there's no difference between xScale and retail, for example, right? My team is out there solutioning real estate and power for the entire portfolio. And so for us, it's really the ability to get some real scale out there, develop bold products for Equinix and be able to just become just a lot more efficient. But certainly, we've got our capital partners, right? So it doesn't sit on our balance sheet. And like Katie said, there's contributions that we make when we develop that into the JVs, et cetera.
And I think the market dynamic today, there's a view that the private operators, the builders operate at much higher leverage. Now it's off balance sheet for you, but some are operating at 10 or 15x net debt to EBITDA, right? And also maybe take more risk on where they're placing assets or just winning a higher percentage of these larger deals. So how does Equinix compete with that private company able to operate at higher leverage and maybe wanting to chase deals in the second and third tier markets, how do you compete with that? Maybe you don't. Maybe you feel your sweet spot isn't chasing the next big AI deal, maybe it's more leveraging your existing portfolio of customers.
So we're not out there like from that side of our business, trying to grab a bunch of market share and grow from an xScale perspective, right? We know that's not our core business. Our core business is what we're putting all of our capital in, which is kind of amazing if you think about it, like the capital numbers that Katie was talking about earlier that's going to our retail business, right? And so that still has a ton of growth to it. And so we're not relying to hit our growth targets merely on xScale and chasing those deals.
Yes. And I would just add, when you think about our xScale initiative, and we are certainly really excited about the xScale opportunity. When you look at our plans for xScale 1.0 and xScale 2.0 at full build-out. But as Stu noted, that when we think about xScale, it's really being able to have that full product continuum conversation with the various strategic subset of our customers and being able to service their needs on the retail side. So if they need a cloud on-ramp or a networking node, we can service that in the retail business. And then if they want to do something on a larger scale side when they say, hey, Equinix, we need 10, 15, 20-plus megawatts we can service them on the xScale side, but it really is very strategic subset of our customers and having that full product continuum to be able to give them with the right application in the right data center.
The reason we're in the xScale business is because it was a customer-led thing right? They want us to be there.
So there was command for it. Maybe they were asking you for...
Exactly right.
I'm going to open to the audience here in 1 minute, although Spector's team always has these Spector 3 questions that we ask each company, so I make sure I get those in for them. So first, either one of you, when the Fed starts to cut, do you expect borrowing rates for long-term debt to, and there's a multiple choice here, decline, stay flat or rise.
Give that one to Katie.
Put your macro hat on and...
I'll go with Option A, decline.
Decline, okay. The second question, Last year, the majority of companies stated they're ramping up spending on AI initiatives. How would you characterize your plans over this next year, higher, flat or lower.
I would say higher. We're absolutely incorporating AI into I know this is like multiple choice, sorry, into like our operations and just how we can become more efficient as an organization. So like a great example would be, we are leveraging AI to treat like digital twins of our data centers to help us [ manage ] the energy efficiency and just how we're deploying and looking at hotspots across the data center. So obviously, we are looking at ways to just continue to incorporate AI into our business overall. So I'd say higher.
Do you know who you're using for that? Is it Bentley Systems or Autodesk or I'm just curious from putting on software hat back on...
[indiscernible] Back to on it...
Exactly.
You're not the first person to ask us that.
Yes. It's full technology. Last one and then -- sorry, guys, you can jump in. Do you believe same-store NOI for your sector will be higher, lower or the same next year?
I think overall, we continue to see a healthy and firm pricing environment. So I would say -- I'll say higher.
Okay. So number one, thank you for entertaining me with that. And we have a few more minutes if there are any questions from the audience. I'll have to repeat them if you have any, please. No takers? Okay. Perfect. So let me just go ahead and just wrap it up with one more. Going back to Analyst Day, I think there was a little confusion just around some of the messaging and the impact from the higher interest expense, right? I think last quarter, there was some clarification offered around that. Can you give us the latest on that, Katie?
Yes, I would say -- thanks, Michael, for that. Yes, coming out of Analyst Day, I wanted to be responsive to the feedback that we heard from the Street. And so the Q2 earnings call in July was our opportunity to really update and provide you guys a little bit of clarity in terms of just the key questions that we've been getting. And so one of those was just our assumptions around interest expense. And as we noted on the Q2 call in July, embedded within the long-term outlook that we gave at Analyst Day, both for the refinancings and the incremental debt issuances, we're assuming that those are done at 4.9%. And that is a blended composite of continuing to access lower cost currency markets before returning to the U.S. capital markets.
Great. Thank you guys very much, and thank you all for attending once again.
Happy to be here.
Yes. Thank you, Stu. Thank you, Katie.
Thank you.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Equinix — BofA Securities 2025 Global Real Estate Conference
Equinix — BofA Securities 2025 Global Real Estate Conference
🎯 Kernbotschaft
- Takeaway: Equinix positioniert die "Build Bolder"-Strategie als power‑first, kundengetriebene Expansion: starker Fokus auf Retail‑Colocation (Hauptteil der Investitionen), globale Reichweite (70+ Märkte) und aktive Vorbereitung auf latency‑sensitives AI‑Inference; xScale bleibt ergänzend und selektiv.
⚡ Strategische Highlights
- Power‑first: Land wird um verfügbare Leistung herum gesichert; Management nennt ~1 GW Utility‑Beschaffungen gesichert und weitere ~2 GW in Antragstellung.
- CapEx‑Fokus: Analyst Day‑Rahmen $4–5 Mrd Gesamt; ~ $3–4 Mrd/Jahr für Retail‑CapEx, ~ $1 Mrd/Jahr für Land und xScale‑JV‑Beiträge; ~80% des Kapitals für Retail.
- Operative Absicherung: Vorabbeschaffungsprogramm für Infrastrukturkomponenten mit Kontrolle über ~1,4 GW an Equipment, um Bautermine planbar zu halten.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Konkretes: Klarstellung zur Zinsannahme in der Langfristplanung: Management rechnet bei Refinanzierungen und zusätzlicher Verschuldung mit ~4,9% blended. Keine neue Umsatz‑/AFFO‑Guidance; Fokus auf Umsetzung der Analyst Day‑Pläne.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Nachfrage & Pricing: Nachfrage bleibt stark; Pricing gemessen am MRR pro Cabinet als stabil/firm bestätigt. Diskussion über wie AI‑Inference Preis/Mix beeinflusst.
- AI & Latenz: Management sieht Inference als latency‑sensitiv, Vorteil durch Interconnection‑dichte; frühe Phase, aber Positionierung vorteilhaft.
- Risikofelder: Stromverfügbarkeit, Genehmigungen und Ausführungsrisiken sowie Wettbewerb durch hoch verschuldete Private‑Builder wurden thematisiert.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Für Aktionäre: Equinix setzt auf ein kapitalintensives, aber strategisch fokussiertes Wachstum mit starker Marktstellung in Interconnection und Retail‑Colocation. Positives Pricing und kundenseitige Nachfrage stützen Aussichten; der Wert hängt jedoch an erfolgreicher Strom‑Beschaffung, Genehmigungs‑/Bauausführung und den getroffenen Zins‑Annahmen.
Equinix — Goldman Sachs Communacopia + Technology Conference 2025
1. Question Answer
Okay. Good afternoon, everybody. Welcome to the Goldman Sachs Communacopia and Technology Conference. My name is Jim Schneider. I'm the data center analyst here at Goldman Sachs, and we're really happy to have Equinix here today. I'm joined by Steve Madden, VP of Global Technical Advisory, Equinix as well as Chip Newcom, Senior Director of Investor Relations. Welcome, guys. Thanks for being here.
Perfect.
Thanks for having us. Well, -- and quickly before I know you've got a lot of questions, just so we cover it from my legal team. Some of the things we're going to say here are forward-looking in nature. Please see our SEC disclosures for risks and uncertainties.
Very good. So we'd be remiss to start any place except AI. That's a key theme across the conference, but also a driver for your business. In your role as VP of Global Technical Advisory, you work with customers and partners to optimize their use of Equinix platforms. So you've got a bird's eye view to that. So maybe you start off by giving us some insight into how AI is shaping the customer conversations you're having and how that's evolved over time.
Okay. Yes. So I think that we've been on this journey of growing data, using data, doing machine learning, doing analytics, doing different things. And AI came along and kind of kicked all of that up a notch and accelerated the need to do more with data more quickly. And so a lot of our customers today, whether they're enterprises or providers, I deal with both, I'm either having a conversation with enterprises who are trying to explore the space, understand what this means to them, where do they get started? How do I get going in the cloud? Do I need infrastructure? Or I'm having conversations with new service providers and GP was the service provider. So how do they get into this business and where do they go? And I think that overall, a lot of what we saw in this trajectory is just being accelerated and amplified by AI, but a lot of what they're trying to do and solve has been challenges we've already had.
I mean given this intense focus on AI, can you give us an update on sort of the amount of AI workload demand you see within your data centers at Equinix and sort of how you're positioning the company to capture the growing demand for inference in particular?
Yes, I'll start, and I'll turn over to you. So I always thought why we set the context in that when a customer comes to us for the project, the project is going to require usually considerable infrastructure, connectivity, I need to manage data and have data ready and available in order to source and learn from it. I'm going to need potentially some GPUs or some AI accelerators. I'm also going to need other partners to consume models from. I'm going to be subscribing to data. I'm going to want to sell my data to people. It's actually a multi-location, multi-deployment discussion that we're having.
And yes, during that conversation, they might want to deploy GPUs in a particular location. So when we talk about AI and AI deployments, I get lost a little bit, do you mean large LLM training in particular facility? Or do you mean a project that's related to AI? So we have this conversation internally all the time. But I would say that all of our customers have it on their radar. Some of our customers are actively deploying in our infrastructure today. Some of them on the other end of the spectrum don't even have any plans to look at AI right now. It's just too far out for them. And I think that we're in a birds eye position that we start to see what the Peloton of the market are doing and where they're going with it, where the middle of the market is kind of sitting and exploring and where there's sort of this tail where nothing is really happening at all.
Yes. I mean I think to Steve's point, we are definitely seeing the leading edge in terms of what a lot of enterprises are doing. And certainly, there are specific verticals that are further along. So as we think about financial services and what customers are doing there, whether it's things around high-performance compute for capital markets or thinking about things like fraud detection. We've seen a lot of those use cases continue to proliferate and other places like within health care, thinking about a couple of health tech companies that are working on new drug discovery using artificial intelligence around some of their therapeutic data.
We're seeing both inferencing as well as training getting deployed into our data center. But the hard part is, to Steve's point, what is like a "AI deployment". In some cases, it actually can be relatively challenging to definitively say because, well, if it's an NVIDIA DGX pod at 120 kilowatts, clearly, that's AI. That one is easy to tag. But it might be networking associated with transiting data to a cloud service provider or a GPU as a service provider to start developing a model. It might be storage associated with what they're going to be doing within a data center, again, preparing for working with a third-party vendor.
So there can be a variety of different IT use cases going into an Equinix data center that may very well be associated with artificial intelligence, but it might just not be a DGX super pod where you're going to go and actually train something specific, which isn't to say we're not winning those too. We were the first company to be working. We had a press release with Block earlier this year where they were the first to deploy a GB200 stack within an Equinix data center for their own purposes for AI modeling. So we're definitely supporting that, but it's a snowball that is rolling downhill. It's not necessarily a massive avalanche yet.
Fair enough. I think at your Analyst Day, you noted that the mix of AI training versus inference is about 50-50 today that you're seeing. From your perspective, sort of how exactly does that manifest itself in the conversations you're having with partners and customers? And how the requirements from a facilities perspective change between the 2, if at all?
Yes. So for the first half, which is the inferencing -- sorry, the training part you said, the 50-50, you said for training. In a lot of cases, that's a group of enterprises or customers that have started exploring and built something or several things inside the cloud, but they have enough momentum now and enough demand internally, and they know they're going to need more of a consistent base infrastructure, they'll deploy their own DGX pods or their own infrastructure outside of cloud or cloud adjacent where they can start to see that more mature towards that's going to be where they're going to build a factory to start producing models.
And to the extent that Chip was just saying, there are certain industries where we see that more prevalent than not. On the inferencing side, it's a combination. And we sort of say inferencing is going to boom only because we're not -- when we say inferencing, we're not saying that enterprise is then going to take that model, deploy it at the edge and use it. Yes, they do, do that. But what we're actually seeing is those models are useful to multiple companies and not even just in their own industry, but also across industry. So yes, they go and deploy that model. They just start using it to make money or save money, but they also use it as a revenue stream and offer it to dozens of other companies to help them make money.
I'll give you an example. One company who is very much in terms of energy and energy tech built a model that helps building management systems be more efficient. So the building itself consumes less energy. They're smarter about how they turn things on, turn things off, but they keep everybody in the building happy. And that's like a very difficult thing to do, but it's real-time data, real-time analytics, real-time inferencing at the edge. How many companies do you think are interested in something that's going to save them 30% on energy in buildings?
Well, everybody with a building is going to care about that. But they don't want to all go and build a $100 million model. So instead, we're seeing a lot more of these models that are mature that solve a very horizontal use case are being deployed more prolifically and more availably today, whereas the bespoke sort of very proprietary models that are coming out for very fit-for-purpose occasions are coming a little bit more slowly. And so it is a bit of both. But I think that we're excited about everything being built in these factories is going to have to end up accessing and using and interacting with the physical world eventually. And it's going to be done at more horizontal scale than just the companies producing it, which is why we think inferencing is going to be so big.
Interesting. You cover a very diverse customer base. I'm kind of curious, -- are you seeing any kind of departure or difference between the technical and facility requirements for AI that you're seeing from hyperscale kind of customers versus ones you're seeing from enterprise?
Oh, yes. Well, hyperscale customers build everything at scale. It's kind of in the name. So they essentially design their own footprints and things for massive blocks of deployment chunks. Enterprises typically do the opposite. They really only want smaller footprints and they grow in different sort of chunk sizes. Where it crosses over with AI being the topic is certain infrastructure that either of them buy have particular requirements around density cooling and so forth, which I'm sure you all know. And so we need to make sure that when an enterprise is buying AI infrastructure specifically that's high density requirement, that we steer them to the right area of the campus or the metro that's designed for that.
So we have facilities already in all of our metro campuses that can accommodate those larger footprints. We work with them on which is it that they need to use. But we also have to have a conversation around what kind of cooling they want to use because there isn't a single standard yet. So there is a conversation to make sure we augment the environment to support that particular infrastructure, but we can do that. Whereas hyperscale, it's already kind of preplanned, predeployed, prebuilt into the infrastructure before we turn it over. I would just add that inferencing has a much lower requirement. So when I say inferencing at the edge, I'm not talking about needing massive megawatt cooling. It's much smaller and they're easier to accommodate in existing facilities.
And I'd add too, part of the genesis behind our Build Bolder strategy really is to what Steve was talking about, the amount of digital infrastructure that enterprises are looking to consume now, not just because of AI, but because of a diversity of different IT use cases. The deal that used to be 100 kilowatts is now 0.5 megawatt. And the deal that used to be 0.5 megawatt is now 1.5 megawatts.
And so part of what we're looking at is from a capacity perspective, given the demand that we're seeing and the demand signals we're seeing from our customers, we want to be building in advance of that because it takes us anywhere between 18 to 24 months to build the next facility or to build the next phase of the facility. And so recognizing that we need to be forward building in advance of the demand that we're seeing from customers, it's critically important for us to be able to be bringing capacity online.
Yes. From a constraint perspective, at the highest level, how do you see the next couple of years in terms of the industry and the power needs? I mean, are we going to run into a point where the industry just simply does not have enough power to accommodate all the data centers that are intended to be added? And how is that impacting the plans specifically for Equinix over the next 2 years?
Do you want to start?
Well, look, I think, one, the demand is robust. There's no doubt about that. And that's whether it's for providers like Equinix on the retail side, what we're trying to do on xScale side. And we're really trying to be able to serve the entire gamut of the data center industry. But the reality of it is there is constraints in the marketplace, whether that's power availability in the key metros where we're looking to operate, whether that's getting key mechanical and electrical.
And so a credit to our Chief Procurement Officer and her team, we've already got $600 million worth of capital equipment on our balance sheet to be able to help our forward builds. And so a big part of what we're doing is trying to lean in into our ability to forward procure into the fact that we've got a very large balance sheet to ensure that we're in a position to be able to build capacity. But I think part of what where we're differentiated is when we're thinking about building and bringing new supply online, we're looking to build it in major metropolitan areas.
So as you think about our Build Bolder strategy, the vast majority of our capital spend is going into those largest markets where we already generate over $100 million in revenue. So that's going into the Washington, D.C. type markets, into the London-type markets, into Tokyo. And these are markets where we've got large established ecosystems.
And so as we're thinking about power availability there, certainly that can be constraining. But we've been working through our corporate development efforts for years to make sure that we've got the land bank and the power bank so that we can continue to keep building. And also on the retail side of things, we consume our capacity in a much smaller way. We're not consuming in 50-megawatt, 100-megawatt chunks the way that you might with a hyperscaler. And so we're not necessarily having to go back and reload with the utility quite as frequently.
But I think the big difference, too, is that when our customers are coming to us for 0.5 megawatt, a megawatt, we can continue to keep building on a relatively consistent load ramp relative to when a hyperscaler puts out an RFP for 100 megawatts, they're then going to all of a sudden go out and talk to, we'll call it, 12 different vendors to see who will facilitate that. Those 12 vendors end up going to xyz grid operator and all of a sudden, it looks like there's a gigawatt and change worth of capacity needed when actually it's really 100 megawatts is the end demand need.
And so I think part of what we benefit from is that as we work with the utility operators, we've been very good consistent load ramp. We're the ones who we've got a high say-do ratio in terms of the actual load that we want to get and the load that we procure. And so as a result, we've been in a very good position to continue to drive our growth.
From a competitive standpoint, how do your technical capabilities and strategic partnerships sort of differentiate your AI offerings, especially when you're competing with some of the very larger competitive data center providers, ones that are private equity-based or otherwise?
There's 2 answers to that question. One is, in a lot of cases, when we're talking about AI deployments inside our retail business, our retail business is very ecosystem-centric. So when the enterprise comes in, all of the suppliers they want to use are all close partners of ours.
All the providers, GPU as a Service, model as a service, data service are already there, data management platforms, et cetera. And so it's really a matter of if I deploy this infrastructure, all the things I'm going to need to connect to wire up whatever it is I'm trying to do or even if I'm not sure what that is, it's going to change, it doesn't matter because everyone is here.
Whereas if you go to a wholesale location where there might be 4 or 5 customers in that whole building, you have to bring all that stuff with you or somehow get it to you. And so where the case is that it's more of a -- how do I exchange value, we're typically in the best position for that. If the requirement doesn't require that at all, I would start to ask why would you want to put it here then? If it doesn't require all of that, maybe you shouldn't put it in our data center.
And if it's really, I just want it nearby. So okay, it doesn't have to be in the central point where everybody connects, but I don't want to be too far away. Well, then we do have an aspect of our business where we do have capacity that we bring online, keep ready for that sort of thing. We call it sort of like a data hub adjacent where we can serve that capacity. But again, the proximity back into that infrastructure is really close. And so I just argue if the workload is either going to be revenue generating or the implications of cost is significantly lower because it's in proximity, you're going to want to put it here.
And if those things aren't true, and it really doesn't matter where it goes, we would advocate that you should just think of it that way and put it where it needs to go.
Yes. I mean that's almost why you hear us talk about almost like a mantra, this idea of right customer, right facility for the right outcome. And that's because, look, there's a real opportunity cost of our capital in the sense that data center capacity is scarce.
And so if we go out and sell a data center to an undifferentiated partner that's taking up half of the facility, well, that means that then we can't sell that to 50, 100 different customers, all of whom are going to interconnect with each other. And so as we think about how we're going to sell, we're very thoughtful in terms of trying to continue to curate these ecosystems. So seeding artificial intelligence and seeding all of the various different companies within that ecosystem, continuing to work with the hyperscalers, with the SaaS companies because as you think about our business, we're really a place where both buyers and sellers of digital services are coming together to connect to each other to enable the digital economy.
And we want to make sure that we're continuing to develop that within our facilities because, again, the secret sauce of our business, building a data center, that's not the secret sauce. If you've got a good general contractor, you can build a data center.
The secret sauce of our business is the ecosystems and interconnection. It's that 19% of our revenues. It's that 492,000 total interconnections that differentiates our business relative to others because that is how when you call me up on Zoom and you have to connect from Goldman's network to Zoom's network to our network and go across all the various different network service providers. Every single one of those is an exchange point of data where it has to go from one network to another, that happens in an Equinix data center.
So do you think it's fair to say the interconnect piece is still the most differentiated competitive advantage that you have? And do you think -- is that advantage increasing in importance or decreasing in importance as we move to AI?
Increasing.
I mean the amount of data, the amount of bandwidth connectivity, the amount of participants involved, the amount of people you want to exchange with, the amount of partners and providers you're subscribing from, the amount of people you want to sell it to are all just growing.
And it's physics, but it's not rocket science. If you've got massive amounts of data that need to be exchanged in the most efficient way possible, doing it in the same building on the same campus really is far more effective through volume throughput and cost than trying to run it across half the country. And so we're seeing that the density of population increasing is what's increasing the value of the facility.
Yes. And I think that's actually -- I love your -- it's physics, but not rocket science in the sense that the thing that hasn't changed with artificial intelligence is the speed of light. That has remained constant. And so latency is still a very real issue. And now for certain consumer applications, if you're going to be accessing an LLM on your phone, the latency of that doesn't necessarily matter in the sense that if you're paying a server in the middle of [indiscernible] that's okay because you to that server, 0.5 millisecond doesn't matter, a millisecond doesn't matter.
Relative to -- as you start thinking about the world of Agentic AI, where it's now machines talking to machines for things like building management or any number of other use cases, there, that latency becomes critically important because if you're connecting to multiple different data sources to be able to run a real-time inferencing at the edge deployment machine to machine, that needs to be in the major metro area where that application is going to be running.
Throughput. Volume of throughput goes up exponentially. Yes.
Fair. Maybe I'm going to shift to some technology questions. Power densities continue to climb. We've moved pretty quickly from 5 kilowatts to rack to 50 to now, I think some people are talking about 500 kilowatts per rack in the cases of NVIDIA's Rubin. So maybe what are the technical capabilities and limitations in your infrastructure for supporting these rather extreme demands? What advancements are being made to prepare for those future power cooling requirements?
Okay. Well, clearly, I think of it twofold. One is necessity is the mother of invention, right? And so when we didn't have customers showing up with 120-kilowatt cabinets, clearly, then the generic building infrastructure is fine. But when we started to see those requirements come in, we're already getting ready for growth and increasing kilowatt requirements, but extreme -- let's talk about extreme cases.
Well, then you actually deploy or build an area of the data center that's designed to handle that particular capability. You don't have to change the whole facility. You just change an area to cope for what that requirement is. And we've seen what those standards look like, and we got more familiarity around customers of what they're thinking deployed, what that looks like as a workload, how much more of that we think there's going to be. And we have designated areas to just take that under control and handle it.
I would also say the flip side is that there are chips and technologies and models and things coming out which require a fraction of the power of what we've seen before. So in a lot of cases, workloads are shifting to lower power alternatives that have the same performance, but don't have the same commitment to requirements. And so I think you're going to see a balance of both where we won't see it go up necessarily to 500 kilowatts of cabinet, but you will see it sort of start to normalize out a little bit, and you'll see this mix of what the technology types will change over time to a different mix of power thresholds and requirements. And that will also reduce the demand as well as improve the supply.
And going back to sort of what we were talking about earlier, this concept of right customer, right asset, right outcome, part of what we're doing is we're building new data centers is we are building to higher overall average power densities, but again, we're supporting a diversity of different IT workloads.
And despite what some vendors might tell you, the reality of it is the vast majority of IT workloads do not need to run on a GPU right now. Core networking infrastructure is still relatively low power density as is storage, as is any number of other applications.
And so when we're designing a facility, to Steve's point, we may have an individual data hall that is pre-provisioned for liquid cooling out of the box so that we're ready to go for a customer. But even as we're thinking about like take, for example, here in Silicon Valley, if you go to our Great Oaks campus down the way, down in South San Jose, our SV1 and SV5 assets, which are core networking assets, like as everyone is sending an e-mail or doing any Internet traffic here, it's probably either going through SV1, SV5 or SV8 here in the Valley. We're not going to put a super high-power density workloads in those facilities because that is for core networking infrastructure that is proverbially the beating heart of the Internet.
But what we will do is we're building other assets around that. So we'll have SV10 and 11, which are designed for more 5 to 6 kVA a cab. We're building SV18 across the road right now that's going to be north of 12 kilowatt a cabinet. And so depending on what the customer workload is, in theory, could we put a single cabinet at 0.5 megawatt in? Sure, it might be blowing like the sun, but you just have a roller skating rink around that basically.
Yes. As you think about expanding the footprint of your facilities sort of how do you balance growth in your sort of established interconnect markets with expansion into emerging regions? Are there any technical drivers that influence the international markets that you go into?
I'd say, certainly, as you look at our CapEx plans right now, north of 3/4 of our CapEx is going into our major markets. So those are the -- the 15-odd markets where we generate over $100 million in revenue. And so we're continuing to invest in those markets in large part because we see very consistent good fill rates. That's where a lot of our customers already are, and that's where they're continuing to grow.
Now part of our strategy is then to seed other markets so that they develop over time to hopefully become those $100 million-plus major markets. But there is an element of what drives us to go to new markets is largely speaking, our customers. I mean, case in point, we had been talking about getting into India for years and it had been a market that had been a target for our customers.
Well, it wasn't until we found both the right opportunity with the acquisition that we did a few years ago to get into and buy combined with getting a great leader locally that really then propelled us to get into that market. But most of our capital, as you think about our Analyst Day guide that we gave back in June, most of that's going to be going to our largest metros.
Yes. Okay. And then from a JV perspective, how do you think about -- are you shifting the way you consider what you do in a JV versus what you do on your own books these days based on any of these technical requirements? Or is it mainly driven by the kind of customers you're pursuing?
It's really driven by the kind of customers and the size of the deployments. So as you think about what we're trying to do in our xScale product, part of the reason why we set that up off balance sheet is, again, driven by the return profile that you're going to get when you're doing a hyperscale deal.
So if you're signing and filling up an entire data center, 30 to 60 megawatts going to a single customer, the return profile of that is completely different relative to the return profile that you're going to be getting in a retail colo facility.
And so as we think about our highest and best uses for our capital, that continues to be our retail colo facilities, where as you look last quarter, we generated a 26% cash-on-cash yield in the PP&E we invest, and we continue to underwrite projects we expect to be in the sort of mid-20s, around 25%. So we want to put as much of our capital to work on those assets as we can, recognizing that we still want to be able to support our largest customers, who are the hyperscalers.
And so being able to have a more capital-efficient way to do that, where we're putting in 20% to 25% equity. Our LP partners are putting in the balance of the equity. We can lever it differently. The benefit of xScale is it allows us to get a really attractive return on invested capital because of the fee income that we get and the leverage that we're taking, but do it in such a way where we're not swamping our balance sheet.
Interesting. And maybe -- and I think there's a lot of people who are interested in the supply chain dynamics here. So maybe give us an update on any long poles you're seeing in the tent at this point from a cost or procurement perspective? And are there any parts of that process that are getting easier? Or is everything just getting harder?
Well, I'd love to say it's getting easier. Unfortunately, given the demand profile, it's still relatively long. I mean, in some cases, you can be talking about several years to be able to get a generator for backup power. And I think credit to Ali Ruckteschler, our Chief Procurement Officer and her team, they had the foresight relatively early on in the pandemic to go out and start forward procuring for a lot of long lead items.
And so case in point, we've got $600 million worth of mechanical and electrical equipment that we've already prepurchased that's sitting on our balance sheet to be able to support our current CapEx plans for building our new data centers.
And so part of the benefit we have as one of the largest players in the space is we can very confidently use our balance sheet and lean into our plans where we've got 59 major projects underway around the world. And so we can very confidently go to xyz vendor and say, "Hey, we want to get this much of capacity. We know that we're going to be good for it because we've got all these projects that we're building" and then put it to highest and best uses.
Yes. And I think if you add the fact that we're so predictable and consistent with all of those suppliers, they're more likely to want to work with us because they know we're legitimate around what we do and we direct contracting.
Absolutely.
Yes. I just maybe close on a couple of different financial questions, if I could. Given everything we just said about sort of the exploding demand profile for data centers and everything else, I would have expected or most people would sort of assume that your utilization rates from a rack perspective are just kind of going to the moon.
But at least on the way it's disclosed, that's not the case in terms of like the overall utilization that you report. So maybe kind of give us some sense of the moving pieces that explain why utilization hasn't really gone like in the way that most people would have intuitively thought. And maybe what's the path to rightsizing that utilization trend? And are you seeing any kind of new disclosures that would help illuminate that from investors?
Yes. I think certainly, the one challenge, of course, is that utilization is a -- what a utilization is in a data center is a multidimensional metric in the sense that you've got the space capacity, you've got the power capacity and you've got the heating and cooling capacity. And with our cabinet equivalent metric, we're trying to sort of do all 3 in one metric.
But part of the challenge also is an averaging factor where as you look in our Tier 1 markets, we're actually relatively highly utilized. In our Tier 2 and Tier 3 markets, we actually have more capacity available because that tends to get consumed more slowly. And so part of what we're doing right now with Build Bolder is we are trying to rapidly build capacity in those larger markets because of the demand that we're seeing. But we're also then trying to be thoughtful to appropriately steer our capacity to the markets where we have capacity.
And so part of what the sales team is trained on is now going out to the customer and saying, "Hey, look, based off of all of your capacity needs, what you're looking for in terms of partners, what you're looking for from latency, have you considered these 3 markets?" Because look, anyone is going to be able to say, yes, I'd be happy to be in Ashburn data center capital of the world. But not every application actually needs to sit there. And so that's, again, part of this right facility, right outcome for the right reasons that we're going after is how do you steer to the elements of capacity, but then, again, continue to Build Bolder to bring capacity online in those constrained markets.
And there's the sawtooth.
Yes. And there's also a sawtoothing as well, where as we open up a new facility, inherently, that's going to tick down utilization and then you have to fill it back up and then tick down as you open up more capacity.
Yes. And I would also add that infrastructure is refreshing much faster than it used to. In a lot of cases, especially with the accelerators, every 2 years, there's this big bump in capacity performance. And that may or may not mean that they need fewer infrastructure from us to run the same workload or they double up. The technology is changing, too.
Fair enough. And then just finally, on the capital structure. I think at your Analyst Day, you expressed a preference for raising more incremental debt rather than equity going forward. But maybe talk about that in terms of the context of your overall preferred capital structure, how do you plan to measure sort of exert the various levers at your disposal, whether that's JVs, acquisitions, new builds and anything else?
Yes. I mean in terms of the outlook that we gave at our Analyst Day back in June, we did say our expectation is that in terms of funding our growth CapEx over the course of the next several years, that's going to be through a combination of our internal free cash flow generation after paying out our dividend, plus then moderately increasing our leverage.
So as Keith noted on stage, our expectation, again, back at our Analyst Day is we'll add about $8 billion of debt capital to the books over the course of the next several years through 2029. And we do have capacity to go as high as 4.5x net levered while still maintaining our current BBB+ investment-grade credit rating. And so we think that, that's the appropriate way to look at our capital structure. But again, relative to many of our peers, we actually have relatively modest levels of leverage.
But part of what we like about that is it gives us a lot of strategic flexibility where depending on as we see opportunities in the marketplace, whether it's M&A, whether it's leaning into Build Bolder even more, we have the strategic capacity to be able to lean into those types of opportunities.
Great. I think with that, we're almost out of time, but thank you both for being with us. We really appreciate it.
Great. Thanks, James. Thanks for having us.
Thanks for having us. Bye.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Equinix — Goldman Sachs Communacopia + Technology Conference 2025
Equinix — Goldman Sachs Communacopia + Technology Conference 2025
🎯 Kernbotschaft
- Kern: Equinix sieht sich als zentrales Rückgrat für die KI‑Adaption: steigende Nachfrage für Training und Inferenz, strategische Vorab‑Investitionen ("Build Bolder") in Kern‑Metropolen und Betonung des Interconnection‑Netzwerks als dauerhaftes Differenzierungsmerkmal.
🚀 Strategische Highlights
- Interconnection: Equinix betont die Bedeutung von direkten, lokalen Austauschpunkten für hohe Durchsatzraten und geringe Latenz; das Ökosystem aus Anbietern, GPU‑Services und Datenplattformen ist Wettbewerbsbarriere.
- Kapazitätsstrategie: Fokus auf Vorab‑Bau in großen Märkten (Washington, London, Tokio u. a.) statt flächendeckendem Ausbau; Kapazitätskuration nach "right customer, right facility".
- Produkt/Modelle: xScale ermöglicht hyperscaler‑Projekte kapitaleffizient (JV‑Struktur), Retail‑Colo bleibt mittelfristig höchste Renditequelle.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Vorab‑Beschaffung: Management nennt ~ $600 Mio. an mechanischer/elektrischer Ausrüstung, die bereits beschafft ist, um Lieferkettenengpässe zu entschärfen.
- AI‑Einsatz: Praxismix von Training und Inferenz sichtbar; Equinix dokumentiert konkrete Kunden‑Deployments (z. B. GB200‑Stack) und sieht Inferenz‑Angebote als wachstumsstarke, horizontale Umsatzquelle.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- AI‑Mix: Nachfrageprofile für Training vs. Inferenz und Unterschiede in Flächendichte, Kühlung und Standortwahl wurden intensiv diskutiert.
- Power & Supply: Power‑Verfügbarkeit, Kühlungslösungen und lange Beschaffungszeiten (Generatoren, M&E) als zentrale Engpässe; Build‑Bolder + Vorabkauf als Gegenmaßnahme.
- Auslastung & Kapital: Warum gemeldete Utilization‑Metriken nicht explosionsartig steigen; Erklärung: regionale Unterschiede, "sawtooth"‑Effekt beim Inbetriebnehmen neuer Halls; Kapitalmix favorisiert moderate Verschuldung vor Equity.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Equinix präsentiert sich als struktureller Gewinner der KI‑Welle dank starker Interconnection‑Plattform, gezieltem Vorab‑Ausbau in Kernmärkten und Kapitalstrategien (xScale/JVs, moderat höherer Hebel). Hauptrisiken bleiben Power/Supply‑Constraints und die operative Umsetzung hoher Dichten; für Aktionäre bedeutet das Chancen auf nachhaltiges Wachstum, aber weiterhin kapitalintensive Investitionszyklen.
Equinix — TD Cowen Communications Infrastructure Summit
1. Question Answer
All right. Good afternoon, everyone, and welcome to TD Cowen's 11th Annual Communications Infrastructure Summit. For those of you who don't know me, my name is Michael Elias, and I am the commentator analyst here. For this session, we're joined by Equinix. And from Equinix, we have Raouf Abdel, who's our EVP of Global Operations. This is structured as a fireside chat. We have about 40 minutes for it. I have a ton of questions prepared. This one, I will, I promise you. I will open it up for questions. But with that, Raouf, thank you so much for being here today. I really appreciate it.
Thank you, Michael. Thanks for having me. Great to be here.
My understanding is that you have something to say before we get started.
I do. Being a public company, we have to start with -- I'll be making some forward-looking statements, and please be sure to check our SEC filings for any factors that may impact those forward-looking statements.
All right. Perfect.
Get that out of the way.
Done.
These two over here snickering because they weren't part of public and now we're private. We don't have to say that.
All right. Well, let's jump into it. Raouf, you joined Equinix in 2012. But from my perspective, you've had a major impact on the company based on conversations that I've had with both current and prior Equinix executives. So for those who are less familiar with you, could you just give us an overview of your time at Equinix and a bit about your path to your current seat?
Well, thank you for the kind words. So this month, I will reach my 13-year anniversary with Equinix. For nostalgic reasons, I went back and looked a little bit at where was Equinix in 2012. And we were just under $2 billion in revenue. Our market cap was $10 billion. And so in the span of that 13 years, we've expanded and scaled and we're -- revenue is about 5x what we were back then. And our market cap is depending on which day you pick for the stock price and which -- a few months ago was about 9x, and it's more like 7.5x right now, but we'll get it back up to 9x, I think. So it's been an incredible ride.
I've got some former colleagues in the crowd, and they're familiar with the journey we've been on. And we've had -- we've scaled a lot. We've expanded our geographic presence. We've expanded our employee base. We've expanded our data center footprint, and it's been a great ride. And I've had the privilege to lead our global operations function for about the last 8 years of that. When I first joined the company, I ran the Americas operations. Some of you in the crowd may remember Charles Myers. He was the President of the Americas at the time, and he's the one that hired me. He and I go back to our Level 3 days together. So we've worked together prior to that.
And then I ran that for about 5 years. And when we say operations at Equinix, it's really about the build and operate portion of the data center. So it's design, it's construction. I currently have procurement, energy, which I'm sure we will get to at some point in this conversation. And I also have the team that runs the data centers day-to-day, maintaining the facilities and the sites as well as supporting our customers every day.
All right. Well, you've been -- from what you just said, you've been in the seating your current seat for a while. But I am curious, what are the strategic priorities for you right now and for the business over the near to medium term? And as part of that, I'm just curious, where are you spending most of your time these days?
Yes. I would say there's been a bit of a shift for both the company as well as me personally. I would say I used to spend more of my time on the operate side of things. And I think anybody that's in the data center space knows that you live on the stability of your service and your product and that was not something you ever wanted to have disruption in. Most of our customers have mission-critical deployments inside our data centers. And so maintaining reliability was always paramount and remains paramount for us. But my recent focus has gotten a lot more to be on the build side of things, partly because we're investing at a higher level and partly because that space has become a little bit more challenging, both from an energy -- securing energy standpoint as well as supply chain.
So I spend the majority of my time on talent, energy, supply chain, and the strategic mapping and planning of what capacity we're going to build where I think you've heard about the initiative that we call Build Bolder in the company. And so I lead that for the company in terms of the planning, the strategy, the investment profile and probably most importantly, like where are we going to go? Where are we going to build, at what levels, at what pace, and what throughput. And then underpinning all of that is how we're actually going to execute to do that build.
Then we're going to have -- this is going to be fun then. So I want to talk to you about something that we started out today talking about on stage, which is deal sizes, Particularly, we've seen enterprise deal sizes increase. We've also seen, obviously, on the hyperscale side, deal sizes increase. We're going to put aside rack densities for a second.
But as we think about your Build Bolder initiative, one of the things that I think underpins it is that, "hey, look, that your typical enterprise deal has gotten larger. And as part of that, the construction motion and the standard capacity that you build needs to grow in size in order to accommodate that larger deal." I'm curious in your time in the seat, how have enterprise deal sizes evolved? And as part of that, what were the changes that you made to your standard design in terms of the number of megawatts per building or per phase? How has that evolved?
Yes, absolutely. So in my time, all of those dimensions have increased over the years. When I first joined Equinix, we were building 10-megawatt buildings. That was at the time, a really big thing.
Those were big, yes.
We wouldn't dream of building a 10-megawatt data center today. We're in the 30 to 60 sort of range for any given building. And then we're clustering them together in campuses to build multi-hundred megawatt campuses. And so we very much historically in the retail space were building just-in-time inventory and being very frugal with the capital that we are investing, and we are also expanding in many, many locations simultaneously, so you couldn't sort of concentrate that investment in fewer locations.
And so we were managing that capacity in call it, 4- or 5-megawatt chunks. And what we've been finding over the course of the last few years is by the time we finished the phase, we were selling it out, we were starting the next phase. And so we've changed that model a bit so that it's more capital efficient. It's easier on our supply chain. It's easier on our -- the people that are the projects. And so we're moving away from the notion of it's going to be just in time because it's really hard to manage that way.
And in the days of building a 4- or 5-megawatt chunk, selling a 2-megawatt to a customer right out of the gate, you're almost out of capacity the day you finish. And so certainly, in our really high-demand markets, Ashburn, London, Frankfurt, Singapore, we're building 10, 20, 30-megawatt phases, and the buildings are bigger, too. And when we say bigger, this is always a confused point. When we say bigger, we don't mean the building is bigger. In fact, the building is smaller. What's bigger is the power. But what's interesting is you still need roughly the same amount of land because the infrastructure consumes more space now. But the core and shell is actually, if anything, shrinking because the density is going up, and so you pack more power into that particular building.
So if we're starting with the building size, it's a 10 now, we're talking 30 to 60. We'll get to the phases in a second. But to that last point that you made about the footprint shrinking, obviously, the average rack density that you're architecting these data centers to is increasing. So as part of that, how are you thinking about the standard rack density that you design the data center to currently? And I'm more curious, how does that compare to what we saw before the beginning of this AI demand boom? I'd say, let's call it, end of 2022, first quarter of 2023, how has that average rack density that you build to evolved?
I would say 5 years ago, we were thinking about 6 kW a cabinet. I would say even before the AI sort of change and dynamic, we had stepped that up to about maybe 8. And now we're thinking 12-plus on average. And I think the average is a really important point because not every cabinet is going to be 12 or even the big numbers that we hear about, the 100 to 150, those are going to be a portion of those cabinets. And so what we sort of designed for is an average and the capability to increase that average with more infrastructure as needed to future-proof for those data centers. What's also interesting is in today's data center design, the ability to support concentrated heat loads is much better than it used to be.
I'll give you a couple of simple examples of how to articulate that. So in the days where we used raised floor, it was much harder to deliver a concentrated amount of cooling capacity to a given cabinet. Well, we don't use raised floors anymore and the industry pretty much is away from it. And I would venture to say we pioneered that. But in addition to that, the way a data center is designed today is the room is one giant plenum, as we would call it. And so what that does is gives you the ability not to have to manage hotspots the same way. In the past, you had to be really careful where you put hotspots. And in the days of raised floor, you literally had to redirect air. Well, if the whole thing is a plenum, it completely changes how you manage cooling and the ability to have 20, 30 kW here and 5 or 10 right next to it and the room can be balanced a lot easier with the type of cooling design and infrastructure that we're putting in data centers these days.
When you say 12 kW per cabinet, the first thing that comes to mind is, well, when I think of the super high densities that you hear NVIDIA talk about, right, obviously, this is much lower. But then the next thing I think about is, well, you're much better off stranding shell than you are having no space in the data center and just like running out of power. So from my perspective, it's -- is the reason why you're building at 12 so that is because you still see there's plenty of opportunity in that, call it, 6 to 10, that's going to be the standard, but you have the ability to flex up and new cooling solutions have made it easier for you to be able to support those loads. Is that the right way to think about it?
Absolutely the right way. And I would say to add to that, we have to have the ability to flex. But as with any business, you don't want to over-deploy capital and you don't want to strand capital. So we don't want to build for 30 today and have that be stranded. The other important dimension to what you're describing is if we get to the point that we're having to support throw out big numbers, 70, 80, 100 kW per cab, you're immediately moving into the liquid cooling space. In which case, you aren't relying on that air distribution that's in that plenum, as I described it, you're moving into liquid cooling.
And the beauty of today's design is it still leverages the same chilled water loop. It just it takes it from the central plant into a unit that's going to deliver a liquid versus taking it to an air handler that's going to deliver air. So a lot of the same common infrastructure. It's all about how you manage and flex that central infrastructure. That's really going to be the challenge that we're all going to face in managing increased density.
I want to dig in on that with you, and we'll get to it in a little bit. But I like this. This is fun. But I did want to talk to you about the phases. You made the comment that you're changing the way that you're looking at phases. We talked about the build sizes increasing. We talked about how the densities are evolving. But as I think about the capacity delivery schedule for Equinix, I build my model based on the number of cabinets and those are the phases that you have for your sites. So how are you thinking about changing either the quantum of cabinets or the quantum of megawatts that you deliver in a single phase?
Yes. So I'll start by saying we always think about power. We think less about it's this number of cabinets because a given phase is going to have so much power that it's going to be able to support. And how many cabs you can fit in that is a function of the density of those cabs is just simple math. And so we're going to increase the size of any phase that we do from a power standpoint. And I would say even in medium-sized markets where demand may not be the same, we're going to be 10 or higher. And on the upper end, we're -- in Ashburn, for example, which is one of our highest demand locations, we're building at 50 in the retail space at a time now. There's no -- it wouldn't make any sense to do 10 in Ashburn.
One of the things that I think about it, and I'm going to put this to you because obviously, CapEx has come into focus, right, particularly after the Analyst Day. I want to take what you said and presented to you, and I'd love your thoughts. So the way I think about it is that we've seen enterprise deal sizes increase. And it feels like they've been increasing at an accelerating rate in the last year. So if you're building just-in-time inventory, well, you're going to have to flex up in terms of your builds in the future in order to be able to handle continued increases in deal sizes. But then there's a second, I'd call it a twin engine. There's another dynamic, which is that, look, we're seeing the hyperscalers start to scale inference, right?
And I think there's an expectation that there will be a hybrid cloud model or a hybrid model just like we saw with cloud. And you need to be positioned with capacity in order to service that demand when it comes, and those two things are driving your CapEx higher. Do you think that is a correct framework for thinking about the Build Bolder initiative and kind of the increase in CapEx that you're forecasting?
Absolutely. I mean, for us, it's about all of the above. We're not counting and banking on any one trend to be the sole reason that drives our capacity needs. Obviously, AI is going to play a factor. We think inferencing is probably likely to be our sweet spot. But we also see a lot of digital transformation happening across the enterprise broadly, and that's what's been leading up to the demand inflection that we're currently seeing for the larger footprint. I don't think AI is that prevalent in terms of infrastructure deployment today widely across the enterprise. But it's coming. And obviously, we want to be prepared for it, and we want to anticipate it. And so we're going to lean into that. But that's not the only use case or scenario that's driving demand today for sure.
Okay. I do want to -- I want to transition a little bit, talk about xScale, some of the hyperscale trends. My understanding is that you oversee both the retail as well as xScale construction. Is that -- do I have that right?
Correct.
Okay. What I'm curious about is, are there any big differences that you'd call out in terms of the construction management process or the go-to-market in terms of development aside from larger, higher density, right? Any differences that you'd call out in terms of the go-to-market for building that capacity?
I think the biggest -- there's two big differences. One is just the sheer size and scale of that project typically. And the second revolves around whether there's a customer in the equation at the time we're building it or not.
Okay.
And when there is a customer, it's a much more demanding program management challenge. And we're -- I think what you're poking at, and I can sort of read between the lines, it takes a different caliber of program management talent and capability to manage one of those projects versus a retail project, particularly with how we approached it in the past. However, those two lines are going to merge because we're going to build much bigger retail buildings and phases. And so everything is going to be larger scale, which means we have to increase our program management capability. And we're adding lots of talent, lots of people in our design and construction team to prepare and anticipate for that. And we're changing something we call gearing. And gearing for us is the ratio of program management people to the project.
We used to run it fairly lightly, and we're realizing that given today's complexity, I think this will resonate with most of the people in the room that are building. It is much harder to build today than, say, 5 years and much harder than 10 years ago. Everything about today is harder, getting equipment on time, failure rates, labor supply, productivity, permitting, regulation, design, everything about how we build today is harder than it used to be. And so for that reason as well as just we want to be on top of the programs in a tighter fashion, we're increasing everything about how we manage projects.
Where I wanted to go with this is, I'm curious, and I appreciate the answer in terms of, hey, on the retail side, the sizes are increasing, more akin to hyperscale, but then we're also seeing hyperscale. We weren't talking about gigawatt deals 2 years ago, right? So the whole continuum has moved up. I'm curious, as that dynamic plays out, do you think it's increasingly appropriate to maybe separate out those two functions and have like a dedicated hyperscale build team versus having a retail team?
Short answer is it depends on what layer of the organization you're talking about. And so what we do today and what we believe is the right answer, and that's not necessarily the answer for the ages, we'll keep evaluating is that the programmed teams are separate and dedicated per project. And we have a group of projects in any given location that have this dedicated team that's more capable as well as experienced with those types of projects on an ongoing basis because we don't build once we continue to build in any given market.
But as it comes up the tower of the organization, we think having it unified from a supply chain, from a contractor standpoint, from a planning standpoint, from a tool standpoint, from a sort of leadership and design perspective, we think it all still makes sense to merge at the upper layers of the organization. That doesn't mean you don't need unique capability on the ground, which is really where we're making the changes.
Okay. Perfect. For xScale, we've seen you move bigger scale, go into Atlanta. It seems like there are other markets on the horizon. Now that you're building these large hyperscale campuses, I'm curious how the engagement with the utility changes, right? Because when you're procuring 10 megawatts or 30 megawatts, it's one conversation. When you say 200, all of a sudden, it's a completely different world, right? So how has that go-to-market evolved?
Yes. We used to go plan where we wanted to build a data center, secure that land and then we'd make an application for that power. And when we were talking 10, 15 megawatts, it was a question of time and time was defined in a year or 2. But you could feel confident you get that power. Those days are gone for two reasons. One, we're no longer building in those increments. And two, the amount of power we need isn't sitting around on the grid. And so we are planning, and I think most people in the room that are doing data center development are ensuring you have clear line of sight to that power before you take down any land or plan any data center capacity. And that might mean a longer cycle, a longer planning horizon with the utility, and it may mean a different level of infrastructure.
And in the past, if you were taking down 10, 15 megawatts, you literally -- you basically had maybe a step-down transformer inside of your building and you had medium voltage delivered to your front door. It was connected to a transformer that maybe you owned, maybe the utility owned, and it was fairly straightforward. Today, if we go ask a utility for 100, 200, 300, 400, what you name the number, we're having to one plan differently. We're having to put different infrastructure in. We're building our own substations that we either own or we build and then turn over to the utility. And for the most part, we're connecting at the high transmission voltage level. So it's a very different proposition. And even then, we may not get utility grid fast enough. And therefore, we're looking at alternates such as on-site generation, either as a bridge or as the first phase and then wait for the utility for the second phase.
I think in today's world, you have to be super flexible, multipronged with your energy approach, and that's what we're trying to do. There's -- somebody asked me earlier in one of our private sessions is do you feel like you have it under control? And do you feel at ease with energy? And I was like, are you kidding? I don't think anyone can do it. There's not going to be a period. The same with supply chain, right? It's going to be hard work, grinding, managing. We've built a very large energy team within the company to do nothing but manage these various dimensions, variables, dynamics, changes is the -- I mean the days of I'm going to order something for utility and I'll wait 2 years and hopefully it arrives, forget it.
Yes, that doesn’t work.
We're structuring a special deal with that utility, and we're going to monitor every milestone along the way to ensure that in 2, 3 years, whatever the time horizon is, it's actually going to arrive. And if there are key milestones missed along the way, we're going to be engaging with the utility. And so it's going to take a whole different level of power planning and engagement and discussion. And public utility regulation is changing around. If you don't use it, you're going to lose it. And we're seeing that model emerge in a number of markets.
And so monitoring and keeping in close dialogue with the utility, so you understand what power they've actually allocated to you because there's -- you have to think about power, I guess, in the simplest of terms in two sort of relevant variables. One is the infrastructure that they brought to you has a capability to it, has a capacity to it. But there's power that sits behind that, that has to be managed by the utility. And if they're not planning for the infrastructure or to deliver the amount of power that's in that sort of connection, then you get out of balance really easily. And we've literally seen that.
And so you have to be in constant dialogue with the utility, "Hey, I've got a 20-megawatt connection. I'm using whatever, 12. Are you reserving the other 8 for me? Or here's my projection of when I'm going to ramp into that." So capacity planning for the utilities is no easy task these days. For the longest time, the utilities load look like this. And then with electrification coming to fruition, now they're seeing upticks that they have to get on top of from a planning and capacity standpoint.
I want to take what you just said, and let's take a step further. So as you think about the retail buildings that you're building, I appreciate that when you're doing 100, 200, 300-megawatt campuses on the hyperscale side, that's the conversation.
I want to touch on that point, but go ahead.
So one of the things that when we're talking about hyperscale, we hear mandatory minimum commits, clawbacks on power, cost and construction where you're -- to what you just said, you're putting the money up for either a transformer or maybe even some of the transmission upgrades. What I'm curious is, at the retail level, are you being required to do that in order to get the 60 megawatts of power in Northern Virginia? Because if the answer is yes, then that introduces obviously, a new set of questions, particularly if there are mandatory minimum commits involved.
The short answer is yes because of the increments you're talking about. So if you're building a 60-megawatt xScale or hyperscale facility or a 60-megawatt retail facility, the power dynamic to get power to that location is the same. The ramp-up might be a little different, but otherwise, the arrangement you make is one similar. This is actually a good segue to the point I wanted to make, which is if you look at what we're doing in Hampton, which I know you're very familiar with, that is a -- what we refer to as a hybrid location, which means we'll have retail and xScale in the same campus.
So we got 4 buildings to work with. The story of how those 4 buildings will be used is to be told yet. And we have complete flexibility. We may end up with 2 xScale, 2 retail. We may end up with 1 retail, 3 xScale or any scenario, any combination you can think of. We're maintaining complete flexibility with how we use that infrastructure.
So surprise, surprise. I was having trouble sleeping last night because I was excited about the conference. But one of the things I was thinking about is the Hampton site. And I was thinking, well, look, CapEx is obviously a focus for people. You have a JV partner that is funding, let's say, 80% or 75% in the new JV, 25% for you. Is there a world in which it actually makes sense from being capital light to lease capacity from -- that's built by xScale for use on the retail platform?
Yes. And that would be -- there are various scenarios out there. I'll paint the picture to the two most likely and easiest to wrap your head around. One is the entire property and the infrastructure and the buildings are owned and on the JV balance sheet, in which case, Equinix would lease a building or buildings. The other is when we go master plan, you'll see more of these cases coming, not to lead too much into it, but there's -- when we master plan a large campus, where we may buy a large plot of land, we may plan the upfront utility in a common way, then we may take that parcel and we may split it and some will be xScale on the JV books and some will be on Equinix's balance sheet. But master plan together, utility solution together and again, gives us utmost flexibility in terms of how we manage that and probably a little bit more capital efficient, too.
I mean that, to me, goes back to the core proposition or at least how I remember it being presented to me of xScale, which is that there is value in having the compute node sit on the same campus as the network node and the interplay between the two. It's like -- it's the same idea, just at a large campus scale is kind of how I'm interpreting it with some additive benefits of capital efficiency and you being able to have one go-to-market motion with the utility.
The utility, the supply chain, capacity management, all of those benefits would be there. The ability to attract more network providers to that campus. It just -- it's got the full networking effect proposition, the more we have multi-tenant data centers as well as hyperscale deployments all in that same general -- it's actually more operationally efficient, too.
One of the things we're looking hard at now is, okay, in this new world where I've got a campus that supports 240 megawatts, what does it take to run that? What is the operating model? How do we manage deliveries? How do we manage the infrastructure, how do we maintain it? For sure, I can't -- I'm not going to quote numbers, but for sure, the number of people needed on a unit basis is dramatically lower in that environment versus I've got a stand-alone 20-megawatt data center and the number of people needed to run that, again, on a unit basis is much more efficient.
Got it. I wanted to ask you, we've talked about Hampton. Have you secured power for that site?
We have. We have.
Okay. And is that from Georgia Power?
It's a -- so the way there's a co-op down there called EMC, I think is the acronym. And it's a regional player that fronts Georgia Power. And so it's a complex system down there, and people are going to run into this in numerous locations, the more you get out into the outskirt. But basically, they're the local distribution and what sits behind them are the transmission line and the generation. And there are three parties involved. You interface with the ultimate provider, which is EMC in this case, and they go and secure the transmission and the generation to deliver you that local power. So you strike a deal, but you have to be aware of what's happening behind that front line.
That's what I was going to ask is that my understanding is the cooperative, they don't procure a generator. They don't build generation.
They were building.
They rely on somebody else. Then the question becomes, do they have the power from Georgia Power?
Yes.
Okay. All right. That's great to hear.
We wouldn't do that deal if we didn't have confidence that the full system is...
Kudos. Okay. Cool. Now I want to transition in the time we have left. I want to talk about...
I think you misled the crowd. It's time for Q&A.
I'll ask one and then we'll do Q&A. All right. We'll make it fun. So here's my question for you. Rack densities continue to increase. One of the questions I get from investors is about the installed base of data centers. This came up in the enterprise panel earlier where we were talking about the potential need to retrofit. How do you think about that? And then I know that you've undertaken a project, I want to say this was 2 years ago to start getting your -- to get your existing sites ready to support liquid cooling. I also want to talk about that and how that has gone. So how do you think about retrofit? And then what are you doing in terms of supporting liquid cooling capabilities within the existing fleet of data centers?
Yes. So again, remember what liquid cooling is. It is taking the chilled water from a central plant and distributing it to it in a different way than just taking it to an area. And so the retrofit we're doing to enable liquid cooling is tapping into that chilled water system to extend it to offer liquid cooling. So literally, you have to just tap into that pipe. And as long as you have sufficient central plant capacity, then you can leverage that.
Now we can upgrade the central plant as necessary. But keep in mind, in the data center environment, broadly speaking, there is a lot of headroom in terms of what people buy and what they use. And so we're going to continue to push the boundary on what you can utilize. And in all the locations that we've described, we have spare chilled water central plant capacity to tap into. And if need be, we'll add more chillers, we'll add more, what have you, in cases where that's possible. But the retrofit isn't as dramatic as it sounds because we're just tapping into existing infrastructure and what we're really trying to do, and just to put it in context, is we're trying to monetize the pockets of space that aren't used. Most of these centers are fairly well occupied in the 80-plus percent range, right? So there are some pockets that...
Is that on a cabinet basis or on a square footage basis or on a power basis?
That is on a space basis.
On a square footage basis. Okay.
On a space basis. The power is actually lower than that because there's lots of headroom. People when -- the typical system is designed and engineered somebody is going to plan for, let's just say, I'm going to take down 100 kW. Well, I'm going to leave 20, 30, 40 kW of that for engineering headroom because engineers are conservative as well as growth. And so we monitor that trajectory and that load. And it's actually about half of what is consumed.
Okay. Well, I said I'd open up for questions. So any questions from the audience? Yes, please.
Thanks for the comments, Raouf. Great stuff. Curious, are you starting to see -- we're starting to see some of the utilities, Dominion, Oncore start these proceedings around large electrical loads, how they can impact the grid based on SAGs, based on the oscillation that we're seeing with these GPUs. And nothing's come out yet, but just wondering how you guys are thinking about that and how you guys are thinking about kind of incorporating that in terms of your offering and kind of protect yourself and all that stuff.
And just to be clear, that's -- you're talking about like load spiking with GPUs.
That's correct.
Okay. That was gonna be my next question, so thank you.
I think early days to understand how that's going to work in [indiscernible] whether if you had a center that's completely filled with that versus it's a blend of that plus other things and the load is somewhat stable and static. I think we're actually more worried about it down at the low -- the next level down at the UPS level because that's what's going to tie directly to that load. And so I think a lot of work is being done to evaluate how that's going to play out. And I'd say it's early days. I actually thought you were getting at a different dynamic, which is historically, what's happened is if you were going to take down a bunch of capacity off of the grid and incremental infrastructure was needed, the capital required to do that was spread across the rate base.
Well, I think what we're seeing more and more of is, well, that's not going to work. That's not going to fly. The rate base isn't going to just stand by for that. The PUC is not going to stand by for that. And so players in the data center space are going to have to step up to underwriting that infrastructure in various different ways, and that's playing out real time as well. So I think there's a lot of dynamic dimension to what's happening in the energy space right now, including how to manage the future world of spikes and variables and the like.
All right. Well, with that, I'm looking at the back of the room. It looks like we're out of time. Raouf, it was my pleasure.
Didn't leave time for Q&A.
I did. Finally, I did. Thank you very much, Raouf, for joining us.
And thank you very much, everyone, for being here.
Thank you. Thank you for that.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Equinix — TD Cowen Communications Infrastructure Summit
Equinix — TD Cowen Communications Infrastructure Summit
📣 Kernbotschaft
- Fokus: Equinix treibt das Programm "Build Bolder" voran: größere Phasen, höhere Rack-Dichten und stärkere Vorplanung statt „just-in-time“-Bauweise.
- Risiko/Chance: Höheres kurzfristiges CapEx und Komplexität (Energie, Zulieferkette, Personal) gegen bessere Kapital- und Skaleneffizienz auf Campus‑Ebene.
🎯 Strategische Highlights
- Skalierung: Standardgebäude haben sich von ~10 MW auf 30–60 MW verschoben; Phasen werden deutlich größer geplant (z.B. 50 MW in Ashburn für Retail/XScale).
- Campus‑Flexibilität: Master‑Planning und JV-Modelle (z.B. Hampton) erlauben Mischung aus Retail und xScale, Lease‑Optionen und gemeinsame Infrastruktur zur Kapitaloptimierung.
- Operative Stärke: Ausbau von Programm‑Management, Beschaffung, Energie‑Teams und „Gearing“ (mehr Ressourcen pro Projekt) zur Bewältigung steigender Komplexität.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Technik: Durchschnittliche Design‑Rackdichte steigt auf ~12 kW (früher 6–8 kW); sehr hohe Dichten bewegen in Richtung Flüssigkühlung.
- Hampton: Power für das Projekt ist gesichert über lokalen Versorger/Genossenschaft (EMC) mit Rückgriff auf Transmission/Erzeugung.
- Energieansatz: Multi‑pronged: eigene Umspannwerke, Anschluss auf Hochspannung, On‑Site‑Generation als Brücke möglich.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Lastspitzen (GPUs): Thema erkannt; Auswirkungen auf UPS/Netz sind noch in der Evaluierung — „early days“, mehr technische Analysen erforderlich.
- Retrofit & Liquid: Retrofit via Anbindung an zentrale Kaltwasser‑Infrastruktur möglich; viele Standorte haben zentrale Reservekapazität.
- Utility‑Risiko: Utilities verlangen zunehmend, dass Betreiber Infrastruktur mittragen; Regulierung und Underwriting verändern die Projektfinanzierung.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Bewertung: Investorensicht: kurzfristig höherer CapEx- und Ausführungsriskofokus; mittelfristig erwartete Effizienz- und Umsatzhebel durch größere Phasen, Campus‑Synergien und vorbereitetes Angebot für AI/Enterprise‑Demand — Execution bei Energie und Supply‑Chain bleibt kritischer Dreh- und Angelpunkt.
Equinix — KeyBanc Capital Markets Technology Leadership Forum
1. Question Answer
Good afternoon, everybody. My name is Brandon Nispel. I cover data centers and tower REITs for KeyBanc. Thank you for coming to the KeyBanc Technology Leadership Forum. This is a 25-minute fireside chat. We have Equinix with us. Tiffany Osias, Managing Director of xScale and Chip Newcom, Head of Investor Relations. Thank you both for being here.
Yes. Thanks for having us.
Thanks for having us.
Well, I'll do our quick disclaimer for everyone here and online. Some of the things we're going to say today are forward-looking in nature. Please see our SEC disclosures for any risks and uncertainties. So that out of the way, now we can actually talk to the fun stuff.
Great. Tiffany, I want to start with you. Managing Director of xScale. Sort of a new business for Equinix. Maybe level set us, what's your background? And what is xScale?
Yes. So my background, I've been at Equinix now for 9 years, and I actually came from our retail colocation business first. So those that know Equinix know that we have a couple of 1.5 decades history in global colocation services where we have data centers all around the world. And then, call it, 8 years ago or so, our largest, most strategic customers asked us to enter more of a wholesale space because they wanted to be able to -- for us to provide them much larger footprints. And that was the inception of xScale. So on the retail side, I think lots of customers, we have 10,000 customers. So lots of customers all occupying or colocating in the same building. Think on the xScale side, much fewer in number of customers and much bigger footprints.
What was attractive about sort of expanding into maybe more of the hyperscale customers that you couldn't address previously?
Yes. I mean the great part is that we were addressing those hyperscaler customers mostly from their network nodes. So Equinix has more than 35% of the global cloud on-ramps. So the hyperscalers were looking to Equinix to put in all those interconnectivity devices but hadn't been able to yet put their core nodes with us. And that's why we entered xScale about 8 years ago in EMEA and in Asia, in particular.
And I'd add to part of why we -- the genesis behind xScale was also about capital efficiency. And so the fact that within our retail business, we're targeting yields in roughly the 25% cash-on-cash ZIP code. xScale is different, but then when you add on leverage plus then the fee income that we get, it becomes a very attractive return for us and also in a capital-efficient manner.
Can you unpack sort of like where you stand today from an xScale standpoint? I know a lot of these assets sit in sort of a JV structure. Maybe help us understand what all of those JVs look like today.
Yes. So we have a handful -- over a handful of JVs operating today with capital partners, current capital partners of GIC, PGIM and now our newest CPPIB, where Equinix comes in with a 20% to 25% interest in the venture as a limited partner and then one of those other capital partners brings in the remainder of it. So as a 20% to 25% LP, we have equity investment and interest in it. And then the joint venture itself hires Equinix to then go run the venture, construct and operate and lease the actual asset as well.
And you've done different JVs, sometimes with the same JV partner. How do you look at sort of identifying different JV partners? Like what makes a good partner to you?
Well, I think it's like-minded companies who want long-term investments and want to help promote more digital infrastructure growth. That's what we've looked for historically.
Okay. Any consideration of like moving beyond sort of like just getting capital partners and more strategic partners? Do you view them as more strategic partners? Because you guys do a lot of the operations, right?
Yes. We do a lot of the operations, but they're also strategic partners. I mean, look, they're putting our trust, their trust in us. They're putting multibillions of dollars of capital to work, and they trust Equinix to go run these data centers appropriately. So they're still very strategic for us.
Okay. Let's talk about some of the developments around JVs and xScale. I think up until late last year, you primarily focused on xScale outside of the U.S. Late last year, you announced a $15 billion xScale JV in the U.S. Where are you with that?
Yes. So we're actively now -- we've announced one piece of land that we've closed on in Hampton, Georgia. We're actively looking at other campuses as well. But the ambition is to have a handful of multi-hundred megawatt campuses across the Americas region.
Okay. Multi-hundred megawatts. And how did you take sort of learnings from xScale 1.0 and bring it into xScale 2.0 into the Americas region.
Well, given that 1.0 is, call it, 8 years old, the densities and the size of the deployments were a bit smaller than where we are today. xScale 2.0, as I mentioned, they're going to be multi-hundred megawatt campuses and customers will be buying them in, call it, 30-plus megawatt deployments. where in 1.0, customers have the ability to go down to a couple of 5, 10, 15-megawatt deployments.
And is the -- when you develop a 100-megawatt facilities, is it one customer that's taking down that whole facility? Is it multiple customers? How do you sort of think about like pre-leasing some of those new facilities?
Yes, it could be either. It could be one customer could take down an entire campus or it could be that we end up with a multitude of customers.
And you've announced Atlanta, I think, as sort of your first campus. Where are you in terms of construction around that campus?
Yes. We're moving a lot of dirt around right now is what I would say. It's several hundred acres where we're leveling and flattening the land today. We have bulldozers pushing dirt every day and getting it pad ready.
Empower is committed to the pad.
Empower, we've been working with CEGMC, who's the regional utility that we're working with.
Okay. How do you think about sort of the development of other facilities across the U.S. Where does the land come from? Do you already have it in land bank and you're sort of trying to identify either the power and get all the permitting and zoning constructed? But where are you sort of on the other JVs?
Yes. Across all of our ventures, it's been a combination of either taking what we already had in land bank and contributing it into the venture to develop or it's going out and actively pursuing new parcels of land and then securing power for that. So we have both of those across all of the ventures.
And do you think about xScale in the U.S. as sort of like sticking to top markets? I know we've seen some deals with Bitcoin miners, right, that are doing 250-megawatt deals in the middle of North Dakota. What's the value of sticking to the top 10 markets versus move -- maybe moving beyond that?
Well, the way we think about it is generationally. We've already got a 27-year operational history at Equinix, and we plan to continue to be in this space for decades to come. So we're not thinking about meeting one trend in a moment in time. We're thinking about durability and creating a platform that can capture multiple trends over time. So if we think about that, a, we want durability. B is we have a flexible data center design that could capture AI training, AI inferencing, cloud or enterprise kinds of workloads. And if you're going to capture all of those workloads, you need to think about latency as well. So those top metros are still important to us. It doesn't mean we have to be in downtown Atlanta, like you're seeing play out here with this campus. We're about 40 miles away, but we're still staying very close to those metro centers because the interconnection back into Equinix is also really important for the success of xScale.
And Equinix has historically contributed assets into these JVs. What needs to happen to these assets that were probably traditional retail or enterprise facilities to turn them into an xScale property?
Yes. For those that we did historically, it was about having the right amount of capacity and the right kind of data hole that could be accommodated into a customer who needs that kind of space. Going forward, it will be a lot more about selecting the right kind of land that we would be able to develop on.
Okay. Yes. And I'd add, historically, the reason why we were contributing assets in as well is that we didn't want to slow down our momentum, right? And so even as we think about what we're doing right now, we would much rather go out and get started to be developing on our own balance sheet like we are right now, where we said at our most recent earnings call, we're spending about $450 million or we expect to this year on balance sheet for xScale but it's because we see the opportunity in the market, and we want to keep developing, recognizing at some point, we will move that into a JV and then get paid back for our spend.
And a lot of the -- is the development around hyperscale, is it more spec? Or do you have like an anchor tenant already sort of in mind for a facility?
Yes, we end up with both. We end up with both. We end up in a lot of instances where we do have an anchor tenant that has a start development, but we also have learned, having done this now for 8 years, that the closer that you are to a customer needing a service, the more important it is that you have it available on time. And many times, the price point has also increased at that point. So we do both.
As you've learned from sort of xScale 1.0 and move to 2.0, I would assume some designs and architectures of the buildings that you're constructing have changed. Can you help us understand like how you're designing the buildings today for the Americas JV versus what you might have done a couple of years ago? And maybe specifically focusing on like liquid cooling, power densities and just like overall resiliency of the facility?
Yes. I mean you've nailed on the things that are mattering most right now. So having such a long history with the hyperscalers and some of the other strategic SaaS operators that need this kind of capacity, we've been working with them for years on what their designs are going to look like. We do very regular design reviews, and we also go work with all the equipment manufacturers like NVIDIA and Dell and HPE and others.
So we know about when technology infrastructure is going to converge. Liquid cooling is certainly one of the big aspects of the design that's different right now in the new xScale 2.0 data centers across the Americas, they're coming up right away day 1 of having the ability to be air cooled in a narrow amount and liquid in a larger amount or the exact inverse of that, depending on where these customers are in their journey and transition to liquid cooling and then certainly density as well.
There's a great deal of flexibility from what we used to see in the, call it, 10 kilowatts per cabinet for these kinds of deployments all the way up to, call it, more than a megawatt per cabinet.
And what do you think of like construction time lines on -- let's talk about maybe Atlanta facility, but then establishing other facilities down the road?
Yes. I think first, it's about getting a pad ready, and that's a big part of the long component of construction is getting it ready for the first building. But then after that, you'd see the construction time line accelerate because you've done a lot of the upfront work that's required. So think like 18 to 24 months to get it pad ready and have the first building constructed. But then after that, you'd be able to see something pretty quickly.
Okay. Let's move on. How do you monetize xScale? I think that's one thing that I don't fully understand. What's sort of the monetization strategy of sort of the xScale buildings that you're constructing?
Yes. I mean there are 2 ways to think about that. One is when it's actually leased and a customer is in it and occupying it, the customer is paying for the service. That's one way you would monetize it.
Then that's like a recurring revenue stream.
That's right, exactly. We're an equity provider. So that -- it is unconsolidated revenue due to the 20% to 25% share we have. So that flows through in kind of another category for us on the equity side. I'm going to let Chip who's a smart one share everything that I didn't get right. The second area, as I mentioned before, is that the venture hires Equinix to design the data center, to construct the data center, to operate the data center to manage the JV and then to lease it. So there are fee structures that come in from the venture as well. Some are nonrecurring and some are monthly recurring.
Yes. So in terms of right now, largely what you're seeing flow through our P&L, we get the recurring revenue fees for the fact that we're the books and record keeper. It's all of our employees who are actually running the data centers themselves. And so that's a small but growing portion of our recurring revenues. And then the bigger lumpier part is going to be the nonrecurring fees.
So it's going to be those design and construction fees, the sales and marketing fees as we actually lease the facilities. And so right now, historically, the total fee streams we've been getting has been somewhere in the ZIP code between 1% to 2% of revenues in a given year.
That will ebb and flow depending primarily on the leasing volumes that we're doing. But then the other part, as Tiffany mentioned, is as we then start stabilizing the assets, then you'll start seeing the profitability flowing through sort of below the line as the profits from joint ventures. The last element is, as we think about liquidity at some point, there then is also the opportunity for a promote. Nothing that we've done as of yet since we haven't monetized or our partners haven't monetized any of the assets thus far, but that is something that will be an opportunity as we look to -- or as our partners look to monetize in the future.
When we think about sort of the long-term monetization, you guys updated us in terms of guidance from an xScale perspective. Does that include the Americas JV? And like how should we think about the Americas JV specifically towards that sort of revenue, AFFO contribution?
So in terms of the guidance that we provided at our Analyst Day in late June, that incorporated our assumptions around our Hampton campus, but we hadn't included any of the assumptions as of yet around incremental land plots that will eventually push into the joint ventures.
Okay. What would you say that Atlanta campus is of the sort of bigger picture JV in the U.S.
It's a 240-megawatt campus. And if you figure the JV itself is going to be about $15 billion, and it costs somewhere between right now, $10 million to $12 million a megawatt to build, that's something less than 1/4 in terms of the potential total build-out of the joint venture.
And then when you say promote, that's somebody else coming and taking an ownership stake in the assets.
Yes, that would be our LPs going and selling off their portion or their stake in the joint venture. And depending on the return profile that they get, we can potentially get a promote on that.
Got it. Can we talk about competition? It seems like everybody is building data centers these days. How do you think about sort of the competitive landscape for building and developing some of these type of assets?
Well, look, anyone who's been in this space for a while knows building and constructing and operating a data center is hard business. It's a really hard thing to do. And we've got a long track record of being able to do this. Other folks might be entering it for one specific purpose. We are in the data center space for a multitude of purposes. We have 10,000 customers, as I mentioned, across all of the Equinix portfolio. So we don't get too distracted about that. I love the term that you share though. I'm going to ask you to do it here.
Yes. I mean part of what we're seeing in the marketplace, too, and we've joked about this internally, but there is an element of braggawatts right now in terms of everyone saying, well, I'm going to build a gigawatt and I'm going to build a 5 gigawatts. The simple fact is that as you think about a gigawatt, again, if you're building at $10 million a megawatt, that's $10 billion of capital that you have to put to work.
And so what we're seeing even with some of the hyperscalers now going out and potentially thinking about monetizing part of their facilities or bringing in joint venture partners is that's a lot of money running after that. And not only do you have to have a lot of capital to build data centers, but you also then have to have power. You have to have all the mechanical and electrical to do that. And so to Tiffany's point, we've got a very long track record, and we're working not only about thinking about securing power for xScale, but for retail, but we're also then going out and working with the critical component manufacturers so that we're not going to have to be waiting for a generator for a crack unit, for static transfer switch.
We've already got roughly $600 million worth of that MAP warehoused on our balance sheet. And the beauty of the combination of our industry-leading retail business plus xScale is it gives us that much more relevance to all of our vendors where we can very confidently say, hey, we're a BBB+ tenant credit. We can go and sign on the dotted line and say we're going to be good for it and then put all of that equipment to its highest and best uses, whether that be for retail or for xScale.
If we just were to take a step back, how do you sort of look at that overall competitive dynamic? Because you got private equity money, you got self-build, right? There's all these nontraditional data centers like the Bitcoin miners. How do you take a step back and like frame the overall size of that opportunity for us. And then maybe another way to phrase it is like where are we on the AI build-out?
Well, maybe one way to think about that is this. So if we took all of the capacity that Equinix is building right now across both retail and xScale, if we offered that up to one hyperscaler, just one, not the 12-, 15-odd hyperscalers plus the long tail of SaaS vendors, that still wouldn't see shape their needs for a single year. That's how much demand there is out there in the market. So there is very much a rising tide lifts all boats.
Now I think the important part for us to what Tiffany was talking about earlier is we're looking to build generational assets that are going to be operating for the next 30-plus years. And so we're not necessarily going to look to build just for any old operator in any old part of the world. We're thinking about what is going to be the durability of these assets and how can we offer a differentiated type of offering and service for our customers. So I'd say that's what -- again, long-winded way of saying a huge amount of opportunity out there right now, but we're going to be highly focused in terms of how we want to pursue that opportunity. Anything else you'd add?
No. Great..
Tiffany, I wanted to ask you because you came from the retail side of the world. Now you're in the xScale side of the world. How do you sort of go about creating synergies between the 2 businesses? How do you sort of see them fitting together?
Yes. Look, every customer we have hyperscale down to enterprise SaaS operators, they all have distributed architectures. They all have a different need, a different workload need or application or use case need for what they're trying to solve. And now when you have xScale plus retail plus our interconnection business, we can take these really complicated distributed networks and make them very easy for customers. And that's the value that Equinix provides with having retail up to xScale.
Is there like a pull like -- so for example, if you're going to develop that Atlanta hyperscale facility, is there a pull towards more enterprise in that -- in sort of your retail business in that facility? It's probably not enough data to see that, but would you expect that to be something that happens?
I expect in our xScale campus that we will have interest from hyperscale kinds of customers, SaaS operators as well as large enterprise organizations. I expect that we'll see demand from each of those segments.
And you've actually seen historically, we've built both together. So as you look at with what we've done in Europe, whether it's in a Frankfurt or in a Paris or in a Dublin, generally speaking, our xScale campus will be either in relative proximity or in some cases, directly next to our retail facilities. And so that gives us the ability to, again, operate across both sides of the coin.
Got it. We have a few minutes left. I'd ask the audience for questions, if that's okay.
Yes.
Go back to the power supply. How much of a gating factor are utilities going forward here? Do we talk about grid modernization, utilities can't get gas turbines for a couple of years from GE Vernova. So how do you guys get the power, right? Does that smooth the cycle out? Because it seems like there's a lot of supply going, as Brandon said, a lot of demand. But does the power supply become a gating factor? And how much does it push things to the right when you're building?
Yes, I would start with power is certainly a challenge right now. One is we operate in different jurisdictions. So supply is different in each jurisdiction is one thing I would say. In those that certainly have challenges, we have all of the above kind of strategy to power. So take what we can from the grid.
We're also doing some on-site power generation as well. We have a turbine in Dublin. We have fuel cells in some of our locations. So we're looking at different power options depending on where we are. And in some instances, we might need to do our own on-site power generation to bridge what the utility is able to provide us.
Yes. And I'd add to part of -- even as we think about some of our sustainability efforts, being that bridge, we can also then be helping as some of the grids are transitioning. So case in point in Dublin, where some of our xScale facilities are running on gas turbines.
Well, at some point, we do want to connect into the grid. But as they're trying to transition to more renewables in the Irish grid, we can then become a swing demand provider so that if the wind is not blowing or the sun is not shining, we'll then turn on our turbines or back and forth. So we're thinking holistically not just about our own position, but also how do we fit within the broader grid.
Other questions. Do you have a preferred sort of alternative power to use nuclear? You mentioned nat gas and wind and solar. Is there a preferred sort of alternative power besides grid power?
I think the best power you can get are green electrons. And the best way you could get that is right from the grid. That would be the first choice. And then as you start to move down, it's how much renewable energy can you get and where -- or not even necessarily renewable, but clean energy because you mentioned nuclear, like we'll take whatever clean energy we can get.
That would be the first choice. And then after that, it's taking whatever energy you can get from the grid that isn't necessarily clean and then using things like PPA, where we have PPAs all around the world to help as well.
And as you can appreciate, too, we're talking to just about anyone and everyone. And so whether we're thinking about traditional energy sources or even some of the new start-ups out there, someone like an Okla, where we have been working with them. We actually have a reservation for one of their first generators whenever that gets up and running on an SMR side of things. And so we're taking really an all-of-the-above approach.
Got it. Yes, question.
On the same topic of our availability, have you ever turned down a location that was otherwise and effective opportunity because of our unavailability?
Well, what we look at is the time horizon. Typically, power isn't available for a period of time. So it really depends on for what horizon are we buying it. There are plenty of instances where we have a very vast land bank at Equinix, and many of that will buy land knowing that power is going to come in 3, 5 or 8 years, which is perfectly acceptable as well.
Yes. And I'd add, too, there are differences between what we might be doing on xScale relative to what we're doing in retail because in retail, you might put up a single building, and that will give you capacity for 2 to 3 years in some cases.
Relative to an xScale, if you're signing an entire building up with a single customer, then you're sold and you need to move on to the next opportunity in terms of power. Also, the consumption, if you're doing a 30-megawatt build or 30-megawatt phase and you do 2 phases, will very quickly consume that capacity. So it will vary depending on xScale versus retail.
Just to finish out, in closing, I suppose you have a number of JVs in place. You're expanding them rapidly. How do you sort of help investors understand what xScale means to Equinix over the next 5 years? Like what's the opportunity?
Well, I think first and foremost, as we talked at our Analyst Day, xScale is a huge growth opportunity for us. And really, what we're doing in terms of the context of Build Boulder is investing across the entire continuum of digital infrastructure, recognizing that we will have customers who need to have a single cabinet in a shared cage environment like our Secure Cab Express product all the way up to xScale, where we're going to be selling 30, 60 megawatts, even in some cases, potentially entire campuses. And so there really is this broad market opportunity for digital infrastructure. But as it relates to xScale, Tiffany, anything you'd add?
I would add that just like you're seeing the growth for Equinix, you will see growth for xScale. We have that ambition across and interconnection, all 3 levers of the business.
Got it. With that, I think we're out of time. So everybody, thank you for being here. Tiffany, Chip.
Thanks, Brandon.
Thanks for having us.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Equinix — KeyBanc Capital Markets Technology Leadership Forum
Equinix — KeyBanc Capital Markets Technology Leadership Forum
🎯 Kernbotschaft
- Kern: xScale ist für Equinix ein skalierbarer Wachstumshebel: großflächige Wholesale‑Rechenzentrums‑Campus (multi‑hundert Megawatt) über Joint Ventures mit Finanzpartnern, kombiniert mit Gebühren für Bau/Management und späterem Gewinnanteil aus den JVs.
⚡ Strategische Highlights
- JV‑Struktur: Equinix hält typischerweise 20–25% als Limited Partner; Kapitalpartner sind u.a. GIC, PGIM und CPPIB; Equinix übernimmt Bau, Betrieb und Leasing.
- US‑Expansion: $15 Mrd. US‑JV angekündigt; erstes Grundstück in Hampton/Atlanta (240 MW Campus) — Ziel: mehrere multi‑hundert MW‑Standorte in Amerika.
- Technik & Flex: Neues Design für hohe Leistungsdichten und Liquid‑Cooling‑Fähigkeit; Kunden kaufen typ. 30+ MW‑Phasen, Architektur für AI‑Training und -Inference vorgesehen.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Guidance‑Scope: Analyst‑Day‑Guidance berücksichtigte das Hampton‑Campus, aber nicht zusätzliche Landparzellen; weitere Flächen sollen nach und nach in JVs eingebracht werden.
- Finanzen & Ressourcen: Equinix plant ~ $450 Mio. Balance‑Sheet‑Investitionen für xScale in diesem Jahr; historisch fließen Fee‑Einnahmen von ~1–2% des Umsatzes; MAP‑Ausrüstung ~ $600 Mio. auf Lager.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Power‑Risiko: Versorgung ist ein Limitierfaktor; Strategie: Netzanschluss, on‑site‑Erzeugung (Turbinen, Brennstoffzellen), PPAs und Reservierungen für SMR‑Generatoren zur Absicherung.
- Konkurrenz & Kapital: Markt sehr groß, aber hohe Kapital‑ und Leistungsanforderungen (Braggawatts); Equinix betont operativen Track‑Record, Lieferketten‑Vorteile und Vendor‑Commitments.
🟦 Bottom Line
- Fazit: Das Gespräch bestätigt xScale als strategischen, kapitalintensiven Wachstumsbereich mit klarer JV‑Monetarisierung (Fees + Equity‑Profite). Kurzfristig sind Leistungsbereitstellung und Netzinfrastruktur die Engpässe; für Aktionäre bedeutet das wachstumsstarke, aber phasenweise kapitalgebundene Erträge mit späteren Upside‑Optionen durch JV‑Monetarisierungen.
Equinix — Q2 2025 Earnings Call
1. Management Discussion
Good afternoon, and welcome to the Equinix Second Quarter Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Also today's conference is being recorded. If anyone has any objections, please disconnect at this time.
I'd now like to turn the call over to Mr. Chip Newcom, Senior Director of Investor Relations. You may begin.
Good afternoon, and welcome to today's conference call.
Before we get started, I would like to remind everyone that some of the statements that we will be making today are forward-looking in nature and involve risks and uncertainties. Actual results may vary significantly from those statements and may be affected by the risks we've identified in today's press release as well as those identified in our filings with the SEC, including our most recent Form 10-K filed February 12, 2025, and our most recent Form 10-Q. Equinix assumes no obligation and does not intend to update or comment on forward-looking statements made on this call.
In addition, in light of Regulation Fair Disclosure, it is Equinix's policy not to comment on its financial guidance during the quarter unless it's done through an explicit public disclosure.
On today's conference call, we will provide non-GAAP measures. We provide a reconciliation of those measures to the most directly comparable GAAP measures and a list of the reasons why the company uses these measures in today's press release on the Equinix Investor Relations page at www.equinix.com.
We've made available on the IR page of our website a presentation designed to accompany this discussion, along with certain supplemental financial information and other data. We would also like to remind you that we post important information about Equinix on the IR page from time to time and encourage you to check our website regularly for the most current available information.
With us today are Adaire Fox-Martin, Equinix' CEO and President; and Keith Taylor, Chief Financial Officer. Following our prepared remarks, we will be taking questions from sell-side analysts.
At this time, I'll turn the call over to Adaire.
Thank you, Chip. Hello, everyone. Good afternoon and a warm welcome to our earnings call for the second quarter 2025. Our Q2 results demonstrate that our strategy is meeting the opportunity. This is evidenced not only by strong financial metrics, but also by our continued customer momentum and strong delivery in key areas of our business.
By way of highlights. First, from a financial perspective, the Equinix team delivered. In Q2, our revenues, adjusted EBITDA and AFFO were all in line with or better than expectations. This performance was underpinned by strong recurring revenue growth and solid operating flow-through, resulting in adjusted EBITDA margins hitting 50%. Second, our relevance to existing and new customers continues to deepen. In Q2, we closed 4,100 deals across more than 3,300 customers, resulting in $345 million of annualized gross bookings for the quarter, a new metric that we disclosed at Analyst Day. Our teams delivered this performance through strong small- and medium-sized deal activity with a notable uptick in inter and intra region sales, all whilst maintaining favorable pricing across deal sizes.
Third, our performance translated into solid nonfinancial results with substantial net interconnection additions, solid cabinets billing led by the Americas and strong MRR per cabinet yields. Our diverse interconnected ecosystems continue to drive industry-leading returns as seen in the performance of our stabilized asset portfolio.
Now before we take a closer look at Q2, I want to focus for a moment on our long-term vision. It was a pleasure to connect with many of you at our Analyst Day last month. At that time, we outlined the opportunities we see in the market across AI, hybrid and multi-cloud and networking. We presented this strategy we have defined to unlock these opportunities and against which we are already rapidly executing. And we shared important financial guidance for the next 5 years.
Since Analyst Day, we have had a fruitful dialogue with many of our shareholders and analysts to listen to your feedback and to answer your questions. With those conversations in mind, I would like to offer some key points of clarity on the Build Bolder component of our strategy, whilst Keith will provide additional commentary on the long-term financial outlook in his remarks.
First, as outlined on Slide 6, our capital expenditure is about capacity expansion with the aim of accelerating revenue. The vast majority of our investments over the next 5 years are expected to be allocated to our future growth. This includes the purchase of land, the construction of new IBX data centers, investment in our xScale joint ventures and developing digital product offerings. As I outlined in my presentation at Analyst Day, we see a significant addressable market opportunity in front of Equinix. And this opportunity is affirmed by the demand signals from our customers. Our customers rely on Equinix for the digital infrastructure necessary to support and scale their AI models. They look to us as they embrace hybrid and multi-cloud strategies for their application architecture.
Our customers are the motivation for the expansion and scale of our capital investments. Second, only about 1% of our nonrecurring capital expenditures will be allocated to the redevelopment of select high-value IBX assets. The redevelopment of key ecosystem facilities like Washington, D.C. and [ Miami1 ] will not only extend the economic lives of these assets. But at the conclusion of these projects, we believe we will be able to yield meaningful additional space and power capacity at attractive returns.
Third, with regard to returns, we expect to underwrite our investments in assets that will yield approximately 25% at stabilization, in line with our current stabilized portfolio. Our growth investments are intended to skew towards our major markets, where we generate over $100 million in annual revenue. By prioritizing our large markets, we can leverage our diverse and deep customer relationships and our in-place operating capabilities to derisk our investment plans and drive efficiencies at scale.
Finally, with regards to timing of revenue, whilst it takes approximately 18 to 24 months to build a core shell and first phase of an IBX asset, we are anticipating an accelerated path to stabilization relative to historical trends. Hence, whilst we guided through 2029, our near- to medium-term investments will support our durable growth beyond 2029. We see a path to drive the business to double-digit revenue growth as our Build Bolder strategy becomes fully operational. Our capital expenditures and data center expansion are grounded in the demand signals we see from our customer base. Organizations are moving beyond the experimentation and pilot phase of AI adoption into the phase of agentic integration and automation.
Many of our customers have deployed AI centers of excellence. These teams are working to establish standardized governance policies and TCO-based management of enterprise AI road maps. These are the necessary prerequisites to enable the scaling of agentic use cases and their integration into core systems, resulting in always-on AI that is compliant to policy. The use cases that we see are far ranging from those that are grounded in privacy and sovereignty requirements to use cases requiring distributed delivery and secure interconnection to those that have at their core predictable performance, coupled with neutrality and control.
Customers' priorities are unique but Equinix is uniquely positioned to address these priorities. Alembic, Block, Bristol Myers Squibb, Continental, Harrison.ai and ServiceNow, amongst many others, are working with us to support their AI ambitions and their growth objectives. As I noted at our Analyst Day, we firmly believe that Equinix has been built for this moment. We are investing in our future in service to our customers and in service to the opportunity ahead. Through these efforts, we believe we will continue to deliver attractive revenue growth, expanded margins and accretive value to our shareholders over the long term.
Now I would like to take a closer look at our financial results for the quarter and our customer momentum. As a reminder, the growth rates shared are all on a normalized and constant currency basis. In Q2, we delivered revenues of $2.26 billion, up 5% year-over-year. This was driven by strong recurring revenue growth, up 7% year-over-year, the result of our continued strong bookings performance. As previously stated, our second half outlook implies underlying recurring revenue step-up, a reflection of our strong first half bookings and conversion of backlog. For nonrecurring revenues in Q2, we had lower xScale fees, which was as expected and planned for.
Based on our current pipeline for xScale and consistent with our initial full year guidance, we are anticipating a meaningful step-up in NRR in the second half, more specifically in Q4. Adjusted EBITDA margins increased to 50% of revenues for the first time in our history. AFFO per share increased 8% year-over-year. In both instances, results were above our expectations due to strong operating performance and lower-than-expected SG&A expenses, in part due to the timing of spend. Keith will provide additional insight into these numbers shortly.
Turning to our customer momentum. We continue to cultivate and win opportunities across our product set and in service to the enduring demand for AI, hybrid and multi-cloud deployments and networking requirements. Lyceum Technologies, a German GPU as a service provider recently added a liquid-cooled AI deployment in EMEA to bring automated cloud experiences to their customers. Schneider Electric chose Equinix to lower the overall carbon footprint of their digital infrastructure as they build out a multi-cloud solution leveraging fabric cloud router.
Woolworths, the largest retailer of food and everyday essentials in Australia and New Zealand, has developed a payments platform called WPay, utilizing HPE GreenLake and Equinix data centers. This end-to-end solution features a robust architecture that not only offers scalability but also enhances cost efficiency for both WPay and its merchant partners. eBay leverages Equinix to ensure low latency connectivity and high performance for its global marketplace with distributed network hubs. This infrastructure enables eBay to deliver a seamless user experience, reducing delays and optimizing interactions for buyers and sellers worldwide.
And finally, EssilorLuxottica, a global leader in advanced vision care products, eyewear and medtech solutions, chose Equinix to enhance operational efficiency and support seamless global expansion with high performance connectivity. This breadth of customer use cases across geography, segment, industry and product set underscores the distinct value of Equinix and the diversity of the opportunity ahead. We intend to build on this momentum through the remaining quarters of '25 and beyond.
We continue to execute against our 3 strategic moves in pursuit of our long-term accretive growth ambitions. Our Serve Better strategic move is focused on our customers who are at the heart of everything we do. The differentiating force behind serving better is our customer and revenue organization. I would like to take a moment to welcome Shane Paladin as our new Chief Customer and Revenue Officer and a member of our executive team. Shane brings with him over 2 decades of global expertise in go-to-market strategies, close collaboration with product organizations and the delivery of transformative results.
I'm also pleased to share that we are already off to a strong start in Q3. Through presales from prior quarters and continued momentum from our sales team, as of yesterday, we have closed more than 40% of our bookings planned for Q3. We have a strong pipeline to support our remaining bookings ambitions for the quarter.
Looking forward to Q4, our pipeline is the most robust we have seen and speaks to the demand in the market for the products and services offered by Equinix. As we work to solve smarter, we are focused on simplifying the consumption of our digital infrastructure and interconnection solutions for our customers. Our industry-leading interconnection franchise continues to perform well. Interconnection revenues grew a healthy 8% year-over-year on a normalized and constant currency basis, crossing $400 million of quarterly revenues for the first time.
We added a net 6,200 total interconnections in the quarter, driven by cloud and AI expansion activities. We now have more than 492,000 total interconnections deployed. Our ability to connect businesses with one another and across their value chain, including through our market-leading share of native cloud on-ramps continues to be an attractive differentiator for our customers. This is why Equinix has become the home to ecosystems across network, cloud, financial services and content and digital media providers.
Equinix Fabric continues to over-index with provision capacity now over 100 terabits. In the quarter, we surpassed 4,000 customers using Equinix Fabric, and we saw a continued diversification of use cases with solid pull-through from our fabric cloud router and network edge products.
As I said before, AI inference use cases are growing. We believe our leading market share of cloud on ramps, when combined with fabric, will be vital to address the increased bandwidth and multi-cloud connectivity these workloads will require. As we Build Bolder to meet growing demand from our customers, we now have 59 major projects underway globally, including 12 xScale projects. Since our last earnings call, we added 9 new retail projects in key markets such as Chicago, Dallas, London and Silicon Valley and have commenced our first build in Bangkok, Thailand. In early June, we finalized our acquisition of 3 data centers in the Philippines to enter the Manila Metro as we broaden our footprint in Southeast Asia.
Our xScale focus continues to expand. Our pipeline of potential North American campuses is growing, and we are in late-stage negotiations for additional locations, which we look forward to disclosing in the near future. We are making excellent progress on our Atlanta campus as we prepare the land for the construction process. Across our open and announced projects, our xScale assets are more than 85% leased or preleased, and as noted earlier, we have a strong pipeline of opportunities primed for execution in the second half of the year. Serve Better, Solve Smarter and Build Bolder are the right strategic moves for our customers and for our business, and our continued execution gains them is paying off.
Now I'm going to turn it over to Keith to share more on the quarter's financials and our outlook for the balance of the year.
Thanks, Adaire, and good afternoon to everyone. Well, we had another great quarter, and we're very excited about what the future holds for Equinix. We had strong and diversified annualized gross bookings, our new metric of $345 million in the second quarter. These bookings are foundational to the expected quarter-on-quarter recurring revenue growth in the next 2 quarters and as we set the stage for 2026. Also, we delivered healthy operating leverage to the business, resulting in adjusted EBITDA margins hitting 50% for the quarter, the first time in our history. And our nonfinancial metrics continue to trend favorably. All of this, alongside stronger non-U.S. dollar operating currencies allowed us to raise our guidance across all of our key operating metrics, while maintaining flexibility to invest in the second half of the year in support of our strategic moves.
Now before I get into details for the quarter, I wanted to provide some clarifying thoughts related to the long-term financial outlook, which we shared with you at the June Analyst Day. First and most importantly, our Build Bolder investment strategy is about pressing our advantage by investing in future growth through the development of new data centers, as highlighted by Adaire. This build strategy is in support of our selling strategy to put the right customer with the right application into the right asset. Simply Build Bolder is about creating new capacity to meet the future demands for digital infrastructure.
Second, the Analyst Day 5-year plan made a number of assumptions about the funding of our growth. As you've seen over the past couple of years, we've benefited by accessing many foreign debt capital markets, where interest rates are not only lower but where we can also mitigate potential FX exposures while also being tax efficient. It is our intention to continue to access these 4 markets to our fullest ability while not exposing our balance sheet to undo FX risk. Over the short term, you should expect us to continue to access lower capital cost markets in Canada and for -- while raising more debt capital in Europe in 2026.
And finally, when rates and spreads move in the right direction in the United States, you should expect us to appropriately move to access this market while looking at the appropriate tenor for these capital raises. As it relates to our forecasted interest expense, we fully expect to capitalize a portion of our interest expense, which will be determined by the cost of that raised, the amount of assets under development, including land and the time line to operationalize these assets. Later this year, as we work through the annual planning cycle for next year, we plan to refine our estimate of net interest expense after interest capitalization, and we'll share these details with you in early 2026.
And finally, as a reminder, our long-term goal is to deliver $50 or greater of AFFO per share in 2029. This AFFO per share target implies a 7% CAGR growth rate from 2025 through 2029. Given we expect 2026 will be at the lower end of our guided range, this outlook, therefore, implies an AFFO per share growth rate towards the top half of the range each year thereafter with 2029 being at the top end of the range.
Now let me cover the highlights for the quarter as depicted on Slide 7. We do know that all growth rates in this section are on a normalized and constant currency basis. Global Q2 revenues were approximately $2.26 billion, up 5% over the same quarter last year and slightly above the midpoint of our guidance range.
Our continued bookings momentum resulted in another quarter of strong recurring revenue growth at 7%, offset by a decrease in nonrecurring revenues, largely due to lower xScale fit out revenues and fees as expected. Net of our FX hedges, there was minimal FX impact when compared to our prior guidance rates.
Global Q2 adjusted EBITDA was approximately $1.13 billion or 50% of revenues above the top end of our guidance range due to strong operating performance, including solid gross profit and lower-than-expected SG&A expenses in part due to timing of spend. Q2 adjusted EBITDA, net of our FX hedges, included a $2 million FX headwind when compared to our prior guidance rates. Global Q2 AFFO was $972 million, up 11% over the same quarter last year and well above our expectations for the quarter due to strong operating performance and lower income tax expenses.
Q2 AFFO included a $3 million FX headwind when compared to our prior guidance rates. Global Q2 MRR churn was 2.6%, slightly above the high end of our range primarily due to the [ HEO ] bankruptcy. Absent the specific MRR churn, our metric would have been 2.4%. For the full year, we continue to expect MRR churn to be comfortably in our 2% to 2.5% quarterly guidance range.
With respect to our nonfinancial metrics, they continue to trend favorably with global MR for cabinet yields stepping up $33 quarter-over-quarter on a constant currency basis, largely the result of favorable pricing and increasing power densities from the base. Cabinet's billing also saw a solid step-up in the quarter led by the Americas region, and we added 6,200 total net interconnections for the quarter.
Now looking at our capital structure. Please refer to Slide 10. Our balance sheet increased to approximately $39 billion, including elevated cash and short-term investments totaling approximately $4.5 billion. Higher than typical, given the $1.2 billion of Q3 senior note repayments, one which has already been settled in July and the other expected to be settled in September. In the quarter, we issued $1.7 billion of euro-denominated senior green notes at a weighted average rate of 3.625%.
Cumulatively, Equinix has issued $9 billion of green bonds making Equinix a top 5 U.S. issuer in the investment-grade green bond market. Our net leverage was 3.5x our annualized adjusted EBITDA. As noted during our Analyst Day, we fully expect our net leverage to increase over the next several years as we fund our growth both from the cash generated in business and with the incremental debt we plan to raise. Through 2029, we continue to remain comfortable raising our debt levels up to 4.5x in support of this growth and to fund our other strategic initiatives while maintaining our investment-grade rating.
Turning to Slide 11. For the quarter, capital expenditures were approximately $990 million, including recurring CapEx of $55 million. We opened 5 major projects since our last earnings call, adding retail capacity in Chicago, Dallas, Toronto, Washington D.C. and Salalah, Oman. Over 70% of our announced retail expansion project spans is allocated to our largest metros where we have strong established ecosystem and can benefit from our economy of scale.
Now moving to Slide 12. Our capital investments have continued to deliver strong returns. Our now 189 stabilized assets increased recurring revenues by 3% year-over-year on a constant currency basis and are collectively 82% utilized and generated a 26% cash-on-cash return on the gross PP&E invested on a constant currency basis.
And finally, please refer to Slides 13 through 17 for an updated summary of 2025 guidance and bridges. Do note, all growth rates are on a normalized and constant currency basis. For the full year, we're raising our 2025 revenues guidance by $58 million. This maintains a 7% to 8% normalized and constant currency growth rate.
Importantly, our outlook continues to imply a robust quarter-over-quarter step-up of our underlying recurring revenues in Q3 and Q4 and strong NRR activity in the fourth quarter driven by our pipeline of xScale opportunities. We're also raising our 2025 adjusted EBITDA guidance by $46 million. Adjusted EBITDA margins are expected to be approximately 49% with strong second half adjusted EBITDA margins at or near 50%. We're raising our 2025 AFFO guidance by $28 million. AFFO is expected to grow between 10% and 12%, and AFFO per share growth is expected to range between 7% and 10% compared to the previous year.
And finally, 2025 CapEx is now expected to range between $3.8 billion and $4.3 billion, including approximately $450 million of on-balance sheet xScale spend, funds we expect to be reimbursed later this year as we transfer these assets into our U.S. joint venture. The increase in nonrecurring CapEx spend is largely due to a meaningful investment in prepurchase of long-lead equipment, the timing of contributing our xScale investments to the new xScale joint venture and our newly approved projects. Recurring CapEx spend is expected to be about $280 million.
So I'm going to stop here and turn the call back to Adaire.
Thanks very much, Keith. In closing, we delivered a strong first half of 2025, achieving robust bookings and financial outcomes. We remain excited and optimistic about the future of Equinix and our differentiated and durable market position. We were built for this moment. No other player in the digital infrastructure landscape possesses the unique combination of strengths that are an inherent part of Equinix. Our diverse and neutral interconnected ecosystems, our extensive global footprint across key metros, our more than 10,000 enterprise customers across geographies, industries and segments, our track record of reliability and service excellence.
As the world's digital infrastructure company, we are shortening the path to bandwidth connectivity to enable the innovations that enrich our work, life and planet. I'll stop here and open it up to questions.
[Operator Instructions] Our first caller is Nick Del Deo with MoffettNathanson LLC.
2. Question Answer
It was great to see the interconnection adds step back up this quarter, but they've had a bit of a sawtooth pattern over the past couple of years. So I wonder -- I was wondering if you could dig a bit more into what helped this quarter. Maybe talk a bit about what we should expect over the coming quarters for that metric.
Yes. Thanks for the question, Nick. I'm very happy to take that. As you mentioned, a very strong position for interconnection this quarter with revenues up 8% year-on-year and of course, contributing overall to the revenue of Equinix 6,200 additions, mostly focused around cloud and AI expansion opportunities with our customers. So largely looking at how the ecosystem of cloud and AI opportunities in our customer base look to secure their network presence in order to support the kind of workloads that they are hoping will be part of their landscape going forward.
So this was, I think, a very strong quarter for us for interconnection. We saw use cases around our data center interconnect around FCR, our Fabric Cloud Router and on Network Edge being pulled through as well. And we look forward to continuing to work in order to ensure that we continue to grow and evolve the value of this part of the Equinix franchise.
John Atkin with RBC Capital Markets.
I was interested in the comment on the strong bookings momentum to start the third quarter. Is this seasonality? Is it sales incentives? Is it product appeal to certain customer bases or segments or maybe drill down a little bit as to what's driving that and what that might portend for even the rest of the year?
Yes. Happy to do that. Thanks very much. Maybe I can just perhaps characterize this a little with what we saw in the demand profile for the quarter just closed in Q2. We certainly saw a very broad-based set of activities across regions, customers and segments. We experienced very strong pricing in the second quarter. And we saw some great opportunity amongst retail, small and medium-sized transactions in the quarter. And interestingly enough, inter and intra-regional pickup. So again, supporting customers as they navigate from one region to another.
So when we look forward into our bookings landscape for Q3 and the fact that we are at 40% as of yesterday of our bookings quota concluded. I think this speaks to a couple of things. First of all, to the momentum that we saw in the close of Q2 and how that carried forward into our Q3 bookings framework. Secondly, that we are very, very focused on growth. This is a very powerful aspect of our strategy, and of course, is an important aspect of driving ultimately AFFO per share. So as we look at this bookings momentum, you can see that we are giving you this view of inside our business so that you can see how that line is actually evolving.
For us, Q3 will be less about impacting in a huge way recurring revenue in Q4. It's more about setting us up for the exit out of 2025 and into recurring revenue momentum of 2026. So a combination of focus, execution, continued momentum. And obviously, some presales from previous quarters coming into action at the start of the quarter but also just endless execution against what is a very strong pipeline in Q3. And also, as I mentioned in my remarks in our Q4 period. Very strong conversion rates that we saw in Q2 also coming through in the early days of Q3.
And Jon, maybe just one other thing. It was -- for us, we opened up 5 assets and 3 were very important markets for us. And I think that gives -- as Adaire was saying, that gives us the ability to build up on the momentum when you've got the Dallases, the Chicagos and markets like that coming online. And so there's a lot of opportunity there. And then the second thing I would just say, and Adaire alluded to it, benefit that we've seen is not only having a strong pipeline and the momentum, but it's also -- the backlog was a decrease quarter-over-quarter, and therefore, that sets up nicely for the second 2 quarters of the year.
I just wonder if there's anything also to call out on direct sales contributions versus indirect and partner channels. Any kind of update since Analyst Day on that mix?
Not particularly. I'd say that based on Q2 and '24, we saw a very steady resale motion in our channel business. Although in Q2 referrals were slightly lower. But we can still continue to execute very closely with our channel partners and still continue to evolve how we execute parts of our business relevant to our ecosystem. For example, in Indonesia, we've just launched a new partner program to allow us to sell in that way.
Our next caller is Eric Luebchow with Wells Fargo.
Adaire, you touched on this in your prepared remarks, I believe you said that you expect to accelerate the timing to stabilization in your Build Bolder plan versus what you've done historically. And I think historically, it would take about 2 to 4 or 5 years, if I recall. So maybe you could give us an update on your thoughts on how quickly you can stabilize some of the properties that you're planning to develop over the next for 4-plus years? And is the plan to potentially presell or pre-lease larger portions going forward to perhaps derisk some of the future capital spend?
Thank you for the question. So we mentioned that the typical build profile for us is an 18- to 24-month period. The time that we need to build the core and the shell and prepare that asset to its RFS status. Behind the opportunity to accelerate the path to stabilization relative to our historical trends are a couple of things. First of all, building in fewer or even singular phases as far as possible. That is part of our Build Bolder approach, looking to reduce or bring the phases down to a single phase of build and typically considering how we define stabilization that will, by itself, naturally move a stabilization process forward.
Secondly, I think that we are seeing from our enterprise customers a larger footprint requirement for enterprise customers as they look to embrace the opportunities for their businesses afforded by AI and its capabilities. And so that also will, I think, progress the rate at which capacity is consumed in our assets. And then thirdly, the opportunity to look at presales activity in advance of RFS states when those states become known and clear, enabling us to de-risk the process and investment process towards these assets that we are building at the minute.
Our next call is already Aryeh Klein with BMO Capital Markets.
Maybe on the CapEx guidance, was it increased a decent bit here. Curious if you could maybe accelerate some of the investments that you're looking at to get capacity delivered more quickly. Do you have flexibility to do that? Is that something you can consider?
Right, look, it's probably not a to surprise you. Some of the things that impact the ability to deliver is things out of our control, supply chain and access to energy. All that said, we're doing our level best where possible to accelerate, which makes absolute sense. And then we're planning appropriately as we look forward. One of the references we made to a substantial increase in our CapEx was the amount of pre-buys that we're making inside the system so that we can deliver the capacity as quickly as possible.
But I would just tell you, overall, Raouf and his team are wholly focused on delivering against what we refer to as the ready-for-service dates. And the extent that we can accelerate it, we will to the extent that we can collapse phases into one another, we will, as we referred to at the Analyst Day.
Yes. The focus on RFS and RFS delivery is something that is part of the regular cadence of our business now. We hope with the same accuracy that we're forecasting some of the differential aspects of our business. So there's a lot of attention on all of the levers that we have available to us to accelerate the investment into capacity.
Our next caller is Michael Elias with TD Cowen.
Two for me. First is on the prebuying of equipment, I presume it's things like backup diesel gen sets. My thought there is that if you're going to be warehousing of this equipment that actually kind of smooths the CapEx curve potentially to the end of driving better growth -- AFFO growth next year. Just wondering if I'm thinking about that right. And then the second question is that earlier you talked about the demand signals that you're seeing from customers? Any color you could give around those demand signals just to give us greater conviction around this Build Bolder initiative.
Maybe I'll take the second part of the question first and then Keith, if you wanted to address the first part. So let's speak a little bit to customer demand signals. I think there are some trends that we're seeing right across the infrastructure landscape, trends towards distributed workloads, trends towards clan activity and the importance of that. We're absolutely seeing density increase in the footprint within our data centers. And we're seeing deployment sizes trend up in the enterprise and retail space.
And Build Bolder is really our response to those deployment sizes trending up because whilst most of these aspects play to our advantage to distributed workloads, the requirement for cloud connectivity and the ability to afford and offer denser workloads within our environment. And the deployment of size is trending up is in capture by our Build Bolder strategy building to the scale that our customers now require and need. Specifically to some of the demand signals that we are seeing from our customer, I think they form around a number of use cases, especially as it relates not just to the broad-based digital transformation demand, which, of course, is still very real for us.
But as it relates to the demand for AI and AI-orientated workloads, those use cases focus around a number of topics. Around the concept of data privacy and sovereignty and that is a very important topic, broadly, globally, but more specifically, I think, in EMEA than in other regions. Around the need and the support to distribute AI so that the interconnect edge of Equinix becomes the connector between the cloud and the far edge for these workloads. Secure interconnection so that enterprise systems can connect to cloud, models, partners, service providers and do so securely. And the opportunity for neutrality and flexibility.
So customer is recognizing that having freedom of choice is an important aspect of a value proposition as they navigate through the deployment of these different workloads. So these are some of the use cases that we're seeing in terms of conversations with our customers around the demand profile that we're addressing with them in a very collaborative and supportive manner. Keith?
Yes. And then Michael, the first part of your question on prebuy. Look, I think if you look at things in isolation and on the margin, your point would be valid that if you accelerate things into one year, it doesn't have an impact on the subsequent year.
But I think given the scale and size of our investments over the 5-year period that we referred to at the Analyst Day, look, there's going to be ins and outs all the time. And so it wouldn't be appropriate -- there's time to suggest that it's going to cause any meaningful change to our AFFO. That all said, I think what is most important, and I know you know us really well. It is up to us to drive the most meaningful impact that we can have to our AFFO results is driving performance. And as Adaire talked about the momentum on the revenue line. And when you get revenue, it drives cash flow and profit.
The second thing is the debt that we raised, and we talked a little bit about it at the Analyst Day and we had it in the prepared remarks. Just principally speaking, we're going to try and find ways to raise debt as efficiently as we can because it is such a big component of our business. And on the go forward, at least on an incremental basis. So to the extent we can access lower-cost capital markets, we're going to continue to do that to the extent that we can go raise more capital in Europe, we're going to go do that. We're looking very closely at inter capitalization, as we've talked about. We're looking very closely at how to get a good yield on the cash that does sit on the balance sheet so that we have effectively the best view into the sort of the net interest expense on a go-forward basis.
But the biggest impact, of course, is just operating performance. And again, we're going to be very judicious on managing our funds both as it relates to funds we have today on the balance sheet and how we raise our future capital. But our goal is really to optimize the AFFO per share, as you would expect. And these timing events, I guess it was something that was out of the norm, we'll definitely let you know. But that -- this on the margin is not big enough to suggest any meaningful change.
Our next call is Frank Louthan with Raymond James.
Great. On the capitalization of interest, can you walk us through why you weren't doing that before? And then how much of an impact could that bring going forward?
Well, Frank, no, we weren't doing it before. We do capitalize interest. Remember, there's a couple of things that are going on that are different than the past as you look -- compared to what you look -- as you look forward. Number one, we have a really low cost of capital historically, as you and everybody knows. Two, the amount of investment that we're making is much greater tomorrow than it is today, if you will. And so that's an impact. Number three, you got to look at how much land are you carrying on your books and over what period are you capitalizing interest attributed to land that's certainly under development and then eventually to be built on.
And so a number of factors that we look at. And so when you look at us, perhaps relative to others, we are a little bit lower generally because we have less assets under development on our books. So that would be one response. But the second response is as we look forward, we absolutely are looking at all of the all of the appropriate areas to determine exactly what should and should not be capitalized, whether it's interest or any other type of expense that we incur as a business. And so I would just say that overall, we're on top of it, but we have -- it's not that we weren't doing it before. I just think it will be a bigger component going forward largely because we're going to be carrying more debt and that debt is more expensive. And then the time line to build is extended as we all know, given supply chain and other circumstances.
Is there a range of impact you think that could have to the results? Or is it too early to tell?
It's too early to tell because as I said, number one, you have to understand what you're going to raise and when, what it lies on the balance sheet, which I think is really important. And I would just say that in all cases, we're going to try and drive down, if you will, the gross cost of our debt. So as I said, we're going to borrow money as we've been doing in other markets that are lower than the United States. So that's going to be a net positive relative to the guidance rate that -- the long-term guidance rate I gave you at the Analyst Day. So that's number one.
Number two, we're going to look at capitalization. And to the extent that we have more hanging on our balance sheet, you're going to see more interest get capitalized as you would expect and as appropriate. And then the third piece is going to continue for us to invest our money judiciously so that we get a good return on the income that's sitting on the balance sheet, waiting to be deployed. And so these 3 components sort of make up effectively the net interest expense that we share with you on a quarterly basis.
But I would just say, overall, we -- as you would expect, we're going to be working in all of those areas, plus all the things to run a better business that is as strong as it can be. Let me leave it at that.
Michael Rollins with Citi, you may go ahead.
Just a couple of follow-ups. So first, I'm curious on the MRR churn. What are the opportunities to improve MRR churn over time? And has there been some developments on the analytics that you've been involving within the company that helped bring some new insights there. And then secondly, just curious for an update on your outlook for xScale leasing in the back half of the year and going into '26. And maybe give us a sense of how much inventory within that context is available to sell and deliver?
Okay. I'll take the churn question first. So I think in Q3, the 2.6% was above our range, largely due to our bankruptcy that we had mentioned to you, I think, in our previous earnings call. And without that, we would have absolutely been within our range of 2% to 2.5%. For the full year, in the second half, the data available to us shows us that we will be back within that range. There are a number of elements to churn as it relates to how we define and manage this aspect of our business.
A churn does not actually equal automatically a customer departure from Equinix. In fact, less than 10% of our churns actually resulted in an ultimate termination of the relationship Equinix. And it's interesting as we dive into the data that we can see that some customers are back in the same metro in the same product within a 12-month period and that a large proportion of the churn customers continue to grow revenue with us on a year-on-year basis. In fact, in some cases, over half of those customers do it at a greater than 10% click rate. Actually, managing and navigating churn is really an element behind our lean in on our CapEx and our growth. Because as you can see from Q2, we delivered $345 million in annualized gross bookings. And that means that we need to ensure that we have the capacity on our platform to deliver against those bookings.
And the opportunity exists for us to relieve some pressure by bringing new capacity online. So driving growth is actually going to be a key lever for us in getting to a steady state on the bottom half of the churn range, which is actually also an objective that we're focused on. And that, of course, will release significant revenues to us. So I think it's fair to say that we've done tremendous work on the insights into this part of our business that there is certainly a period of time when one needs to preempt a salvageable churn. And that is often outside the context of a single financial year given all of the nuances that a customer needs to navigate and manage. As they look to upgrade or manage their own infrastructure and environment within our colo facility.
But I feel that we are in a really strong position now with the data and the analytics that we have at our disposal to be able to look at this problem holistically and with a longer-term view. But ultimately, capacity is something that would be -- additional capacity will be a big solve here because we will be able to serve all customers who want to be part of the Equinix story.
So that's as it relates to churn. Let's comment and have a look then at the xScale question. I think, first of all, it's important to recognize that we have a very strong track record here as it relates to xScale. In our remarks, we made a comment that 85% of our xScale facilities are leased and under development are already pre-leased. As far as our xScale pipeline is concerned, the pipeline supports a step-up in NRR in the second half. We are back-end loaded against that pipeline, but that was always a characteristic of the year. That was always something that we knew and understood. We're very confident in the execution capabilities of the team because we recognize that overall, this number will have a significant impact, not just on performance but also on margin contribution.
Many of the conversations that we're having with customers are in our pipeline are for capacity that is in late '26 and beyond and I might ask Keith just to give you a little bit of the numbers of that in a moment. I do just want to characterize one aspect of our xScale business, which I think is important to appreciate, not only for Equinix, but for the industry at large, these transactions are inherently lumpy. And they do have a dependency on RFS delivery dates. And as Keith has already mentioned in an earlier answer, we work exceptionally hard to maintain our delivery dates on track.
We have undertaken the prepurchase of key components in our supply chain to minimize risk but there will always be some variables that are outside our control. That being said, xScale is a very critical part of our product continuum. It allows us to move from wholesale through to large footprint and it now enables us to enable in an AI world, not just for hyperscaler capacity, but also for capacity to support some of the increasing footprint that we're seeing in retail.
And finally, just as a last remark for me on this topic, perhaps before we get into the specificity of the numbers here, we are very, very actively engaged executive to executive with our hyperscaler partners. And we continue to orchestrate and iterate against the needs they're expressing in the market.
And Keith, I don't know if you wanted to pass some comments about some of the capacity elements that are coming on that.
Yes, Michael, perhaps just a couple of other points I would like to make, and maybe 3 points. First and foremost, as Adaire alluded to, and you see that in the slide that we shared with you on the earnings deck, I think it's Page 26, the xScale. We've effectively released 416 of the 480 megawatts of capacity that's either delivered or is under construction. In addition to that, in the prepared remarks, we've talked about Hampton and we've talked about other sites. It is our expectation, particularly with the demand environment looking out over an extended period of time, that we will be able to lock up other opportunities in capacity that has not yet been delivered or is not yet under construction. But I think that's important just to note.
The second thing I just want to highlight is that the recurring revenue model, largely when you see the guidance for Q3 relative to Q2, there's a nice step-up in currency. We all knew that was coming. But what is even more telling is there's a nice step-up in recurring revenue. In fact, recurring revenue makes up more than 100% of the non-FX guidance increase to the midpoint, which tells you that nonrecurring revenues are going down quarter-over-quarter, and then we'll step back up in the fourth quarter. So I think that was -- that's important to note.
And then the last thing I would just say, this quarter being Q2 NRR revenue represented about 5% of our revenues. In Q3, it's going to be about 4.5% of our revenues, and in Q4, it's going to be about 6% of our revenues. So it gives you a sense that as Adaire alluded to, is lumpy, and it will continue to be lumpy for an extended period of time. But I think the most fundamental thing that we wanted to share with you is that the recurring revenue model is continuing to accelerate, and that's what gives us the -- that's the attractiveness to the model, but it also gives us the entree into 2026, which again, that alluded to previously, which is really important for our '26 guide and onwards.
Our next caller is Michael Funk with Bank of America.
Thank you again, for the additional detail on the development spending breakdown. Very, very helpful. But partly different question for you, Keith. So thinking about the stabilized colocation portfolio growth of 2%. In my mind, given the strong re-leasing spreads across the industry, churn projected to come down, occupancy ticking up and then escalators baked in, I would think that number should be significantly higher. So if not, can you explain why? And then I guess if I'm right, what takes us to a meaningfully higher number for the portfolio growth?
Yes, Mike, let me give you a couple of comments and certainly feel free to ask a follow-up if we don't hit the mark. So between Adaire and myself will, I think, deal with this question. First and foremost, you have to appreciate that we have the highest returning assets in our portfolio, and you can see that at our price points. And so a 3% stabilized asset increased quarter-over-quarter, year-over-year. Those type of things really make a difference as you're looking at the performance of the business.
And you see strong MRR is because of price, it's because of density and that's sort of the quarter-over-quarter comment I was really making is the $33 increase in MRR per cabinet. The year-over-year stabilized, again, it's attractive, knowing where you're coming from. But the other thing I would tell you is, remember that there's some development assets like when we took DC2 out of the stabilized assets and put it back into expansion as we went through the development exercise, it is one of our best-performing assets on the globe, and you've now taken it out of the stabilized pool, and you've moved it into basically the expansion pool. So it does a couple of things.
You don't get to see it and stabilized. But also when you look at the cash on cash yield and the results that we shared with you, that has an impact on that output as well. Suffice it to say, I think the industry is at a very good point in our journey, largely because you've got an undersupplied market. You have a very robust demand environment. And then you combine that with -- again, I go back to some of Adaire's remarks, we have a uniqueness about our business offering and the platform that we share and the fabric that sort of extends to our assets across our portfolio simultaneously investing heavily in our growth that I think bodes well for the future.
But part of what you see is there's a lot of assets inside the stabilized pool, a lot of assets that are in, what I call, emerging markets. And so in emerging markets, it's a much more competitive landscape in some of these cases. And so when you look at sort of the distribution of assets, I just feel -- I feel really confident about where we're going, less about where we've been because the pricing model has been so attractive. And it's really about filling up the major metros and then sort of secondarily coming back and working on, what I call, the non-Tier 1 metros.
One more, if I could, for Adaire. Adaire, you mentioned you brought on Shane. So great to hear Shane joining the company. Are there specific areas you can improve on meaningfully with the customer experience, customer care?
Thanks for the question. I'm delighted that he has joined us, not least of which because I no longer have to do 2 jobs. Look, I think that we've set a very clear set of priorities around the customer journey and all of the different milestones of engagement on that journey. And so that work has already commenced and Shane has incredible execution capabilities to enable us to continue to progress that work. We had some very strong NPS feedback from our customers, the highest that we've seen. We've swapped to a twice a year review of customer feedback, and so we had a very strong NPS score.
And just supported by a whole series of anecdotal pieces of evidence from our cab around the kind of support that Equinix offers not just as customers are implementing but also post implementation. So we will really be looking for Shane to continue to navigate those milestones and customer journey to look at certain aspects of our business around the customer success portfolio around the project management once a customer is implemented and other data points that we think will overall improve the customer experience.
Thank you for joining our conference call today. Have a good afternoon, everyone.
Thank you. This concludes today's conference call. You may go ahead and disconnect.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Equinix — Q2 2025 Earnings Call
Equinix — Q2 2025 Earnings Call
📊 Quartal auf einen Blick
- Umsatz: $2,26 Mrd. (+5% YoY)
- Recurring Revenue: +7% YoY, Treiber für erwarteten Schritt in H2
- Adjusted EBITDA: $1,13 Mrd. bzw. 50% Marge (erstmals)
- AFFO: $972 Mio. (+11% YoY); AFFO per Share +8% YoY (AFFO = Adjusted Funds From Operations)
- Bookings & Ops: $345 Mio. annualisierte Gross Bookings; +6.200 Net-Interconnections
🎯 Was das Management sagt
- Build Bolder: Hauptinvestitionen in Kapazität (Land, neue IBX, xScale JV, digitale Produkte) zur Beschleunigung von Umsatzwachstum.
- Renditefokus: Ziel, Investments bei Stabilisierung ~25% Rendite zu erzielen; Priorität auf Märkten mit >$100M Jahresumsatz zur Risikosenkung.
- Execution & Kunden: Stärkere Nachfrage aus AI-, Hybrid-/Multi‑Cloud‑Use‑Cases; neues Chief Customer & Revenue Officer zur Stärkung der Kundenreise.
🔭 Ausblick & Guidance
- 2025 Update: Umsatzguidance +$58M (weiterhin 7–8% normalized growth); Adjusted EBITDA +$46M, erwartete Marge ~49% (H2 nahe 50%).
- AFFO & CapEx: AFFO Guidance +$28M (Wachstum 10–12%); AFFO/Shares +7–10%. CapEx 2025 nun $3,8–4,3 Mrd. (inkl. ≈$450M on‑balance xScale).
- Risiko/Timing: NRR (nonrecurring revenue) bleibt lumpy; signifikanter NRR‑Schub in Q4 erwartet; Stabilisierung schneller angestrebt, aber abhängig von RFS, Supply‑Chain und Energie.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Interconnection: Analysten fragten nach der Volatilität; Management führt Q‑Zuwachs (6.200) auf Cloud/AI‑Use‑Cases, Fabric‑Pull‑through und Netzwerkprodukte zurück.
- Bookings & Saison: Management meldet >40% Q3‑Bookings bereits abgeschlossen; Erklärung: Momentum aus Q2, presales und Retail‑Assets (Chicago, Dallas, Toronto etc.).
- CapEx & Finanzierung: Diskussion zu Prebuys, Interest Capitalization und Fremdkapitalmärkten; Ziel weiter niedrige Kapitalkosten via Auslandsmärkte, Net‑Leverage aktuell 3,5x, langfristig bis 4,5x akzeptiert.
- Churn / MRR: Q2 MRR‑Churn 2,6% (auf Guideline 2–2,5%); Management erklärt Sondereffekt (Kunden‑Bankruptcy) und sieht Rückkehr in Range H2.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Solide operative Ausführung: Rekordmarge, erhöhter Guidance‑Spielraum und beschleunigte Buchungen bestätigen Strategie. Kurzfristig höhere CapEx und lumpy xScale‑Erlöse sowie Lieferketten-/RFS‑Risiken erhöhen Ausführungs‑ und Timingrisiken; mittelfristig stützt beschleunigtes recurring revenue die angestrebte AFFO‑Wachstumsstory bis 2029.
Equinix — Analyst/Investor Day - Equinix, Inc.
1. Management Discussion
Welcome, Chief Financial Officer, Keith Taylor.
Good afternoon to everybody today. Thanks for taking time to Equinix' 2025 Analyst Day. So I appreciate all of you that are in the audience, those are on the webcast as well. And we have an exciting agenda for you today. Also recognize it's been 2 years since we last met. So we'll talk a little bit about that. But why don't we get started.
But before that, I want to make sure that you realize that we will be making some forward-looking statements, as you would expect. So for risks and uncertainties, please refer to our last 10-Q or 10-K that was filed with the SEC.
Now we do have an exciting agenda today. Adaire is going to kick us off. You're going to hear from all the executives. We've got some great customers coming to join us. And then we'll end the day with some questions. So Adaire and I will take questions. The questions will come up. You could either do it on the webcast platform. Or if you have a question in the audience, feel free to email [email protected], and Katrina is going to moderate our session today.
So with that, there are sort of 5 -- there are some key takeaways. But what I want to just say is principally speaking, it is about the durability of our business. It is about our growth. It is about the efficiency that will drive into the business, and it is about the durable value that we will create for you. So we're excited to spend the afternoon with you.
At the end of the Q&A session, hopefully, some of you will stick around, we'll spend some time and we have some drinks down stars with the kiosks. So without any further ado, I am going to pass it on, and I would just say thank you again for taking time out of your busy day to spend with us. Thank you.
Please welcome, Chief Executive Officer and President, Adaire Fox-Martin.
Good afternoon, everyone. Thank very much Keith for that lovely introduction. We're very, very happy to host you all here today. We know that your time is valuable, and we are extremely grateful that you have chosen to spend some of yours with us today. Now there is no doubt that the AI super cycle is upon us. It's fueled by rapid advancements across the breadth and depth of AI infrastructure and the technology stack.
And here in this room and also online, I'm sure that we would all acknowledge that AI is ubiquitous. It's already integrated into everyday products and services from virtual assistance to online shopping to navigation apps. It's changing how we work. It's boosting productivity, helping businesses and individuals save time and improve efficiency as well as providing insights from data.
It's changing business from the inside out. It's altering the core proposition of products and services, and it's a long-term transformation. Like the Internet revolution, this AI super cycle will unfold over decades, reshaping industries and society in profound ways, some of which I don't think we have yet fully comprehended or fully considered.
Now Thomas Edison said that opportunity is missed by most people because it's dressed in overalls and looks like work. Well, at Equinix, we appreciate how to put opportunity to work and the work that is necessary to capitalize on an opportunity. We have quite literally being built for this moment.
For 27 years, Equinix has both enabled and harnessed the most impactful technological forces the industry and indeed, the global economy has ever seen. Today, we directly serve 2/3 of the Fortune 500 and close to half of Forbes Global 2000 from Cisco to Caterpillar, from Continental to Coca-Cola, from Air Canada to E.ON from NVIDIA to NetApp. We host more than 10,000 organizations running across our 273 data centers across 76 markets in 36 countries at five 9s of reliability. We supported the enablement of the Internet. Verizon uses Equinix to host the equipment that provides Internet services to thousands of organizations.
We've helped organizations like Zoom deliver impact on societal scale. During the pandemic, we rapidly deployed connections, cages and cabinets across all 3 regions allowing Zoom to keep users close and connected. We enabled journeys to the cloud. Equinix played an indispensable role in Adobe's cloud-only transformation, helping them move to a hybrid and multi-cloud architecture in order to support their growth.
Since it's very early days, Salesforce has leveraged Equinix to provide their applications in a private cloud environment to their customers. And as we've delivered value for our customers, we've also delivered returns for our shareholders. Since Equinix was founded, our revenues have grown every year without exception. And our growth has not been dependent on a single solution or a single customer cohort, but it has been balanced across geography, product, industry and customer segment.
We have consistently delivered throughout and at the intersection of the most influential areas of digital history through the scaling of the Internet, the evolution of cloud, the growth in SaaS adoption and the mobile revolution. And we've constantly innovated along the way. But as we have grown, we have remained true to our principles, our principles of neutrality, interconnection density and the nurturing of the magnetism of our ecosystem. These principles have stood the test of time and will continue to endure and differentiate us.
Our interconnection value proposition continues to grow with over 486,000 unique connections. Our ability to connect businesses with one another and across their value chain allows us to deliver quality customer experiences and command premium pricing and returns. In addition, our interconnection franchise today, we hold the market-leading share in native cloud on-ramps, enabling our customers to connect directly, privately and reliably to their cloud providers.
Our neutrality allows our customers to choose from a wide range of network service providers and other IT services. We host 10 of the top 10 cloud providers, 10 of the top 10 SaaS providers, 10 out of the top 10 network service providers and 10 out of the top 10 investment banks, 70% of the world stocks are traded on exchange platforms that depend on Equinix. This vibrant ecosystem of key industry and service provider magnets perpetuates and reinforces the relevance of our role and the value that we enable.
The foundations that we have built over the past 27 years, the principles that we have embraced not only embraced but also helped us to position us very well to be the architects of an interconnected AI orientated future. We were built for this moment.
Now let me now pivot to providing you with our point of view as to the size of this opportunity for Equinix and how it will evolve in the short to medium term. As a starting position, we've used to report that I know many of you are familiar with, the McKinsey & Company, AI power, expanding data center capacity to meet growing demand report. We've taken the low end of their estimates and converted the gigawatts into dollar values using publicly available pricing data.
We have also removed from these estimates hyperscaler built capacity, which is capacity built by an inherently owned by hyperscaler partners. So using this as our base, we expect to see an increase in the total addressable market for AI from USD 38 billion to USD 94 billion over the next 5 years.
To give a sense of the velocity of this AI super cycle at our last Analyst Day, we estimated a $20 billion TAM for 2026. Estimates are now almost twice this for this very same year. Now the opportunity falls into 2 main categories: AI training and AI inference. As you all know, AI training is about teaching a foundational model by feeding it large amounts of data. AI inference on the other hand is putting that model to work once it's been properly taught.
Up until today, we have mostly experienced the training sprint. And we have participated in this training opportunity in 2 ways: firstly, through our xScale franchise. We've delivered a total of 326 megawatts over the previous 5 years. We have an additional 154 megawatts under construction, 70% of which is preleased. xScale has proven to be a robust and successful vehicle through which we have served the requirements for our hyperscale partners as they seek to lease purpose-built facilities.
Secondly, as training has evolved beyond LLMs, we've provisioned private training capabilities for our enterprise customers in our retail footprint, where training is largely centralized inference by its very nature is distributed. Inference is where we all get to interact with AI. It's where applications and software benefit from AI. And depending on the use case, inference can occur anywhere in the hierarchy of deployment locations, the device edge, the far edge stores, airports, restaurants, the metro edge, what we call the interconnection edge here at Equinix and in the cloud availability zone.
Now we're in the very early stages, the initial stages of inference being deployed at a different location to training. We believe that the use cases will require a mix across that hierarchy I just described, of locations versus a one-size-fits-all approach. We're witnessing customers evaluating and implementing AI inference across the options for a range of different reasons, reasons that include control, privacy, physical security, latency, data residency, multi-cloud flexibility and OpEx and CapEx amortization.
Today, inference makes up about 50% of the total demand for AI. By 2029, we expect it to be 70%. The demand for inferencing is expected to accelerate towards the latter half of this period, almost doubling between 2027 and 2029. And so as inferencing scales and grows and integrates into enterprise workflows, a larger share of these workloads will be hosted in private environments, expected to increase to more than 35% by 2029. And this shift will be driven by a wide range of varying needs across inferencing workloads from data residency all the way to low latency requirements.
Implementing, inferencing necessitates considerations of a wide range of requirements, but it is a set of requirements that aligns well with our core value proposition, our neutrality, our dense connections, our native access to the clouds, and our interconnected edge locations. We believe in the enduring nature of this opportunity in the medium to longer term. We believe that no one else in the data center industry is as well-equipped as Equinix to capture the AI opportunity as it integrates into mainstream workflows, and we are investing behind this potential so that in 2027, at the inflection point for the transition in AI workloads from training to inference, we will bring an increased amount of capacity online to meet this demand.
Now not all AI workloads -- not all workloads will be AI-driven. We continue to see growth and robust demand for a very broad range of non-AI workloads. Many of our customers have deployed their on-prem applications and data sets at Equinix as part of their own hybrid and multi-cloud architecture design. We estimate that this demand will continue to grow at a 9% CAGR over the next 5 years. It will continue to represent a substantial market opportunity for us to pursue.
So this combination of multi-cloud, hybrid and AI workflows elevates the need for neutral, high-density connectivity. Networking requirements are slated to grow from USD 40 billion today to USD 60 billion in 5 years at a CAGR of 11%. So if I take all that together, the AI opportunity, the sustained demand for hybrid and multi-cloud environments, the value for networking. This creates a potential TAM of USD 250 billion.
To pursue this addressable market, we must move faster and be bolder in our ambitions. We must shorten the path between the investments we make and the value our customers and our shareholders experience. Shortening the path isn't just a tagline. It's our corporate purpose. It's embedded in our aspiration to become the leading digital infrastructure company of the 21st century. And it's embedded in our strategy, which has been designed to reorientate the entire company in pursuit of this opportunity.
Our strategy has 5 elements: 3 strategic moves and 2 strategic enablers. Together, they provide the blueprint for how we invest in key business outcomes that shorten the path to value for all of our stakeholders and growth for our business. And whilst we are early in our journey on full realization of the benefits and the focus, you will have already seen some initial impact from early moves on key indicators such as EBITDA and bookings performance.
Build Bolder is at the core of our aspirations. Designing, building and operating data centers is the essence of who we are and the value we bring. Our aim is to shorten the path between the deployment of our capital and the provision of capacity to our customers. Build Bolder is about investing in our future growth. And we will do that whilst recognizing that there is a time lag between our investment and the realization of revenue and, therefore, returns.
Our ambition is to double our capacity by the end of 2029. In other words, our aspiration is to bring as much capacity online in the next 5 years as we did in the past 27 years. Now whilst Build Bolder will serve our xScale customers, please understand that this is a program that is very much focused on our retail business, and it is about building to serve our retail enterprise demand. Build Bolder is about investing in locations where we see the greatest value for our customers and the strongest return for our businesses and for our shareholders.
Build Bolder is about innovating at every single stage of the design and construction process. It's about pioneering the application of AI to our projects. It's about reimaginating how we navigate supply chain and how we source power and land, and it's about accelerating the physical data center build and expanding our footprint and our network.
Build Bolder will enable us to deliver capacity to the market to meet the needs of our customers and our own growth aspirations. Solve Smarter is about how we render our solutions and our products to our customers. At the core of Solve Smarter is our interconnection franchise. Now designing the right network architecture is a complex task, demanding specialized skills and expertise. Defining the right path for cross-connects and interconnects is not always as intuitive as it may first appear.
Hybrid and multi-cloud environments are challenging to manage. And if you add to this future distributed AI inference workloads, we enter a whole new realm of connectivity challenges to solve. Solve Smarter is about shortening the path to the resolution of these challenges. Solve Smarter is focused on abstracting the inherent complexity of networking to ensure that Equinix becomes the easy button for customers who are navigating intricate infrastructure landscapes.
Our Solve smarter investment is delivering solutions like Secure Cab Express. Secure Cab Express is a preconfigured colocation solution that makes it faster and easier for customers to get up and running in our data centers. With Secure Cab Express, we've condensed order to availability from an average 22 days to just 4. In Q1, 1/3 of all new cabinet sales were through Secure Cab Express.
We're accelerating Fabric and Fabric Cloud Route Adopter. This will enable our customers to connect workloads across data centers, clouds and GPU as a service providers, resulting in Equinix increased stickiness for us, reducing, therefore, the likelihood of future churn. Our Solve Smarter teams are innovating across technologies to develop solutions and products. to help customers solve challenging infrastructure problems. And whilst we're in the very early stage of our innovation cycle, we are very excited about the concepts that we are working on and the potential for those concepts for not only an improved customer experience, but for new revenue streams that we've not yet factored into our plans.
Jon and Raouf will join us shortly on stage to delve deeper into Solve Smarter and Build Bolder. Now Serve Better is the delivery vehicle for the output of Build Bolder and Solve Smarter. It's about how we evolve our go-to-market to deliver value and improve experiences for all of our customers. Serve Better is also an important part of the input process to Solve Smarter and Build Bolder, ensuring that customer and partner requirements are considered in the early stages of design and development.
Our go-to-market team at Equinix is a key differentiator for us. No other data center operator has a go-to-market team to match our scale and enterprise coverage. And this capability is already built into our cost base. Enterprise selling is a multifaceted endeavor. It requires a considered approach to segmentation, to territory management, to channel engagement, to the compensation models that drive the rightly focused internally, whilst delivering the right outcome for the customer externally.
And all of this has to be underpinned by data, systems and process. But there is also a significant human element, building trusted relationships with customers, understanding their industry and understanding their business. These and other attributes allow Equinix to sustain relevance to our customers resulting in greater wallet share. The Equinix go-to-market team has a track record of success here. Nearly 90% of our bookings come from our installed base.
And as inferencing becomes increasingly relevant to our customers as part of their digital and AI strategies, so too will our sales team who have developed a very deep understanding of their business over an extended period of time. Our efforts in Serve Better have helped us to achieve over 16,000 unique booking transactions in the last 4 quarters representing more than USD 1.3 billion in annualized quarterly gross bookings.
Now notwithstanding the inherent advantages implied in our go-to-market coverage and the long-term growth objectives, our initial work on Serve Better has highlighted opportunities to reduce our overall SG&A costs as a percentage of our revenue. So Nicole and Harmeen will join us on stage later to share the efforts that they are driving to help us achieve these outcomes.
Supporting our strategic moves of Build Bolder, Solve Smarter and Serve Better, we have defined 2 enablers: Run Simpler and Grow Together. Run Simpler focuses on the operational efficiency at horizontal level of every aspect of our business. Grow Together is focused on our people, linking the success of our valued employees to the success of our valued customers. This strategy is up and running and has begun to deliver outcome. It has been shaped by the voices of our customers, our partners, our people and by many of you who have joined us today.
We are excited and optimistic about the future for Equinix, and we intend to invest in our future growth. We are uniquely positioned to capitalize on the opportunities ahead of us. Let me emphasize the word unique. No other player in the digital infrastructure landscape has the combination of attributes that are an inherent part of Equinix Blueprint, our neutrality, an extensive global footprint of data centers located in key metros.
Over 10,000 enterprise customers across geographies, industries and segments, interconnection and cloud connectivity leadership, our networking backbone, a vibrant ecosystem that creates a magnetic pull for entire value chains. Operational capabilities that globally deliver five 9s of resilience, innovative design and construction teams that are building premium products, a go-to-market team focused on the customer to activate all of that at scale. Individually, each capability area is already unique. But collectively, when you integrate them in support of a strategy, they create a clear, differentiating competitive advantage.
We have been built for this moment. We have a proven 27-year track record of translating the opportunity inherent in new technology advancements into exceptional value for our customers. And we'll be doing this again within the context of this AI super cycle. We have the right strategy in place and the right leadership team and the wider talent in our 13,600 employee base to execute against it.
We're equipped like never before to invest in the future, to create and orchestrate differentiating capabilities and put them to work for our customers. In doing this, I am confident that we will continue to deliver top line growth margin expansion and accretive value to our shareholders. Thank you for your time, and I look forward to continuing the dialogue. Thank you.
Please welcome, Executive Vice President, Global Operations; Raouf Abdel and Chief Business Officer Jon Lin.
Good afternoon, everyone, and thank you for joining us today. I'm Jon Lin, Chief Business Officer. I've got my good friend here, Raouf Abdel, EVP of Global Operations. Together, we're excited to give you a deeper look into how we're enabling the digital infrastructure revolution, shortening the path to boundless connectivity through our Build Bolder strategy, our expanding global market presence and Solving Smarter for our customers through innovations in infrastructure and interconnection.
Thanks, Jon. And good afternoon, everyone. And like Jon said, we're excited to be here with you today. We want to take you through a little bit of a deeper dive into our approach. And there are 3 main topics that we want to really explore with you today. The first is how we're building in new ways to meet our customers' demand. And second, how we're managing a dynamic and complex supply chain. And finally, how we're innovating our product offerings to amplify customer value. We will provide a few campus examples as well to illustrate how we're turning these strategies into reality. Let's start with how we're building Build Bolder to meet customer demand. Tell them, Jon.
All right. Thanks, Raouf. At the heart of Build Bolder is a simple truth, our customers' infrastructure needs are changing in this wave of digital transformation more than ever before. What we're seeing is a sharp shift toward higher densities and larger, more complex deployments driven by rapidly evolving workloads from their business as usual to significant AI innovation and everything in between. That density trend is now undeniable and has risen sharply in recent years.
5 years, 10 years ago, 90% of our customer deployments were under 5 kilowatts per cabinet. Today, while we're continuing to see a variety of densities coming from our customers, we're designing our environments to an average density of 12 kilowatts per cabinet with capability to deliver in excess of 100 kilowatts per cabinet for AI workloads.
And we're making sure we have the flexibility required to support the workloads of today and tomorrow. Meeting those demands takes more than just capacity though. It requires agility and reach. And our interconnected global footprint makes that possible. From Dallas to Dubai, from Toronto to Tokyo, from Sao Paulo to Singapore, our breadth and scale, combined with our flexible deployment models, means we can move at the speed our customers' demand and seamlessly meet them wherever they want to be.
It's not about selling space or power. It's about solving problems for them, whether it's enabling hybrid AI architectures, accelerating time to value for new applications or supporting high-performance workloads at the edge, we're helping our customers turn infrastructure into a competitive advantage. A great example of this is right here in our backyard.
Just 6 miles away from where we are today, the heart of the Equinix New York Metro, our Secaucus campus, powers the world's financial community. More than 50% of the installed customers, they are from capital markets, FinTech and banking. And in addition to those 350 customers, the campus also boasts 78 network carriers and 134 cloud and IT companies. With the total campus capacity of 50 megawatts, it delivers unmatched value for our customers and generates almost $50 million in monthly revenue.
It's not only a significant portion of our balance sheet and revenue but a huge part of our ecosystem. Within that campus alone, we have 30,000 active cross connects, operating across 4,100 miles of fiber, 4,100. That's the distance from Florida to Alaska or more than half the diameter of the earth. And expansion here is ongoing. We're adding an additional 10 megawatts of power, 2,400 cabinets and pre-deployed liquid cooling technology coming online in 2026.
The work we've done here, combined with the essential customer interconnections, makes this campus and many others we operate economically critical for the world. And while often imitated, never replicated. So the question is, how do we continue to execute at speed with the right capacity in the right places and that's where Build Bolder comes in. And Raouf is going to take us through how we're accelerating delivery to meet that demand head on.
In our Build Bolder, we focus on building bigger, better and faster and locations with high demand. This means expanding our existing campuses, accelerating in-flight builds and strategically selecting new sites for larger deployments in markets that serve both xScale and retail customers. We're revolving our construction process by adopting streamlined, highly standard approach while utilizing advanced technologies to solve for scale, density and speed.
In 2027, as Adaire said, we plan to deliver over 350 megawatts. That's more than twice what we delivered in 2024. Our revised strategies will allow us to consistently increase delivered capacity year-over-year. One example of this is our Hampton, Georgia campus located 30 miles outside of Atlanta. This campus spans 262 acres and has a capacity of 240 megawatts hosting both xScale and retail customers.
This site will have 4 identical 60-megawatt buildings that will leverage 1 of 3 standard designs. We are using generative AI to optimize project scheduling and AR/VR technology for design and construction modeling. The first phase of this is due to go live in 2027. We will continue this method of construction, adapting and evolving as necessary to establish additional campuses globally. Our focus remains on locations near strategic metros, where power and land are available. By focusing on these key factors in our site selection, we are ensuring that our investments align with our customer needs while optimizing value creation for our shareholders.
Now that we've discussed how we're building to meet demand, let's shift to discussing managing a dynamic and complex supply chain. As we manage our supply chain, one of the most critical things is, of course, power. And it's about availability, reliability and, of course, sustainability. We've adopted a power first approach, which means we prioritize power availability in our site selection process and employ a variety of strategies to secure that power.
This, of course, is in addition to ensuring that we get fiber connectivity to these locations. To meet the demands of our in-flight and upcoming builds, we have secured utility connection agreements for over 1 gigawatt of power through the end of 2026. And we have submitted for an additional 2 gigawatts of power to be delivered through 2029. We also have an active development pipeline for an additional 4 gigawatts in the works.
While we're sourcing through traditional power arrangements, we do expect grid constraints to intensify. Being able to power, being able to generate our own power will become essential. To mitigate these constraints, we are investing in several on-site power generation solutions to supplement our primary utility connections. Solutions such as gas turbines and fuel cells are already in use in many locations in our portfolio, allowing us to power these IBXs when power is unavailable.
And we are also aggressively investigating and securing future nuclear energy as a longer-term strategy to diversify our energy portfolio.
On top of this, Equinix remains committed to our sustainability pledge for our customers and our communities. We're maximizing utilization of existing resources, including upgrading our infrastructure to incorporate new technologies and improve our operational efficiencies. One example of this is how we're helping the industry migrate to ASHRAE A1A standard, which allows us to reduce energy and water waste from overcooling, while still maintaining the same careful approach to protecting our customers' equipment.
Another great example is our improvements to power usage effectiveness. Over the last 5 years, we have reduced our PUE by 28%. In addition, our heat export program, now in its 16th year, continues to grow and provide waste heat to help local communities where our data centers operate. We're also continuing to secure as much of our power supply as possible through renewables. In 2024 alone, we executed 370 megawatts of new PPAs, and we're proud to say that 250 of our data centers have achieved 100% renewable energy coverage.
So whether it's availability, reliability or sustainability, we're focused on making sure our power strategy supports the scale, efficiency and resilience our customers need. But energy is just one part of how we future-proof the business, right, Raouf?
That's right, Jon. Another vital aspect of our approach to developing resilience and flexibility is with our supply chain, particularly in light of current dynamic political -- and the political and economic environment. One of the things that truly sets Equinix apart is how we implement a globally distributed and diversified supply chain. Complemented by a local supply strategy in the markets where we operate, we have partnered closely with our major capital equipment vendors to scale our global capacity.
This includes specifying new products and partnering with additional vendors across categories such as power systems and cooling equipment. Through all this, we have secured 1.4 gigawatts of critical equipment, our required capacity for the next few years. This diversification reduces dependency on any single supplier and enhances our supply chain strength. In addition to our global supplier diversity, we focus on buying locally whenever possible. This allows us to meet our delivery and availability commitments.
We also prioritized the sourcing of local labor whenever possible, contributing to the economic development of the communities where we build and operate. This approach not only reduces risk, but it also fosters long-term success in every market in which we operate in. Our globally distributed model also helps us mitigate the impacts of tariff pressures and geopolitical complexities. And that resilience shows up in more than just how we source. It shows up in how we innovate. We remain focused not only on solving today's needs, but to flex with the future.
Well said, Raouf. One of the biggest forces shaping that future right now is, of course, AI. As Adaire mentioned, demand for AI-ready data center capacity is expected to rise sharply through 2029. And because of this, McKinsey recently stated that just 5 years from now, around 70% of total demand for data center capacity will be for those equipped to host advanced AI workloads. Again, in the near term, most of the market announcements you're hearing about are building capacity based on large training sites.
What we believe in the long term, fundamentally, distributed inference will be the primary driver of economic value for customers and our entire industry. And AI is not just driving demand. It's redefining what that infrastructure needs to do from compute density to cooling efficiency to connecting data sources, the bar has been raised, and we're meeting it by shortening the path of powerful AI deployments through these instant AI factories.
These purpose-built environments can support today's most advanced workloads while keeping it simple for our customers. That allows us to focus on the infrastructure and freeze our customers to focus on what matters most to them, accelerating their use of AI to drive business outcomes and supporting their customers. We're already deploying with partners like NVIDIA, Dell, HPE and Grok to name a few, and we're doing it at scale. By deploying joint partner solutions into our data centers, customers can accelerate workloads and harness the power of AI more effectively and deliver it securely with the data governance and sovereignty they require.
And a critical unlock to supporting AI is high-density liquid cooling.
Some of these workloads generate significant amounts of heat, and traditional air cooling methods are no longer sufficient. So we are moving fast to bring high-density liquid cooling into production, which is specifically designed to meet these requirements. This is not a lab experiment for us. We are operational, proven and capable of scaling. We have over 100 sites across 45 markets that support liquid cooling today, with 12 currently managing large customer production loads.
Some of these production environments operate at densities up to 120 kW per cabinet. This video is an example of NVIDIA's GB200 deployment in one of our Silicon Valley IBXs. We now integrate liquid cooling in all of our new builds. This provides greater design flexibility, but more importantly, it gives our customers options, whether they are running AI training clusters or high-performance workloads that cannot operate on traditional cooling methods.
This serves as a notable example of how we are not merely reacting to change, but proactively designing for it, with infrastructure that can seamlessly adapt and evolve to the changing requirements. So we have shown you how we are building for the AI future, securing power and delivering the cooling needed for all of it to work. But you still need to move the bits around. And that is really what gives Equinix the edge, our interconnection expertise.
It's the backbone of our offering. And Equinix literally shortens the path to all the digital partners that matter through our interconnection products. It's what turns customer needs into business outcomes, and it's never been more important. As AI, edge and hybrid and multi-cloud architectures become the standard, our position as a neutral interconnected ecosystem gives customers something they can't get anywhere else, access to more than 220 cloud on-ramps and 5,000 cloud IT and network service providers.
It's how we shorten that path to value, simplifying the consumption of interconnection-rich solutions for our customers. By connecting them to partners and clouds that power their business, we're reducing time to value and improving performance, creating not just meaningful but critical relationships.
As you've heard, we've reached more than 486,000 interconnections across our ecosystem, and we're on track to hit 0.5 million early next year. That's incredible scale. And that kind of scale matters because we believe the era of siloed single cloud AI is ending, and we're entering the era of distributed AI. In short, the philosophy is relatively simple, put AI workloads where they create the most value and use low latency, privacy-preserving interconnections to connect it to all the data sources that matter.
And while that's easy to imagine, it's complex to execute and that's where Equinix delivers, shortening that path to boundless connectivity to accelerate the breakthroughs that move the world forward. We believe we are the only company that can interconnect the ecosystem of hyperscalers, data providers, specialized GPU as a service providers, enterprise data centers and strategic inference locations at the digital edge.
Whether it's enabling real-time data movement from AI training to inference at the edge or reducing latency between workloads, or simply bridging across clouds and network, interconnection is what makes modern infrastructure work. It's how we help customers move faster and create real-world change every minute of the day. And it's working. We're seeing more use cases and greater capacities than our premier interconnection offering, Fabric. And our Fabric starting ARPU is now up 64% from 2023 to 2025. That shows the huge increase in value that customers are realizing off of that offering. We're seeing stronger customer engagement and a growing number of real-world examples where we're driving serious business impact.
One great example of combining infrastructure and interconnection is Hyundai Motor Group. To keep more than 10 million connected cars running smoothly around the world and with plans to scale that to over 20 million by 2026, Hyundai needed to shorten the path between their vehicles and the data powering them. That is why they deployed their edge cloud platform across 3 of our IBXs in Frankfurt, Los Angeles and Seoul strategically positioned within our rich ecosystem of network and cloud providers. That connectivity is what makes it all work.
By bringing their digital infrastructure closer to the edge, where speed and reliability matter most, they have significantly enhanced app responsiveness and strengthened the quality of their remote services, unlocking boundless connectivity that delivers smarter, safer driving experiences every time someone starts their vehicle.
We're also helping the global pharmaceutical leader Bristol-Myers Squibb, speed up something that can't wait, life-saving drug discovery. By deploying our joint NVIDIA solution inside of DC16, one of our AI-ready data centers this customer now has the high-performance infrastructure they need to accelerate complex molecular simulations, freeing up researchers to test more compounds faster. That's helped to reduce bottlenecks, improve precision and accelerate the path from discovery to delivery.
So life-saving therapies can reach patients sooner. With this solution, they're seeing an overall cost savings of 55% compared to their prior model, and Greg Myers, who serves as Chief Digital and Technology Officer for BMS recently shared they're now on track to cut clinical trial cycles by nearly 2 years as a result of this AI work.
And of course, this is some of the most critical data for the planet. So deploying that with a private AI solution was important for them and that is AI driving value for the planet, right? And we're so proud to be supporting that. These are just a couple of examples or countless stories just like these that highlight the impact that we're driving.
Thanks, Jon. Nothing you've just heard is theoretical. It's building bolder and solving smarter in action. These are the investments we are making, the innovations we are delivering and the results our customers are seeing in the real world. Let's bring it back to where we started. In addition to managing our current operations worldwide, our commitment to building bolder and solving smarter will enable us to expand our footprint while remaining agile to meet the evolving demand of our customers.
By prioritizing effective supply chain, we improve our resilience and responsiveness in today's complex environment. Coupled with relentless product innovation, we empower our customers to leverage innovative technologies and infrastructure solutions. Together, these elements position Equinix as the leader, enabling our customers to thrive in a competitive environment.
We have always delivered on reliability and operational excellence. And with industry-leading tenure and expertise of our talented workforce, we will continue to deliver on our promises. There are over 5,000 global operations team members across 36 countries committed to meeting the needs of our customers now and in the years to come, an operational foundation that is unmatched in the data center industry.
That's the power of Equinix. It's not just space and power but the ability to connect, adapt and grow with an incredible team focused on our mission for our customers. So when we say infrastructure is evolving, we mean all of it from how we power it, to how we cool it, to how we connect it. And that's what sets us apart. We're excited about the future and look forward to continuing our journey as we shape the next generation together.
By investing boldly, operating globally and executing with purpose, we're continuing to create the infrastructure foundation for the next generation of digital leadership. With millions of transactions being executed across our ecosystem daily, we're responsible for helping our customers move faster, reach further and enable the innovations that enrich our work, life and plan. Thanks for spending time with us today. We're looking forward to the rest of the conversation.
Please Welcome, Executive Vice President, Business Operations, Nicole Collins; and Chief Digital and Innovation Officer Harmeen Mehta.
All right. Thank you so much, Harmeen. It's great to be on stage with you, and thank you, everyone, for being here today. Harmeen and I are going to take a little time to walk you through how we shorten the path to customer value. Because at Equinix, growth is nonnegotiable, but neither is operational excellence. And we know that as we grow in scale, we are going to have to focus on some key areas, how we drive our top line revenue, how we plan to manage our SG&A with intent, and how we plan to continue to transform our company to keep up with the rate, pace, speed and change every one of us is witnessing right now around us.
These are the operating goals for run simpler, and they will help us serve customers better. And they're anchored in 3 truths, we're going to walk you through. The first is just secure our core, the second is how we wow our customers, and the third is how we disrupt the norm.
Absolutely. And at Equinix, we don't just power the digital world, we power the world's digital ambition. We're not just building data centers, we're building speed. We're building intelligence. We're building the shortest path to customer value and shareholder value. What does shorten the path mean? It means fewer steps. It means smarter decisions. It also means greater impact. Nicole and I are going to take you behind the curtain today to actually show you how we are becoming faster, bolder, leaner, smarter, how we are accelerating the revenue and also how we are helping drive down our costs, how we're going to increase what customers do with us every day.
We believe that in Equinix, we're not just ready for what's next. We're actually building it.
So let's start with secure our core and how we continue to do that. Two years ago, we stood up here and we shared with you that we were going to streamline our operational rhythm within the company, and we've done that, and we've seen critical gains from that work already. And as we continue to grow in scale over the next 5 years, we know that we have to stay very true to areas of focus that have already served us well, how we focus on our plan, how we connect strategy to execution in that planning phase, how we think about prioritization, rationalization and optimization and then how we protect.
So I'll start with plan and then Harmeen, I'll hand to you for the other two. When we get into our planning process, we are focused on a few key things. The first is how we maniacally prioritize. We focus on the things that matter, and we're deprioritizing things that no longer serve us. And while this sounds simple, it's actually very hard to do in a large company, and we are proud of the strides we've made here, and we will continue to focus in this area.
We've also very much focused on clarity and ownership, making sure every leader, every team member understands the strategy. They see themselves in that strategy, and they know how their role fuels the strategy. Because if we do that well, everyone starts rolling in the same direction, and it creates this force, this momentum, and we are already feeling that inside the company today. And lastly, we got to be a little self-reflective. We're looking at our processes, our handoffs, where there's friction points and starting to modernize how we work because we have to be the easy button. We have to serve customers better. And we are confident that if we do this and continue to do this, we will build not only customer value, but shareholder value.
We've grown fast. But scale without simplification, it can cause friction. So one of the things that Nicole and I are doing is looking at every single aspect, every single process, every single step and see how we can simplify that complexity, how we can create automation and how we can use the power of AI to do that. And we are starting with our architecture. We're building a North Star Architecture based on platform thinking, not just point solutions. This is being designed to scale. It's being designed to adapt. It's being designed with AI at the core.
It's not just cleaner, it's smarter. It's the engine behind everything we are unlocking. We are rationalizing our apps by 50% and consolidating these in just 10 to 12 platforms that will power all of Equinix. This is what will create simplicity. This will create cost efficiency. This is how we run simpler and how we actually serve our customers better.
We're also building engineering excellence. We're building a developer platform that really allows for our developers, our software engineers to do the best work of their lives. It makes it easier for them to do what they do best. This will give us faster time to market. It will give us speed and it will help us double our own productivity. Furthermore, security is really important to us. And it is very, very important to our customers as well.
And cybersecurity is something that you have to continually worry about. We are continuing to strengthen our cybersecurity posture. Security is a commitment. It's a trust symbol. It's also a lever for growth. Our new platforms are built and have security built in them by design. We are investing in cybersecurity as a customer enabler, not just as a control.
Let's move on to truth two, Harmeen, how we wow our customers. They're the heartbeat of everything. In fact, they're why every one of us are sitting in this room today. It's also what sets us apart as a company right now and will continue to set us apart in the future is our customer experience. And we have lofty goals for ourselves over the next 5 years. We want to double our customer delight, and we want to double our delivery speed. And we want to walk you through both of those for the next few minutes.
When I think about doubling customer delight, let's anchor in on a typical enterprise customer's customer journey or customer life cycle. This is how customers move through the journey with us. They hit a learning phase first. They're looking at market trends. They're doing their research, then they move into an assessment phase. This is when they start to look across the partner community and decide who can help me with my operating leverage? Where do I get my best ROI? Then they move into an engagement phase. This is when they partner with us and notice I said the word partner and that we are not seen as a vendor.
Then they'll move to a delivery phase. This is where they want seamless integration, frictionless onboarding. They want us to be the easy button in this space because from there, they move into a loyalty phase, and they will decide whether they are our brand ambassador or they are a detractor, all based on that journey. So the way we double customer delight is to allow customers to move through that life cycle faster, to speed up every phase of that so that we can get to revenue faster, and we can manage costs along the way.
So Harmeen and I right now have stepped back, we've straightened out that life cycle, and we're looking at every single phase how many teams touch a customer, every single handoff, where are their friction points? And most importantly, where can we automate and drive efficiency with new technology staring at all of us right now. And we know that we can decrease cycle time in that journey by 50% over the next 5 years, all the while driving up our Net Promoter Score, which is basically the scorecard that customers give us. And this is how we double customer delight.
Absolutely. In fact, let me take an example that makes it really real. We are building digital twins of all our data centers. This is not just a future vision. This is an operational reality. Every chiller, every router, every cage, we're mapping it all. This is creating a visibility like we've never had before. And it's also creating agility that our customers can really feel and love. When our customers decide to colocate with us, what they're actually looking for is they're looking for a space built to their specification so that they can do the best thing that they need to do for their business.
It's for their business outcomes. And each customer is very unique, and they want different things for their own purposes. This is what we call a cage. What we are building is a cage canvas that allows us to co-create and codesign with our customers using AI, our builders, our designers as well as our project managers working together with the customer in the same canvas. This is creating hyper-personalization and maximizing the efficiency and allowing us to build the cages in half the time. This is what we want to do.
This is how we deliver twice as fast, and this is how we double their customer delight. This is also how we unlock our revenue much faster. This shortens the path to customer and shareholder value. Co-creation, it not only creates the customer delight, but it is also a market differentiation. We're building a digital world where every customer gets exactly what they need, when they need it and how they need it. This is how we earn their trust. This is how we create loyalty. This is how we grow together, and this is how we serve them better.
That's exactly right, which leads us to our third truth, which is disrupt the norm. This is what all great companies are doing right now. They're deciding, can I be faster? Can I be more nimble? How am I more efficient? How can I drive bold change? And most importantly, how can I leverage data, intelligence, insights and the power of AI right now to just be a better company? And we are no different. We are setting a goal for ourselves to significantly increase our enterprise productivity by 2029. And we are already seeing great things since Harmeen has joined us on where we're igniting this that she'll share with you today.
Yes. That's correct, Nicole. In fact, to increase our enterprise productivity significantly, we must think differently. You all think we're just a data center. Well, we're a data center and look at the amount of data that we generate, 5.2 billion telemetry triggers. We create almost one terabytes of data a day. Now just think about the value we can unlock by using that data much better, both for ourselves and for our customers. With AI at the center as a strategic enabler for our people, for our customers, for performance and for our margin. And that's why we're building the Equinix Brain. It's our data intelligence platform.
Three strands weaved into it, a Customer 360, which has all the intelligence, information and data needed for our customers and needed by our customers and Asset 360, which is really the powerhouse of our company. This is what we sell. This is what we have. This is what we use. And then the Product 360, our customers consume our assets through the vehicle of products. So understanding them really better, the pricing, the usage and how we can build and create better products, but also increase the utilization of them that is what this encompasses. So 1 platform, 3 dimensions and endless intelligence. This is not just data. This is true foresight. This is how we go from reactive to predictive.
And we are deploying AI not just as a layer but much more as a partner, every function, every workflow, every solution and every platform. Let me introduce you to our AI teammates. It's a family of intelligent personal assistance for every single person in the company. Each trained for a purpose, each connected to that work's specialization. I know you're looking for an investor AI teammate here as well. Well, we can talk about that over drinks.
So what is the outcome of all of this. With just AI, we are looking to create $300 million value for our company through revenue creation and cost efficiency. And that's what I love about this. It's not just about tech, it's actually about new habits.
Exactly because what you're hearing is a unification, a unification of people, process and technology. And that trifecta allows us to run simpler, it allows us to serve customers better and it allows us to grow together. And Harmeen, myself and Brandi, our Chief People Officer, are responsible for that piece of the strategy, and we're proud to lead that effort. It's the undercurrent of efficiency for Build Bolder, Solve Smarter and Serve Better. And we know that if we do this well, we will drive down cycle times. We will double our customer delight, and we will lift and continue to lift our enterprise productivity because the path to margin and cost efficiency doesn't happen by accident, and it definitely doesn't happen through heroics.
It happens through very thoughtful planning, connecting your strategy, to your execution plan. providing clarity on ownership and being maniacally focused and accountable on critical outcomes, and that is exactly what we're doing today.
Yes. In fact, our -- what we've shown you is our foundation is secure, our engine is getting intelligent and more intelligent, more intelligent day by day. And the customer remains central. This is what reduces cost. This is what helps us increase our revenue. Let's see exactly by how much. Looks like Keith has redacted the numbers, so we're going to have to wait for his section to see that.
All right. So this is how we shorten the path to customer value. This is how we shorten the path to shareholder value. Now Adaire has laid out a bold vision and strategy. Jon and Raouf came up and showed us our future and how we get there. It's exciting to see their teams work every day on that charter. Harmeen, Brandi and I, we own the how, the undercurrent of efficiency to fuel our strategy. Up next, you're going to hear from customers that are in a partnership with us today, feeling everything that we just shared with you. And then Keith will come up stitch it all together with the financials. So Harmeen, it's an honor to share the stage with you, and thank everyone here for being with us today.
Likewise. Thank you.
This concludes the first part of Equinix Analyst Day. We will resume our program promptly at 2:20.
[break]
Hello, everyone. Great to be here. I'm super excited about the -- being the one person in between you and Keith Taylor, which is really all that you're here to see. But I thought it was interesting, first of all, the Louis Vuitton organization is a fantastic customer of ours. But I want to acknowledge my wife in this scenario because I thought when she found out that they were a customer, she offered to support them. And she thought, "I want to test how your systems are working", and I thought that was very thoughtful of her and how about we just watch a Netflix movie instead and support them.
Okay. So thank you very much for taking the time. Whether you are here in the room or online, we appreciate you spending your afternoon with us. I have -- coming up in August, it will be my 10-year anniversary at Equinix. And there's been no better time than right now for our sales team to be focused on doing what we do best, which is helping our customers become more successful. And so today, I've got the opportunity for the next half hour to share with you a little bit of our customers, them giving you their story of what they're going through and how Equinix can help them. And so we'd like to welcome one of our customers up first from Honeywell Sheila Jordan. Please come on up, Sheila.
Okay. So excited to see you, Sheila. Thanks for coming.
Absolutely.
Maybe you can give everybody a quick perspective of your role at Honeywell.
Yes. So it's the Chief Digital Technology Officer. And what that means is really all technology for inside the company, so corporate IT, but also data is becoming so critical. So data is included in that as well, both the data quality, data management, all the data aspects. And then, of course, Gen AI, is being introduced. So it's really running the technology in what Honeywell has been through in the last -- I've joined Honeywell 5 years ago. And what we've been driving is a massive digital transformation across the whole organization and across the different strategic business units. So it's been quite exciting.
Great. Well, I mean, everyone -- I know everyone has heard the name Honeywell. But maybe you could just give a little perspective of what things are happening in Honeywell these days because I know you're going through a lot of transformation. .
Yes, we are. Vimal Kapur, our CEO, has really been focused on driving a growth agenda and growth being both organic and inorganic growth. And so what -- the first thing we did was we said the mega themes for Honeywell is 3 things. We are in industrial automation. We're in aerospace, and we're in energy. So those are the 3 mega themes that Honeywell is now driving.
So with that, we now are looking at portfolio shaping to say what do we want to do to make sure that is what Honeywell does, fits those 3 themes. So we've been on a pretty big quest on the inorganic growth. We're working now with 6 acquisitions. We spun 1 small company off, and we've just announced 2 bigger spins, Applied Material and now we're going to spin off the Aero business. So 6 acquisitions, 1 small spin and 2 divestitures, all within like an 18-month time period.
So we're quite busy in doing this portfolio shaping. Simultaneously, organic growth is just as important. So our new product introduction, and this is, again, an area that we're working together on is as we think about we have 4 business models of Honeywell. We sell products historically, projects. So when we go into a stadium or a hospital or facility with a building management system, fire safety, security, we actually sometimes offer the project to go implement that, the installation of that. So we sell products, projects and now we're moving into software and services.
So think connected services across those building management systems. So all of a sudden, the 4 business models is now allowing us to come up with new product introductions into those -- with those 4 different things way beyond just products and that's really the future.
So a lot of acquisitions, a lot of little merging happening, a little spin-offs. A little bit of transformation going on.
Yes, all 3.
And how -- maybe -- and obviously, agility is important for you with that happening. How does Equinix help you be more agile.
Yes. So one of the things I'd tell you is there's 2 things that I really just deeply appreciate the partnership and the relationship. The first is, you are very easy to do business with. And I don't say that lightly. But when we need to pull off something pretty quickly, in my world today, in most CIOs world, speed matters really matters and minutes matter.
And so when we have to go and change course of direction or get the administrative POs done, I mean, you're very easy to do business with. So I deeply appreciate that part of the relationship and you respond very quickly to the demands that we come in and even if we have to change course. The other thing I'll tell you is when you think about the separating 3 companies, I have to quickly decide what does the network structure look like globally because we're in every region, everywhere -- we're in 84 countries and 400 locations. So we got to think about what does the separation of that network look like for each company.
And so we quickly became -- right now, we work with you in 7 different locations. And what we've decided is because of this separation, we need 16 different locations in each one of the businesses, Aero, Automation And Energy are a bit different. They are corporate headquarters around many different places. So we had to think about -- we needed a company that had a global footprint and you guys responded quickly, we were able to go from 7 to 16 in the planning phases and actually begin to execute that so much so that we're going to have the backbone and the network done fairly quickly. And it's the first step.
I can't do much of more of the separation until the network and the data center is separated, and then I can start moving the applications and the data in all those 3 different places. So I just can't appreciate enough the partnership and the responsiveness. And just your overall strategy fits so nicely, your footprint fits so nicely with what we need at this time.
That's great. Well, good to hear. I'm happy about that, and we're happy to help you with more locations, Sheila, if you have others as you do. But just as you start to think about that, I mean, I think it's important for us to understand when you think strategy, how -- like how early do you bring Equinix into that thought process of hey, here's the new strategic decision or something that we're getting ready to do.
Well, I'll say we just kicked off -- I mean, a few months ago, we've kicked off the actual Aero spin. And one of the first things, I'm a big planner, and I like to derisk massive programs. And so the first thing we had to think about was what was the network in the backbone. And that, of course, we really looked at our cloud providers and Equinix to say what's our strategy here because there is a sequence.
Again, I got to get that stuff sorted out and then start moving some of the applications, we've got to think about how we're separating the data, the content, laptops, all the other things that follow, but you can't really do much if you don't start with the network and the infrastructure in the backbone. So that was very much a strategic discussion super early on into this whole separation planning.
Great. How about -- you've heard those 2 words a few times called artificial intelligence. Talk to us a little bit about how that is affecting things at Honeywell? And what might we be thinking from an Equinix perspective regarding your AI strategy?
So one of the things I'll step back and say is, I've been in the business for 25 years, having worked at Cisco and Symantec and some other companies. And I would tell you that every 5 to 7 years, there comes a technology that fundamentally changes how you work, live and play. I'll date myself, but think about we used to print out MapQuest.
Well, yes.
The older people in the room are laughin that the others didn't. Search. I'll never forget we had the debate in Cisco for quite some time. Should we bring mobile phones into the workforce, just because that was just a foreign concept 10, 15 years ago. So I would just say that there are those moments in time and technology that's introduced usually on the consumer side first and then it moves into the enterprise that Fundamentally changes how you work, live and play. I actually think Gen AI is that same technology.
Now AI has been around for 20 years, so I'm not necessarily talking about that. I am talking about Gen AI.
Gen AI, YES.
And the difference -- the reason I say that is because Gen AI does a couple of things that we haven't been able to do before. First, it thinks, and it gets smarter and smarter and smarter. The more you train the models and you think and you teach it, it gets smarter and smarter. So that's really interesting. So it's not just a static application that's going to work the same way unless you go and configure it or customize it.
It actually thinks. The second part is, in most companies, we have this plethora of structured data that we -- transactional data, bookings, billings, backlog, all the data that runs your companies, but we've been not able to tap into what I call unstructured data. So think videos, think the terms in a contract like the contract, we negotiate lawyers, negotiate all these contracts and that the terms and conditions, the SLAs and all that are part of this unstructured data. It's not a table in a place you can actually go use it.
So unstructured data is pretapped. And studies have said that a company of our size your unstructured data is 2 to 3x the amount you're structured data. So when you start thinking about Gen AI can go find insights across structured data and unstructured data so that you get these new insights and all this information, think employee sentiment, think customer sentiment, think partner sentiment. You can actually video, voice, words that they use, you can actually start to understand things that we couldn't have done before or at least you couldn't have scaled and analyzed it before. So I'm super excited about the opportunity.
We have over 20 different every function, so legal, HR, engineering, IT, finance, every function in every strategic business unit has a Gen AI program or project deployed in Honeywell. So I have over 20 in production. And again, that just shows the breadth of what the capabilities are. It's not just about one function can you use it, like many can.
all using at the same time.
The best example I can give you is our software engineers are using GitHub. It's a Microsoft product. It wrote 116,000 lines of code last week, which is the equivalent of 233 engineers. So again, it's the work that is a bit tedious, the work that is repetitive. Now we still have all of our engineers because they have to validate the code, they got to check the code, but they're not the typist, they're systems thinkers that can actually look across and make sure the code is accurate. And so what does all that mean? It means time to market. It means our products get to market faster.
So that's just 1 example, but we're very, very, very bullish on it. And we also are now incorporating, I mentioned earlier that we have 4 different business models. We're going to start including gen AI into the products and services and specifically the software that we sell. So the best example I can tell you here is, again, we sell building management systems. So think fire, safety, security, surveillance cameras and many, many, many buildings, nonresidential buildings across the United States, across the world.
And now we're going to do is connected services. So those connected services will be able to work, have remote work on them. We can see what the sensors are doing and talking to each other. So think about safety, think about fire for a second, we have intelligent security solutions where today, unfortunately, there's a fire, the firemen and the emergency services know what? They know your name and your address.
Tomorrow, we're going to know where you are in the building, what queue, what office, what floor, what's the sprinkler system that's on the way there? What are the emergency services? Who else is in the building. So knowledge that we're going to have around this as connected services is all going to be using data and then, of course, gen AI on top of that.
Well, as you think about that, I know we've talked a little bit about that kind of the beginning part being the training. And then as you move more into inference, the importance of distribution and being dispersed. Is that where you see Equinix helping?
Well, that's where I actually think as we go into distributed and actually some of the manufacturing sites, it's going to be more and more and more distributed. So at the edge, so when we start having this intelligence and this data and sensors and stuff in our manufacturing sites, seconds will matter. Performance will matter. Accuracy will matter. And so we're going to need to think about not only cloud and centralized sources of data, but also how we can get that information that's important in the moment -- somebody on a manufacturing line needs to know some information really fast. That is going to be super important to know. So in certain use cases, in certain places, the distributed becomes more localized and not necessarily centralized.
So the global footprint matters a lot in that scenario.
Absolutely.
How about as you start to think about just in general, what makes the partnership with Equinix unique?
Well, again, I would say I have 14 strategic accounts that I work with, I mean, across the cloud providers and the technology and you are one of them. But I would say, it really does come down to, and I tell the salespeople this all the time, you have to know the business of your customer. You have to know what you're trying to do, what you're trying to accomplish. You got to know what my pain points are. You got to know how -- the fact that I have 6 acquisitions and some spins happening.
I mean you have to know kind of be able to adjust and be agile. So that relationship is super important. Your policies and procedures and how you operate and run matters to me because if you're efficient and effective and we can get things done quickly, then again, that's a big benefit in speed. And I would just say, in general, speed always matters, right? Speed is important for -- when the CEOs have ideas and they want to do and they want to get them done quick.
But I would say that when you're in the A&D world, mergers, acquisitions and divestitures, like speed is nonnegotiable, like you have got to go fast. And so we want to make sure when we -- by the way, things will change. It's just the ability to pivot and change decisions or change sequence and change orders then the order of the work, then your ability to help us with that.
And the third thing is that I would say, it's super important is co-innovate. We're not going to know everything in this whole new world of services and software, we're not going to know everything. And I think it's important that -- and I know you're using a lot of our solutions and things in your data centers, thank you very much. But I would just say that when you bring 2 companies together that has an opportunity to co-innovate together and leverage each other's skills but deliver something even better to our joint customers that's where it gets really fun.
Yes, for sure. How about lastly, just when you start to think about what's next -- what's the next for us and our partnership.
I honestly can't think beyond the [indiscernible] part -- so mergers, acquisitions, divestures, everything, it's on our plate right now for the next 18 months, I would suggest that when we separate, we'll have new Honeywell and we'll have Honeywell Aerospace. And then I think it's going to be an interesting place for us to think and think about the possibility of what's going to happen next. But right now, it is all about the work that's in front of us.
Well, we're so glad that you include us not only in the planning, but as you just look at your overall next steps, we're happy to be there with you and glad that we can work together on it.
Absolutely. Thank you.
Well, thank you so much. Sheila Jordan. Thank you very much. Thanks so much. That was really appreciated.
Thank you very much, Sheila. Okay. We have 1 more customer that I'd love to bring up from ServiceNow. Please help me welcome to the stage, Peter Bud.
My wife would like to help you with that venture, by the way.
I'm sure she would. So tell us a little bit about -- maybe you could set the tone a little bit like Sheila did in terms of giving people a little perspective of your role at ServiceNow.
Yes, sure. I started with ServiceNow 12 years ago, I'm running their data centers. We were small at the time Equinix has. So we only had 4 data centers, 2 in America, 2 in Europe. And I took over the APJ role in EMEA and then went to a senior director to look over the whole global footprint.
So you're now responsible for making the decisions around all your data centers.
Yes. So I run the cloud basically at ServiceNow. So my team look after the cloud, the support -- the everyday support of the cloud. So the frontline of support really.
So how about -- what have you noticed over that 12 years in terms of kind of as you were growing, how is the relationship with Equinix grown over that 12 years?
Yes. I think the -- I see a lot of similarities actually between the 2 companies. I know that they worked with Bill before. But there's -- the maturity and the trust is a key element for us. I think that's the big thing for us. Bill says, trust is one of the biggest commodities you can have, you learn it in droplets and you lose it in buckets. I think with ServiceNow and with Equinix, we have that trust element. It's never going to be all plain sailing. You're going to have outages, but it's how you react to the outages. So we have our topology of data centers where we'll have active data centers in region or in country.
And that means we can actually move a customer from one data center to the other pairing data center because they're mirror imaged. We can do that within seconds, but we need to know when the failure happens because the time to resolve is key for us and that's the trust element. You coming to us. Raouf's team notifying us when there's an issue so that we can actually remedy it straight away or move the customer out of harm's way.
Yes. And how -- if that ever happens, do you notice a difference in our reaction to the very few times if there is -- even a brief outage, anything between difference in Equinix response compared to other people because you obviously use multiple data center providers.
Yes. As I said, I think it's the maturity of each you knowing our product. Sheila talked about it earlier. It's knowing your customer. We are very big in listening to our customer, listen to a customer, understand their footprint, understand their product, what we do and we cookie cut intentionally globally with you. So it's great with you that you see that and your IBXs globally are the same, consistency is great for us. That's what we're looking for.
Great. How about as you think about ServiceNow. So ServiceNow started as a software company. And now some would say that you're the seventh largest cloud out there. Tell us a little bit about that journey and what Equinix and you did together in that journey?
Yes. So Fred Luddy, who's amazing person, our founder. He was a software company, and he was saying, what frustrated him about software packages or software companies. They would sell you the bells and whistle of a product, and you would only use a portion of it, but you'd have to pay for all of it. So he said, "Why don't turn it on his head, build the software around the customers' needs and only charge them for what they are using, simple, but brilliant.
And with that, it's workflows, automation, that's what ServiceNow does. They were -- it was kind of a SaaS. We're now really a platform platforms, if you like. So with AI as well, we're looking to be what we would call the AI control tower. So we're in companies, you've got different softwares, silos, you want to kind of break those silos down, have a swivel chair effect have like 1 pane of glass, yes? And that's what ServiceNow does from a platform view.
As you -- how does it evolve kind of your usage? I mean, as you said -- I know when you talked a little bit about when you first got there, we were solely Equinix in that scenario. so how did that -- tell us a little bit about how that grows over the years?
Yes. So the great thing about the brand, and it's been highlighted in today's sessions is you are #1 for connectivity, you're unparalleled for that. And that's great for us because when we go into a new geo or a new metro, if Equinix are there, that's half my job done. So you've got that standard, you've got that brand, and we really like working with you. Any problem sometimes if you're not available in certain geos, we have to go with other colo providers. But we would look to you first.
Great. And did it expand? You're using us in multiple regions, correct?
2. Question Answer
sure.
Across all 3.
Yes, across all geos, we're in Americas, South America, Canada, Europe, Seoul, Singapore, Australia, we're really all over the place.
And in each one, you have the exact same setup.
Yes. And my staff, you could liken it to a McDonald's, I know that's not a great analogy. But you go in there, you're now out to order your food, we do the cage situation exactly the same. We have the same setup. So we do structured cabling away from the networks, which is we'll do IDFs. So our engineers can go anywhere around the world. They walk into a ServiceNow cage and they know where they are. They can work straight away.
And that's what's perfect about our global footprint in that scenario.
Yes, consistency. Sometimes when you acquire somewhere, it takes you a little bit too long to equinize it.
feedback is a gift. Thank you, thank you for that. Noted. How about when you're thinking about artificial intelligence, how about for you, Peter. What does that mean for ServiceNow?
Yes. So obviously, I talked about our workflow, our kind of automation. Now putting AI over that accelerates the whole thing. It's a game changer. It is. I look at it from -- in the last 5 years, we've had 2 generational changes. One -- first was COVID. So we had COVID that meant more remote working. Companies like us Zoom went through the roof. But that then meant data center space was prime real estate. Then Gen AI is going, high density. How are we going to call these servers GPUs? And Raouf and John touched on, we really want to partner with you how we can do cooling to the chip or rear door or what makes sense. And the great thing about Equinix is that we have the flexibility of going from a retail model or to the xScale model, and that really benefits us.
Yes. So you can look at us our full portfolio and take advantage of that because you've got all different needs.
Yes. Yes. And I think when we go into a certain geo, it might not be as big but you can cater for that. We could go in a little bit small and that point of presence, then we get to a tipping point, and we can build out then 2 data centers in that country or region.
Yes. And so the retail piece, how do you see that -- and we always talk about the importance of how much more space people need, how much more data center space. But how about you in terms of the retail business and your access to Equinix on that? How do you see that?
Yes. I love the retail model. And I do see a lot of companies a bit similar to ServiceNow have outgrown the retail model, though, for size. But the level of support, we still would love that level of support, and that's why I think xScale working with you to work out how we can kind of utilize that. So we're coming out of the 5 megawatts. We're going into the 10-megawatt footprint, and we still would love that kind of flavor of support where you got the IBX engineers, you've got 5,000 staff globally, and they are a credit to Equinix because they really do feel for the brand, they're career minded, and we see that every day with my staff.
Yes, they're passionate about what they do. As you start to think about things that you value in the partnership, Peter, maybe you could share with people some of that.
Yes. I think I said about trust, but I think sustainability, we get questioned a lot from our customers what we're doing with our carbon footprint. We know that you're on -- we're on a story together. Like it or not, data centers haven't got the best track record. We know that. But the good thing about Equinix is when we go into their data centers, in any geo, we know that your PUE is going to be better than anyone else. And that's a fact because we do -- we look across the portfolio of data centers we got and your average is the lowest. So that's another.
Across the board in terms of -- and you're comparing it against everybody in that.
Yes.
How about -- when you think about the things that are important to you, as you've talked about trust, you talked a little bit about that. What pieces do you think Equinix brings that other companies don't bring?
Connectivity is -- you're definitely the lead of connectivity. What you've done well because you were kind of ahead of the game, you had more footprints and more geos than anyone else. You use that as making it your own backbone. So your Fabric is second to none. other companies have tried to do, Megaport and stuff like that, but it's nowhere near the amount of connectivity that you've got. So we want to kind of leverage that. We're looking at doing a new kind of POP solution.
So we're going to kind of take the edge network away from the customer footprint, put it in highly rich connected zones or metros. So we can utilize the retail model because it's a smaller footprint. But then we can look at you where you're going to go to maybe emerging markets that we can look at building with you, and then we can put the customer footprint in those locations.
fantastic. As you start to think about that and growing in that space, what do you think about -- how do we make your job easy.
Not selling to any hyperscalers.
No...
Meaning you want all our space. Is that...
It's a good point. I think I said the 2 generational changes meant that the demand for data center space is unlike it's been ever before and the hyperscales are actually buying colo space because they're not building their own at the moment because it gets time to market, they're actually acquiring colo. But the great thing about Equinix is you still give us a seat at that top table. When you do geos or when you do builds, you let us know, we work with the road map. So keep doing that.
Well, it's important for us to have a lot of diversity inside the buildings that we have. And that also gives us the true -- you mentioned connectivity. And we think of it just as those ecosystems that are in those buildings is people are attracted to us because you can get that and you can't get it anywhere else. Is that important to you as well.
Yes. Yes, it's very important, very because your brand is constant through. So if we're going into new markets and new territories, it's great when we've got someone familiar with our kind of portfolio. So that really helps.
Any last thoughts you have, Peter, for anybody about just our relationship, how we partner together?
Yes. No, just keep doing what you're doing, but I think today is really a lot of the sessions have like pointed out, I think the growth is the key thing. We're probably at a 50-megawatt globally. So it's not extreme, but we probably have to triple that in size over the next 3 years. So we need to partner with you going forward. We're not in the business of building our own data centers. Don't worry about that, so we're not going to do that. But we would rather grow with a partner like you that's consistent and has the right brand awareness, listens to the customer and has the sustainability story you need for our customers as well.
Good. Well, I think we -- as Sheila even talked a little bit about co-innovating together, too. And I feel like we've been able to share successes over the years as we've looked at things that you wanted to do when you wanted to do them as well as for us. And I think we need to keep doing that together as well.
Yes. I think there's a lot of options to go to market as well. And I know that both teams are talking to each other at the moment. And I think there's a lot of opportunity there because I do see Equinix being like data center of data centers. And ServiceNow platform of platforms, so it should be interconnected.
Yes, Very much so, we're happy to partner together and really appreciate your support and being such a great partner over the years. So Peter Mudd. Thank you.
Please welcome back, Chief Financial Officer, Keith Taylor.
It's been a good session so far. As you can tell, look, I love the presentations that we've had today. And one of the things that probably isn't a surprise to you, when I see those presentations and the opportunity that is in front of us, even after 26 years, you can get very excited about Equinix and its future opportunity. So for me, it's really not -- it's not just about the growth, but I also think it's lot about the efficiency that we're going to bring into the business.
And that's going to create an environment where generate more profits then we'll look at our investments at a different level with a different level of focus and that's going to give us growth, and we will return that to the shareholders in the form of the dividend. So you really we really started the day talking about growth, efficiency and return, and that's where I think we are.
Now I have 2 segments in my presentation that I'll do the outlook. I think the first thing that I want to do, though, because you're probably going to ask me, and so I'm going to go do it right away is how did we do versus what we said we'd do when I was standing up here 2 years ago. Anybody have that on your mind, but I think it was important because one of it is we want to measure ourselves. We're a say-do culture. We want to do what we say we do. We can do. And that's -- we take a lot of pride in that. So let me just start off with revenues because I think it's really important.
And revenues are not in and of themselves. When you do the subcomponents of it our gross bookings were, you've heard, they're really quite good over this time period. Pricing was strong. But you've heard me say publicly on many a time, the churn had been annoyingly high and it has been. And why is that, Well, I think there's a few reasons. I mean we all know them, but I'll repeat them. I think the macro conditions have been very, very difficult at times. I think our ability to curate growth and optimize IBX is where we effectively demarket a customer to bring in more capacity for customers that are growing with us, put a lens on basically our churn as well.
And then the bankruptcies, there are a number of bankruptcies. So that all said, in the spirit of openness when I look at how we perform relative to our expectations, I would say that we're at the lower end of our guidance range. But then I fast forward to AFFO per share. I said, okay, well, how do we do there? If I look at the model that we used in 2023 and where it would be today, and then I compare that, how did we do? We did better, meaningfully better. And we did better largely because gross margins were better than we anticipated than we originally planned for. And our ability to raise capital to fund our future, we did a better job both in how we sourced our funds and how we deploy the capital.
And the best way to present that was really the third sort of key guidance point that we had with you, which was the dividend. And the fact of the matter is, if I think about the dividends, we distributed $500 million more than we anticipated when I stood up here 2 years ago, versus what we plan on distributing. So it just gives you a sense that overall, the business performed well. Yes, we'd like to do better. And yes, we strive to do better. But that at least puts in perspective. Now a lot of what I'm going to talk about, at least in the first segment is really the value that we create through shifting cycles.
And I'll just start off by saying the story is a little bit about resilience, but it is about the durability of our revenues. So as markets have evolved, we adapt and thrive. And as you've heard from Adaire, the biggest of all market shifts is at our doorstep today, which is AI. And we intend to fully capture that opportunity, largely because of all that you've heard plus from our -- just recently from our customers, the foundational advantages that we have relative to anybody else are immense.
And as a result, we think we're going to be a very large recipient of that opportunity, and we're going to invest behind it. I want you hear, we're going to invest behind it. So it's exciting to me. And so what is it that sort of gives us that confidence. Well, it is our foundational -- our unparalleled foundational benefit that we have compared to anybody else that gives us the confidence that we are going to have an outsized opportunity relative to anyone else.
And it starts with the diversity of networks. No surprise. It's the cable landing stations, whether it's the origination or the termination point and the value that we bring to that solution. It's the cloud on-ramps. It's the customers, 10,000-plus customers who are growing and scaling with us. 64% of our revenues come from those customers who operate in 3 regions, and they're going to continue to grow and scale with us. We just have to create the capacity. The world is increasingly -- is going to become more digital. And we want to benefit from the diversity that we create for those customers, as you heard Peter speak about and the sovereignty of where the data needs to reside.
I want to talk a little bit about revenues and the diversity and durability of it. On the first part, when you look at the business, from a market perspective, 80% of our revenues come from major metros. Those are the metros that we generate $100 million more revenue or greater. And the other 20%, which is the growth in emerging markets. We want to continue to invest in those growth in emerging markets, but our major metros today is 15 in total and it's going to scale.
But I think what's important is then looking at where does the business operate out of, Well, 60% of our currency, if you will, of the operating performance resides outside the U.S. that we hedge that because we need predictability around the cash flows because we distribute our dividends in U.S. dollar. But it gives you a sense there's tremendous diversity, and we protect ourselves as much as we can from our hedging positions. The verticals continue to be to scaling and the subsegments of those verticals also are thriving. So it gives you a diversity of customer through those vertical segments and subsegments.
And then lastly, our largest customer, you've heard this before, but I want to repeat it. our largest customer is less than 3% of our revenues, less than 3% of our revenues. Our top 50 customers are less than 37% of our revenues. So I love the fact that our revenues are diverse. And they're durable. And the thing that I like about the durability of our revenue and the returns that we get, again, we have that foundational advantage and it allows us to have industry-leading cash-on-cash yields on the dollars that we invest. So what you see in these charts, sorry, this chart behind me is basically major metros and then the growth in emerging markets. And what I would tell you is we continue to invest in those major metros, Think about 20% to 30% cash on cash yields unlevered or greater as we grow and scale. And when we think about growing scale now.
We used to think of things in millions. Now we think of things in billions. We think -- we used to think in megawatts, now we think in gigawatts. As it relates to the growth in emerging markets, we're still going to invest in those because we need to. It's a platform. But as we continue to grow and scale those emerging markets, which are many inside those bubbles, they're going to shift over towards the cash yields that you that you see on the chart here. And there's no better example to talk about a major metro in Singapore.
This is a metro that we came into in 2002 through the acquisition of a company called ISCT in Singapore. And we haven't looked back ever since even when there was a temporary -- sorry, temporary moratorium put on data centers in 2019, our Singapore market, to give you a perspective, why we talk about it and why it's so important to Southeast Asia is we do $190 million of revenue a quarter in Singapore that earns almost 80% cash gross margins. We've invested $1.6 billion, and given the recent allotment of more capacity, we'll spend another $400 million, and we'll get returns at the upper end of the range that I just spoke of.
Now the challenge we have in Singapore, there are limitations.
And so when there's limitations, we can continue to invest, but it will be as best as we can. So you have to think about, well, like other markets, how do you grow in scale? Well, you have to think about proximity.
And so markets that are proximate to Singapore will build out, Johor, Jakarta, Kuala Lumpur as examples. Over time, it will be our goal to try and make them major metros as well, which is $100 million or more. And over some reasonable time, one, both or all 3 -- sorry, 1, 2 or all 3 of them could be major metros. But our goal is absolutely to continue to invest in Singapore. Singapore is critical node for Southeast Asia and the opportunity in that part of the world.
So I'm going to pause. This is a slide you've never seen before. This is information you have been asking for. So I'm going to pause, give you 2, 3 seconds. I'm just going to stand here quietly. A lot of cameras up there.
Look, we understand over the past many, many quarters. But we knew -- we give you the qualitative view on what we thought we would do from a booking perspective. And I think one of the best ways to measure the health of a system, an ecosystem is looking at the gross activity. It's driving just like interconnection, it's thriving. So we're always looking at the growth, but we have a net number to report.
So we look at the growth. So we go, okay. So what I want to tell you here is our new metric that we will provide you on a quarterly basis, which will give you visibility into the forward revenues. And I'll give you a sense of the momentum of the business. It's going to be called quarterly gross bookings annualized.
It will include net pricing actions in the quarter. Effectively, it's the new MRR that we will have booked inside that quarter. Now it's probably not a surprise to you because Adaire said it already, over the last 4 quarters, $1.3 billion of gross activity.
Now we're also going to give you churn. We're going to continue to give you churn. And right now, we're going to -- until we have anything better, we're going to continue to give you some of the other metrics. But churn, we want to give you the current quarter and the forward quarters, and that gives you the predictability for your models. It gives you a sense of how are we doing, particularly when you compare us against anybody else.
The line of best fit in this scenario is up and to the right, as you can see. But again, we say that because it should be. We're looking for records. Business is growing. And so the line of best fit should be up into the right. But I would tell you on a go-forward basis, I hope that we have that predictability, but the reality is there should be some variability because utilization levels or IBXs, they get full. And until we bring more capacity on, it can have an impact or we have a mix issue.
We have different price points in different markets, but that will be up to us to communicate that to you. But suffice it to say, this gives you a pretty good sense on what we're going to provide on a go-forward basis. And obviously, when you look at the first quarter, it was a tremendously strong quarter for us. But I just wanted to leave this segment with just a couple of comments on the interconnection as well because it really is about the fabric of our -- it's the fabric of our success. Yes, we build better, we operate better. We do all those things compared to, I think, the broader industry. But the one thing that nobody else has, and they cannot replicate it. It's that simple.
They cannot replicate what we have ever. And that's that interconnection. And for us, for 2025, we're estimating we'll have $1.7 billion of interconnection revenues. It's a compound growth rate over the last 5 years of roughly 11%. It will be 19% of our MRR. So again, very, very attractive, and it's an enhancer, if you will. It's an enhancer, if you will, to the cash-on-cash returns that we get on our data centers. So highly important.
When you look at the right side of the chart, I think as Jon and Raouf alluded to in their presentation, the fab -- and Peter referred to in his comments. Fabric is a very important aspect of our business. And the attach rate that we have from fabric is increasing and up to the right.
The company is -- one of the key objectives for the company's corporate bonus plan is for that fabric attach rate to continue to move up and to the right. So 42% is certainly great in Q1 but we expect it to be higher by the end of the year. The other thing, that I thought was very interesting on this slide that I wanted to share with you at least comment on and Jon spoke a little bit about it, is that there's convergence between the price -- the average price a customer pays for a virtual connection versus a physical connection, and you can see they're converging.
So from our perspective, we're a little bit agnostic on how they procure those services. But again, up and to the right is the positive metric, which I think is really important.
So we talked a little bit about revenues, talked a little bit about our assets. I think it's also important I want to talk a little bit about the balance sheet, which is an interesting segment for me. And this sort of gives you sort of a framework that, look, we have a balance sheet. It's a very strong and healthy, and I call it advantaged balance sheet. And so when you look about the growth that we intend to invest in and all the stuff that Raouf sort of alluded to in his presentation today with Jon, you get a sense that we're going to start investing bigger than we have invested before.
And what I like about this particular chart is really that we have been investing in our future success for a period of time. We've been land banking. You saw the cash on our balance sheet start to elevate because we knew we had things to do. And it was marrying up basically the passage of time with the investment strategy. Well, we're now sort of there.
Again, I love what Adaire said. I think, again, Jon and Raouf said it. What we plan on doing in the next 5 years is equivalent to what we've done in 27 years. Again, for me, it's just we're dealing in numbers that maybe none of us have ever anticipated. But that time is here. And I think we have a very compelling advantage.
The only other thing I wanted to share with you on this slide, if you actually just take the inventory. And hypothetically, you just take our growth and our investment to 2029 and you stop. I said, tell me hypothetically, what would our revenues be if we just filled up that capacity to 90% at the current price point. And the answer is greater than $15 billion.
So it gives you a sense that despite the investments we're making, we have a very long runway that I'm really excited about the opportunity to go and sell that capacity to the customers. And if we stop building, $15 billion or greater.
Now again, when you have a strong balance sheet and you invest your capital, one of the things we've been talking about quite extensively is Build Bolder. You hear it on our earnings call, you'll hear it in the hallways, you certainly heard it many times today.
And what I find really interesting about the Build Bolder strategy is really the fact that it's going to constrict amount of time frame in which we build incremental capacity, fewer phases with greater density. And the best way to look at it is the most -- the largest and probably most competitive data center market in the world, which is Washington, D.C. or the Washington D.C. area and for us, it's Ashburn.
And if I look at DC12, we introduced it in 2017. We underwrote it to 23% returns. It did better than that. Then in 2023, we introduced DC16. We underwrote that to higher returns, and it's double the size, and we did better than that. And now the very first Build Bolder data center that's being introduced is our DC17 in 2027, which is 50 megawatts. We're underwriting that to even higher returns. And there's just a tremendous amount of momentum in the D.C. market for the delivery of the services that we offer to our customers. So that's exciting to see.
Now when you look at the balance sheet, and you think a little bit about the capital that we have to allocate. It's not going to be a surprise to many of you. Yes, we'll continue to invest in the DC-type initiatives where we get outsized returns. But I want to share with you the highest and best use of our resources is putting it into the organic business.
Investing in our growth because when you can get those type of returns, that's what you should be doing all day. But the other aspect of the business is we also wanted to return capital back to you in the form of dividends. For the 10-year period post REIT to the end of 2024, we delivered $9 billion in cash dividends. For the period of '25 through '29, we anticipate that the dividend that we will distribute to you, the investors and our shareholders will be $11 billion.
So over that time period, since becoming a REIT through 2029, we're looking at almost $20 billion of cash we distributed back to the shareholders, at the same time, growing the business substantially. Our focus is on growth, but it is on maximizing shareholder return. And I want to make sure that you appreciate that.
Also during this journey, though, we are going to run the business more efficiently. You heard from Harmeen and Nicole, just the work that they're doing around their campaign around systems and process improvements, not to mention all the other things we're doing across the company.
It's about driving down our cost of revenues, reducing our SG&A as a percent of revenue. We want to see improvements in our cash gross profit and our EBITDA margins. And we'll talk a little bit more about that shortly. But when you look at the right side of the balance sheet, we've also got some debt maturities. We have a very attractive debt maturity tower. But over the next 5 years, including 2025, we're going to refinance $8 billion in debt that has an average coupon of 2.1%. The other thing I want to say, in that same time period, we intend to raise an additional $8 billion to fund our growth. So over that time period, we're talking effectively about refinancing and raising incremental capital of $16 billion.
Let me leave you with one other thought. Given what we see in front of us, we believe we can do this. We're confident and we can support it on our balance sheet with comfort. Still have a little bit of flexibility for sure. But the other thing I'll leave you with, again, market condition is dependent. It is not our intention to raise any incremental equity over the same time period, other than employee share plans.
And some of the markets in which we'll choose to raise capital very much, like I said before, we've been able to raise capital in markets where there's a lower cost of capital. There's roughly $6 billion of debt that we have raised over the last few years, and we did that at 3.4%. If you remember at the last Analyst Day, I told you the debt that we -- the assumption that we had in the model was 4.5%.
The assumption I have in the model today is 4.9% because a lot of that debt we anticipate could be raised in the U.S. and we've got elevated rates. The point I'm trying to make is we have an advantage that very few companies have where we can raise our capital in multiple markets, deploy that capital in those markets. And to the extent there's excess, we'll repatriate it back to the U.S. and it gives us a natural hedge and the tax efficiencies that we need to drive cash flow in the business.
So this gives you a little bit of a sense of ourselves versus some of our public peers from a leverage and debt capacity perspective. The point that I really want to make here is we are going to continue to focus on being a highly valued investment-grade rated company. But at the same time, we're taking our leverage up at least one full turn. So under our methodology, not the rating agencies, our leverage, you should see rise over a period of time to 4.5% or thereabout.
So I would be remiss if I didn't mention something a little bit about xScale. xScale, to me, is a balance sheet enhancer, a value creator. You can see our projected accretion for AFFO to AFFO went from range of 3% to 5%, 4% to 5% and this doesn't yet even include xScale 2.0. And the thing I like about xScale is we're investing with great global partners. But 2.0 takes time. You saw the size of the commitment that we're making inside Atlanta. And we're looking at other properties around the U.S. and elsewhere in the world. It takes time.
As I look forward, when I see the fee stream that's coming out of our xScale business, the fee stream has been really quite attractive. It gives us that outsized return. We talk about 12% to 17% levered returns inside the joint venture, but think about the fee stream that we get to enjoy as a business on top of that.
We layer in 50% to 60% debt, which I know you all understand. And this yet has not been -- we don't get the benefit of the AFFO contribution coming from the ventures performance. Said differently, the fee stream comes to Equinix, but the joint ventures are still -- they're still growing and filling up and stabilizing and absorbing, if you will, the cost of debt, so we don't yet enjoy that benefit. '25 and '26 onwards, you should start to see some contribution coming from the AFFO.
And then to the extent any of our partners choose to monetize, of course, there's the promote. Again, we're looking at different markets with the customers -- sorry, with the partners depending on what they want to do. But I would just tell you that the appetite could suggest that we could earn promotes on this investment as well. So that's something that you find attractive.
The last piece I want to do is just give you a sense of if I take all of the joint ventures and I add them together. Right now, the business is doing somewhere between $700 million and $800 million of revenue, revenues that we do not record on our books. So I want to give you a sense of that size.
And as we alluded to, you're only seeing it going to continue to ramp up as we invest more, and then we get into xScale 2.0, which, as Raouf alluded to, the first building, I think, will be available in 2027.
So let me just talk a little bit about long term -- our long-term outlook. But I want to first sort of just start with when you appreciate how Adaire articulated the strategy for the business and how our teams will operationalize it, we can talk about a lot of different things, but I want you as investors to walk away with 4 simple things. We're going to accelerate our growth, but it's going to take time. We're absolutely going to improve our efficiency, and you're starting to see the front end of that already with our 2025 guide at 49% with the second half at or near 50%.
We're going to continue to be very disciplined about the capital and our balance sheet management, but that comes at a cost. Our sole focus is to create and maximize shareholder return. It's about value creation.
So with that, I'm going to start sharing some guidance with you. Okay? Revenues, 7% to 10%. Remember the window I'm looking at, you already have guidance for 2025. We think at 7% to 10% with the front end being at the lower end of the range and we accelerate to the back end of the -- the higher end of the range.
EBITDA margins, because of our growth, because of the operational -- operating efficiency that we've built into the business, and we will continue to -- all that good work that Harmeen and Nicole are going to do is not in our numbers yet. But our EBITDA margins are going to move up and to the right. I said by 2029, 52% plus or better.
Spending. Over the next 5 years, '25 included, we're going to spend $4 billion to $5 billion a year, $4 billion to $5 billion a year. That includes the land that sits underneath. We're making some assumptions that there's land investment in here. Perhaps they're even conservative. But right now, we've got some money set aside for that. We're also making the assumption that the contribution of our pro rata share to the joint venture is embedded in those numbers. I've already told you about the dividend, but it gives you a sense over the next 5 years, '25 included again, $20 billion to $25 billion of investment.
Okay, last one. And this one, I broke into 3 segments because I think it's really important that you hear this. So I'm going to say just -- I'm going to start off by saying our AFFO per share, the underlying performance is 8% to 11%. Now the debt that we're refinancing in 2025, and just be clear, it's at 27 basis points, we're going to feel the full annualized impact in that next year 2026. We're also refinancing a fair bit of debt in 2026. And you should assume for your models, we are going to raise an incremental $2 billion of debt on top of what we already have. And think about how that impacts the business. And it's all in support of our Build Bolder and other investments.
So as a result, AFFO per share will grow at 5% to 9%. For 2026, AFFO per share will grow at 5% or greater. And then we intend post '26. So post '26, we will accelerate to 2029, such that in 2029, our AFFO per share will be $50 or greater including $7 of drag associated with investments that we're making today, where the benefit will not be realized in the planning period.
Now I also want to leave you with another thought. If interest rates change, AFFO improves. If we choose not to raise that $2 billion next year, for whatever reason, that's 2 growth points. Just to give you a perspective, 2 growth points.
We are exceedingly enthusiastic about what's in front of us. And it comes with an investment. And that's what we're intending to do. The opportunity has never been greater. As enterprises continue to grow their compute, as AI inference takes hold, as Adaire alluded to, we want to invest behind that opportunity. And as a result, that's how it gets reflected in our results.
The fundamental business is performing exceedingly well, and that's why we wanted to show you this chart this way. And as I said, the dividend will grow. I've shared that with you already at probably 8% on a compounded basis over the next 5 years.
So I'm leaving you with 3 thoughts. It's about revenue growth. It's about the creation of a more efficient and optimized organization, and it's about managing our capital allocation to drive value to our shareholders, both over the medium and the long term. So that's all I have for you.
So I'm going to pause here. I'm going to thank you all for spending time with us today. I'm going to invite Adaire and Katrina to come up on stage with me and we're going to answer your questions. And then I hope all of you have some time to spend with the Equinix team either down at the [ kiosk ] or spending time sort of talking to the team just about all the stuff that we've shared with you today. But again, thank you very much. I appreciate your time.
All right. Well, first off, thank you to everyone for doing the deeper dive with Equinix this afternoon, and we truly appreciate the investment in time.
So next up, our executive Q&A and there's going to be 2 ways to ask questions. So you can ask them online. So our IR team is standing by. Go ahead and e-mail [email protected]. They are linked to my iPad. I will be getting them live and then we'll also be taking questions from the room.
So we've had -- we have some proactive analysts who have been sending in questions already. So I'll start with a couple online, and then I'll turn it over to the room. So our first question comes from Michael Funk at Bank of America. Thank you for the new data on the AI TAM. As you think about the distribution of AI applications, can you quantify your service addressable market, or SAM, and the required investment to pursue that?
First of all, I think that it's important that we understand the breadth of this opportunity and how we, in Equinix, are positioned to adopt it. And I think we laid that out in the early narrative. We laid out the journey on the inference piece and we laid out the journey on the cloud hybrid piece. It's a huge opportunity.
I think when 2 years ago the team looked at the AI opportunity in the market generally, it was like is this a market opportunity that could get Equinix to $10 billion in revenue. And now when we look at the size and scale of the opportunity ahead of us is, is this a pool of opportunity that could potentially get us to $20 billion, $30 billion in revenue at some point in the future.
And so I think that's the opportunity that's ahead of us. That's the opportunity that we want to invest in. The TAM is broken down in various different ways across the footprint, but we've really just looked at it holistically as an inference opportunity given the breadth of connectivity and networking solutions that we have in the company.
For us, it is something that we're super excited about and something that we will be looking to pursue with vigor and with passion because we absolutely believe that a share of that market is ours.
Thank you. Next question is coming from buy-side investor. For your bridge on the AFFO per share long-term guide, can you help us frame the headwinds from the net interest expense and Build Bolder expansions impacting the underlying AFFO per share growth in your long-term outlook?
Yes. Well, the headwind is just to give everybody a perspective on what we've embedded into the model that we shared with you. And again, that's why I wanted to make sure we had a reference to the rate in which we borrow and the amount of incremental borrow that we have. So right now, interest -- net interest expense we're estimating given all the different moving pieces, and I'm talking about net interest expense is an incremental $200 million in 2026 over 2025.
As we take it out to the end of term, again, Daniel is in the audience here. And so some of -- hopefully, you get some time to spend with Daniel, who is our Treasurer. We anticipate we'll continue to fund the business. I wouldn't say equally over the next few years because it comes in chunks. And as we generate more cash, we put it back into the business. But we anticipate that we'll raise that incremental $6 billion over the remaining 3 years.
And as a result, our cash -- our net sort of interest burn by the time you get to 2029, it's $1 billion. So it gives you a sense on the carry that we have to invest in these assets to get them to -- unfortunately, in some cases, it's beyond the planning period that we're talking about in front of you here today. But that's why I thought it was really important to also share with you the types of returns that we're looking at in our business, particularly when we invest in major metros. So I'd just say, overall, look, it's a relatively heavy debt service cost. Our goal is to get it down.
We raised capital in Japan, as you know. We've done some in Switzerland. We just did some recently in Singapore. We're going to look at Canada. We'll probably go back to Japan and maybe some of the other markets. But you have to remember, those markets are relatively shallow. We also did a big raise not that long ago in Europe. We get preferential pricing of roughly 6 -- sorry, the [ $3.62 ] was the rate. So we're assuming, again, [ 4.9% ] is a pretty big number, but that's because the U.S. influence on it.
Our expectation is we'll drive that down and we'll optimize as best as we can. And as Adaire and I sort of gave you guidance, in February of next year, we'll have -- and before that, we'll give you more clarity because I think it is a big number. But I also wanted to make sure it got out there because you can't grow without investing. And we don't want to use our equity capital. And therefore, we want to use the debt capital. And just -- hopefully that gives you the perspective. I'm going to stop talking.
So the next 2 questions that came in are on doubling capacity as well. So we'll do a little bit of a deeper dive there. So the first one is from Frank Louthan at Raymond James. As you think about doubling your capacity over the next 5 years, maybe talk a little bit about -- more about your expected ROIC and how you expect that to change over the same time period.
Well, when you look at the returns that we're talking about, it's really accretive to ROIC. But the problem that you have is that you've got a bow wave of investment coming in, which dilutes ROIC when you -- and then you throw on real positive higher returning investments on top of that. So the answer -- the bias or the line of best fit is up and to the right but you have to then -- you have to break it down into its components on what's diluting versus what's accreting to the model. And suffice it to say, ROIC is going to go up. Just -- it makes sense, but you got to give us the benefit of time.
So the next question is kind of a second part to this. This is Richard Choe from JPMorgan. Our analysts always love more information. So the next part is, when you talk about doubling of capacity, how should we think about retail and xScale? How should we think about the mix of existing markets and new markets? And then any comments on domestic versus international?
Okay. Maybe I'll take that at a high level. I think we're very fortunate that we have access to our leadership team here today. And so Raouf is driving this for us. But when we look at the overall view, I think Keith alluded to the importance of the retail market for us and the importance of Tier 1 metros and the proximity to those metros and any investments that we make because it continues to perpetuate the Equinix value proposition. So that's obviously going to be a criteria as we look at the land that we are banking and the land that we are sourcing over the course of the next period of time.
We also have our xScale road map. That's very clearly defined over the course of the next period of time in terms of the bills that are underway and the land that we are pursuing for the next phase of our xScale program. So that will be something that goes very closely in tandem.
And then I know that Raouf has these numbers at the top of his head, so I'm going to ask him to take a microphone to Raouf there in a minute to give you this color. But we already alluded to the hike in capacity that's coming on in '27. And '27 will be a very different year for us in terms of capacity that will be available -- salable capacity that will be available to the teams in order to turn the investments that we've referred to here into revenue for the business. Raouf, could you perhaps just take a moment to articulate through the last couple of years and then '27, what you see, '28, '29 and the breakdown from there.
Yes, sure. Thanks, Adaire and I think you did a great job of sort of summing it up. But if you look at what we've historically been doing and then what we're doing this year and next, as Adaire alluded to, and as Keith alluded to, it takes some time to sort of develop data centers. And so '27 becomes a really important inflection point for us in terms of the capacity that we will deliver. And I touched on it in my presentation, we're looking at about 350 megawatts.
And then we foresee in the subsequent years that continuing to step up over the next sort of 2 years on top of that, so '28 and '29, sort of being more in the circa 500 megawatts per year range.
And I think one of the aspects of the question was what is the split between retail and xScale. And also, as Adaire alluded to in her presentation in her commentary, a significant portion of that remains pointed at our retail business. And so north of 60% of the capacities that I've been describing are more pointed towards the retail space. And so the real change in delivered capacity is much more about retail than it is our xScale capacity. But that, in addition, will also start to ratchet up with time. And so you can see over the course of that period, what's happening in the sort of the step-ups that we intend to have with time. Did I get all the aspects of the capacity question?
Yes, I think so.
Well, there's always more coming, Raouf. All right. And this is actually a good follow-up to this. So we have Nick Del Deo from MoffettNathanson, ask sort of a little bit of a longer question. So as you've been historically very disciplined about the types of deployments that you bring into core Equinix, should we be concerned that types of deployments you'll accept or fill will shift to all types of workloads that are more vanilla or more scale-oriented versus being interconnection-oriented. So any comments on that?
It's a really great question because I guess it speaks to the fundamental core element of the thing that really differentiates Equinix, which I think every presenter has highlighted is the interconnection and the interconnection capability that we bring to our customers who also took the opportunity to highlight that here today.
When I think about where we are today in our business, I don't think we have a demand issue. It's more a supply issue in terms of the capacity that's available to us today to serve all of our customers as they would wish and want to be served.
Managing a retail colocation facility is a little bit like managing a Tetris block. There's a lot of moving pieces. And even though you might look and say, hey, there's this much capacity that's free, Quite often, [ it isn't ] contiguous capacity, right? Or it might not be in a location that's the premium location that's going to best suit the workload that, that customer has. And in many respects, the team have done an amazing job over the last period of time harvesting capacity from our existing infrastructure in order to ensure that we can continue to serve customers like ServiceNow and others.
So I think it's super important that we recognize that one of the bases that which Equinix has already -- has always operated on is understanding the strategic nature of the workloads that we pursue and the work and the thought that we have in terms of putting the right customer with the right application into the right data center.
Nevertheless, it has been very clear to us that over the past period of time, the short period of time, 2 or so years, the customer ask of us has changed. It's changed in terms of density, and it's also changed in terms of megawatt size and scale. Now this doesn't mean that we would be moving into a wholesale large footprint environment because that doesn't distinguish what we do.
But it does mean that we would want the opportunity to be able to service customers who are strategic in nature to us and who are looking at beyond space and power, the ability to connect their business and to drive their business outcomes using Equinix facilities. So we definitely do see the size and the density changing. In fact, we've already acknowledged that. I think Jon made that very clear in terms of the work that we're doing to look to navigate capacity. But what we're looking forward to, most of all, is having capacity available at the scale that Raouf mentioned in 2027, which is really that inflection point especially on the revenue guide that Keith presented for the second half of that revenue guide to get into that double-digit zone.
So I'm going to take one more online. So I'm going to turn it open to the audience, so get your questions in the room ready. So the next question is from Jon Petersen at Jefferies. With the AI TAM expected to more than double in the next 5 years with a 23% CAGR, can Equinix maintain its market share and also double its revenue over that time period?
It's a great goal, doubling revenue over that time period. I mean, I certainly -- we mentioned already that we feel that our revenue growth is the 7% to 10% range in that time period. A key element of that is the capacity and meeting that capacity goal that Raouf has set for the team in '27. That's when we will see that inflection point in our revenue growth to the upper end of that range. And that's what we're all focused on driving.
Great. So we have microphones. Let's go ahead and open it up to the room.
Michael Elias, TD Cowen. Expansion drag. It's been a long time since we've talked about that. One of the things you said when you were talking about the CapEx is that not all of the benefit comes in, in the planning period. Did I catch that correctly?
That's correct.
Okay. If we were to normalize the CapEx after the planning period, what would that AFFO essentially be? Is it that 8% to 11%? And really the 5% to 9% that we're talking about is just the drag from the long-term value creation?
I think one of the ways to think about it is I referred to $7 of drag in the 2029 time period. So it gives you a sense of 100 million shares, that's a lot of drag in the business, right? And I was talking about -- I'm predominantly talking about our investment drag. Again, it's a term that we all use at least here.
There's the operational drag that's in the business as well as we continue to build out capacity and you don't go to -- you don't get to a cash flow breakeven generally right out of the gate, right? And so there's an element of incremental drag that's associated with that, that's embedded in those results. But I don't have that -- and we chose not to break it out. But suffice it to say, when you build the capacity that we're talking about, there's going to be an element of operational drag in addition to sort of financial drag.
All right. And then one other question is part of that. As we try and track -- now that you're giving us bookings, as we try and track your progress towards your goal, are there some key bookings milestones? I think you and I appreciate that you need to have records pretty much every quarter if you want to continue growing at the same rate? Are there any key bookings milestones that you have embedded in your plan that we should be tracking you against?
I'll maybe take that a little on the booking side. One of the things that we've been working to do on the booking side, I think you saw that reflected in Q1 is to try and even out some of the seasonality that you typically would experience in a booking cycle. Ordinarily, your Q1 would be lower than your Q4 because it's the starting point of that particular quarter or that particular year. And that's because the linearity goals that are typically set are based on seasonality and are usually lower.
This year, we heightened that number and had the team pursue Q1 almost as if it was Q5. And you saw that we delivered a better performance than we had done in Q4. So one of the things that we're working to do is to even out the seasonality so that there is a consistency. But I think to Keith's point earlier on, bookings by their very nature can be volatile, right? And so seeing the curve like that and heading up to the right was a lovely way of seeing the input to our revenue continue to grow but we should be cognizant that it is a metric that can move up and down, albeit that we are working to even the seasonality out of that metric for the financial year.
Maybe on that, so one clarifying question actually came in, and I'll turn it back to the audience. So from a buy side, on the bookings, can you help Keith with, does this include new leasing, renewal net pricing, and then does it include xScale leasing or just a little bit more clarity on the bookings definition we gave?
Yes, the booking definition does not include xScale, so separate that out. It includes the net pricing activity in the quarter. And I share that with you on a regular basis. I usually give you a view on whether it's net -- good net pricing actions in the quarter. That means the price increases more than outweighed the price decreases.
One of the things we actually track inside the business is the relationship have increased to decrease, and we're always usually trending anywhere from about 2.8 to 4x. So the price increases are 2.8 to 4x the price decreases. So it all depends on where you are in the cycle with the customer and what the price point is in the marketplace relative to that customer.
But for your benefit, we're not assuming any price escalators, if that was part of the question. It's not about leasing. It's what we book inside the quarter. And if you sign a 10-year contract, and it goes up 5% for the next 10 years per year, we're not bringing that into the quarter. We're just giving you what you should expect within roughly the next quarter with a book to bill interval of 60 to 90 days.
Yes. Just to clarify that, it's the bookings in the quarter where the expectation is that we turn that booking to revenue within 90 days. If we are unable to see a path to do that, then we don't declare that booking in that quarter, we'll declare it in the quarter where we will implement.
Well, because that goes -- will generally go into backlog. So we'll give you probably color on backlog, and that's something Adaire and I will be working on. But it's something that we're going to continue to work out. This is what we think the best model is right now. As we see information, we'll -- and we get input from all of you and those on the webcast to the extent that we need to shift, we can look and see does it make sense because we're missing something.
Great. Let's bring it back to the room.
Eric Luebchow from Wells Fargo. I think you just mentioned a little bit of the model shifting. I mean, previously, it was more about net cabinet additions, MRR per cabinet. I was wondering if we disaggregated your revenue growth outlook, thinking about it on a cabinet basis and an MRR per cabinet basis, how we should expect that to track? Or is that something that we shouldn't focus on as much going forward?
We think that -- well, first of all, we'll still provide that information to you, so you'll be able to see that because from a cabinet perspective, I think one of the elements that, that shows in the MRR per cap revenue is the actual totality of the value that Equinix brings over and above space and power, the kind of price point and price premium that we demand. But I think the inclusion of the bookings picture here just gives you another angle on the health of the business and how you can project that forward.
So I think it will just be something in addition to that allows you to look at cabinets maybe through the lens of some of the density scenarios that Jon has been describing there, obviously, as the density of our cabs increases, then so other metrics around that also changes.
And just one follow-up. Keith, you touched on churn a little bit how it's been elevated compared to the previous Analyst Day. Could you maybe touch on is the expectation still that 2% to 2.5% range? And anything you're doing to try to drive that to the lower end of the range over the next couple of quarters? Any visibility you have into that?
I'm happy to take that question. So I guess, first of all, we are still inside the range of 2% to 2.5%. I think when we look at our churn data, I mentioned earlier the notion that within our existing footprint today, the teams work hard to harvest capacity. And sometimes that means that at a point in a customer contract, we might take a customer and offer them maybe a different location in order to move a customer in who would have a premium price associated with that particular piece of capacity.
When you look at that, that obviously is something that has an impact on some churn that is initiated by Equinix, right, because we believe there's a pricing premium that we could command. There are pieces of churn that are addressable by us and pieces that are not addressable.
Some of the bankruptcies that Keith has alluded to and that you've seen appear in different earnings over the course of the period of time, they are not something that is necessarily addressable by us. The one thing that we have come to understand from the data that we are analyzing and looking at is that in order to impact churn in any positive way, it needs to be at a significant point ahead of the churn happening and often not even within the context of a single financial year. It can often be 16 to 18 months before the churn event.
Because when you think about a churn event from a customer point of view in our world, there is a significant amount of tasks that have to be handled in order for the customer to move from location A to location B. So getting that earlier handle is an important path. So even if we were to discover churn happening in this year, in the 2025 year, we probably have limited flexibility about what we can actually do to affect that outcome. It's more now with the lens to '26 because then there's an opportunity for us to begin to affect that outcome.
So actually, looking at the data, understanding the data in much more depth, understanding the signals that come into that data path and being able to predict those and then clearly identifying the churn that's addressable and not addressable by us means that we can hone our resources around where we need.
We're trying to get on the front end of some things. We definitely know that if customers are in more than 1 region with us or more than 1 metro. We also know that if customers have our fabric products or any of our software products, the propensity to churn is a lot lower. So we're doing attaches on those at the front end of the sales process because that then further down the line reduces that propensity.
So there's a whole series of different activities to address that challenge. But I think as we start to bring more capacity online, particularly in 2027, we'll have less harvesting activity amongst our existing footprint, and I think that will also have a positive impact on our churn dynamics.
Mike Rollins from Citi. Two topics, if I could. So the first, I'm curious if I could ask about the CapEx outlook maybe a little differently. So when you look at the change in annual CapEx or investment going forward versus like the '25 experience, how much of that would be from first addressing capacity where you have constraints? So you need to just get more capacity to sell in certain markets.
Second would be how much comes from more of the speculative opportunities in the future that would include your expectations for AI?
And third, how much would come from redevelopment or putting money back into existing campuses to turbocharge those opportunities? And I'll follow up on the second topic afterwards.
You want to take that? I think the third one is really around the recurring piece.
Yes. There's 3 other potential redevelopment properties we're looking at right now. That will add to both the recurring and some incremental, but it's not significant. So I want to put that to the side. It's important and we'll just highlight it for you.
Raouf, Miami 1 is one of them, right? DC2 Miami 1?
At least one other in Europe that's projected sort of from this year into next.
Yes. So again, not too much there, Michael. As it relates to what I call growth in emerging, I think there's always going to be -- I think there's those markets around the world that we're not in today that we should be looking at. And again, it's a decision that Adaire and ultimately, the Board will decide on. One that comes to mind right out of the gate would be [ REIT ]. We're not there.
And again, no decisions have per se been made. But that's -- there's not a lot. The thing that I really like about what Raouf is doing is and you can see it in our -- by the way, in our sort of expansion tracking sheet, like a DC17, a lot of this investment is going into markets that are either major metros or proximate to major metros because we have no choice, particularly where there's limitations. And so that's the exciting part.
And you take a DC17 that's 50 megawatts, that's a hefty Investment. So I would say that I don't have a rule of thumb, but it's probably more prone to that type of investment than it is emerging markets. And then I just think of the emerging markets on a separate topic, I think the -- like over a reasonable period of time, we have to look at where do we want to continue to invest.
One of the things I know Raouf has done under the Bill Bolder strategy is let's build it all out, but maybe we don't build any more in those markets. So we run them to cash. But those are decisions that will get made over the coming years, and we can elaborate a little bit further than that when we we'll go out to look at the information.
Secondly, on just margin expansion, if I could. When you look at the progression of margins that you're expecting over that multiyear period of time, is it a smooth path of margin expansion year-to-year? Is it loaded to the front end or back end? Just any context you have for that would be great.
Yes. I mean there's no line of best fit because some of the work that we -- that Harmeen and Nicole talked about, we're going to -- their investment -- sometimes you got to take a step back to take two steps forward. And I would just say that I don't want it to be linear, but I think it is -- obviously, we accelerate in '28 and '29 relative to '26 and '27.
I'm going to take one more from the online and then turn it over to our audience for our last question. So the online, this is from a long-only investor. As you think about the spin out to 2029, can you talk a little bit more about your stabilized assets and how you think those will be contributing to the AFFO in the forecast period?
Yes, look, the stabilized assets in and of themselves, we're getting attractive growth. It depends on where it is from a stabilized perspective. So clearly, some of the investments are going to allow us to accelerate our stabilized asset growth. Others are more mature, if you will. And so it's really about pricing influence and then maybe some incremental services.
But suffice it to say, I think our stabilized assets are going to continue to grow healthily largely because we're going to optimize around those investments and make sure the optimize around the IBXs when I talk about the investments. We're going to optimize around and drive it up while at the same time, trying to manage the cost model.
And I think that's really important to note that it's not just about going after SG&A or I would say maybe a little bit differently, SG&A as a percent of future revenue, I think will come at a lower percent than where we were historically. But Raouf is also looking at how does he optimize his cost of revenue lines as well. And that's through technology and the work that, again, Harmeen and Nicole referred to. So again, I'm excited about the stabilized assets, but a lot of the growth is going to come clearly from the new builds.
All right. Who is going to close off our last question of the day?
This is Irvin Liu from Evercore ISI. So I wanted to double-click on the topic of rack densification. I think during Raouf and Jon's presentation, they mentioned that average rack densities were trending higher towards 12 kilowatts per rack. Can you just help us understand how pricing on your high-powered cabs compare versus the more lower density cabinets? And if interconnection and attach rates were any different at all?
Okay. Jon, do you want to take that as you are the expert on our densification?
Can you hear me?
Yes.
All right. Great. I'd say, overall, what we've seen is pricing is firm or maybe even slightly higher on the like extremely dense deployments. The fact is there aren't that many operating environments on the planet that are capable of supporting them and operating those. So we've seen really firm pricing around that.
From an interconnection perspective, I'd just say the amount of interconnection per kind of customer deployment still is very healthy and strong. I think the size of the deployments can be bigger. So if you're measuring like interconnections per cabinet, that's probably a trickier metric to look at as we think about some of these large deployments. But on an interconnection like deployment perspective, they're still really healthy for these larger deployments we're talking about.
Thanks, Jon.
Are you finished, Irvin?
Actually, no. I've one more follow-up for you, Keith, actually. I wanted to ask about the xScale 2.0 program. And I realize that it might be too early to disclose any sort of long-term contribution to your model. But can you just provide us with an update on where you are in terms of site selection, land and power procurement any sort of customer pre-leasing discussions? And maybe what is the timetable for xScale 2.0 to eventually contribute to your model?
Yes. I can respond, but I think the best person to respond is Jon and/or Raouf.
Well, I think the essence of the question was where are we? I think we've announced one site that we're currently pursuing, which I mentioned in my presentation. We have a pipeline of other sites. So matrix is solely in the U.S. And we have several others that are in process that we're fairly close on but not in a position to disclose just yet. And more broadly speaking, xScale 2.0, we're pursuing sites of similar capacity and size across both the EMEA and the APAC region.
And we've got a robust pipeline of sites as well as power that we're pursuing currently. And obviously, we'll announce those in due course.
Perhaps I'll just comment on the funnel a little bit. I think that one of the things that we've stood up this year is we've had Tiffany come in to lead our xScale business and really focused in on how we're operating xScale operationally. And then the funnel that we're working through in order to ensure that as we move through the site selections and as we begin to move dirt on these site selections that we understand where our tenant -- who our tenant will be and when that will commence. So it's a very important part of the work that we're doing on xScale.
Great. So as we wrap up our main stage presentations, I just want to thank you to this entire audience for joining us today. We're next going to move to a little bit more fun part of the program, which is kiosk and cocktails downstairs.
So now the fun part is everyone with a red tag is from Equinix, and we have brought out the full set of the team. You'll see kiosk, you can work around. If you are looking for a particular person, ask anyone with a red badge, and we were happy to introduce you. With that, let me turn it over to Adaire for closing.
Really, let me just add my thanks to [ guests ] for your presence here today, both in person and online. We're very honored to have had the opportunity to spend some time with you and to share our thoughts. I hope that you can feel the level of confidence and excitement that we feel as a leadership team in the opportunity ahead.
We are investing in our growth and we are extremely confident in our ability to execute against the market opportunity ahead of us and to deliver returns for our shareholders as a result of that execution. So I look forward to continuing the dialogue with you over a cocktail or two this evening. Thank you very much.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Equinix — Analyst/Investor Day - Equinix, Inc.
Equinix — Analyst/Investor Day - Equinix, Inc.
📣 Kernbotschaft
- Kurzform: Equinix positioniert sich als zentraler Infrastrukturanbieter fürs AI‑Zeitalter: Ausbau von Kapazität und Dichte (Build Bolder), neue Produktivitätstools und Standardlösungen (Solve Smarter) sowie bessere Go‑to‑Market‑Exzellenz (Serve Better). Ziel: Mittel‑ bis langfristig deutlich wachsende Umsätze bei steigendem Margenprofil.
🎯 Strategische Highlights
- Build Bolder: Ambition, Kapazität bis Ende 2029 zu verdoppeln; 2027 als Inflection‑Year mit ~350 MW Auslieferung geplant; Fokus auf Retail‑Sites nahe Metros.
- Solve Smarter: Produkte/Services (z.B. Secure Cab Express, Fabric Cloud Route) zur Beschleunigung von Time‑to‑Value; Fabric ARPU stark gestiegen.
- Run/Grow: Operationale Vereinfachung, Equinix Brain (Data/AI‑Plattform) und Initiativen zur SG&A‑Senkung sowie 50% App‑Konsolidierung.
🆕 Neue Informationen
- Messgrößen & Zahlen: Einführung des Quartals‑Metrik "Quarterly Gross Bookings Annualized" für bessere Vorwärts‑Revenue‑sicht; CapEx‑Ausblick $4–5 Mrd/Jahr (2025–2029) und Investitionsumfang $20–25 Mrd.
- xScale & Technik: 326 MW geliefert, 154 MW im Bau (70% vorvermietet); Liquid‑Cooling in >100 Sites, 12 mit großen Produktionslasten; Fabric‑Verbindungen ~486k (0,5M erwartet).
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- AI‑TAM & Marktanteil: Management sieht TAM deutlich größer als früher (Zielvorstellungen bis $250bn TAM) und erwartet, Marktanteile durch Neutralität, Dichte und Cloud‑On‑ramps zu halten.
- Bookings & Definition: Neues Booking‑Metric schließt Netto‑Preisaktionen ein, excludes xScale; Ziel ist geringere Saisonalität und bessere Vorhersagbarkeit.
- Finanzen & AFFO: Erwartetes AFFO‑Grundwachstum 8–11% (unterliegend), aber reported AFFO‑Wachstum 5–9% wegen Investitions‑/Zins‑Drag (Nettozinsaufwand ≈ +$200m in 2026; Refinanzierungs‑/Kapitalbedarf ~ $16bn über mehrere Jahre).
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Analyst Day liefert klares strategisches Gerüst und konkrete operative Ziele: skaliertes Data‑Center‑Programm, Produktinnovationen und operative Vereinfachung. Wachstum erfordert hohe Vorleistungen (CapEx, Finanzierung), kurzfristig wirkt das als AFFO‑Drag; mittelfristig aber potenziell substanzielle Umsatz‑ und Margensteigerung sowie attraktive Kapitalrückflüsse für Aktionäre.
Finanzdaten von Equinix
Umsatz
Der Umsatz stellt die Summe aller Einnahmen eines Unternehmens z. B. für dessen Produkte oder Dienstleistungen dar.
Umsatz (TTM) einfach erklärtDirekte Kosten
Direkte Kosten sind die Kosten, die direkt im Zusammenhang mit der Herstellung des Produkts oder der Dienstleistung entstehen.
Bruttoertrag
Der Bruttoertrag gibt an, wie viel vom Umsatz nach Abzug der direkten Herstellkosten im Unternehmen verbleibt. Berechnet man den prozentualen Anteil vom Umsatz, spricht man von der Bruttomarge (engl. Gross Margin).
Brutto Marge einfach erklärtVertriebs- und Verwaltungskosten
Die Vertriebs- & Verwaltungskosten (engl. Selling, General & Administrative expenses, kurz SG&A) beinhalten alle Aufwände für Marketing und den Verkauf sowie die allgemeine Verwaltung des Unternehmens.
Forschungs- und Entwicklungskosten
Die Forschungs- und Entwicklungskosten (engl. research & development costs, kurz R&D) geben Auskunft darüber, wie viel das Unternehmen in die Forschung und die Entwicklung seiner Produkte investiert. Vor allem prozentual vom Umsatz und im Vergleich zu direkten Wettbewerbern sind die Kosten interessant.
EBITDA
Das EBITDA (Earnings Before Interest, Taxes, Depreciation and Amortization) ist der Gewinn des Unternehmens vor Zinsen, Steuern und Abschreibungen. Berechnet man den prozentualen Anteil vom Umsatz, spricht man von der EBITDA-Marge.
Abschreibungen
Abschreibungen stellen Wertminderungen von Vermögensgegenständen des Unternehmens dar (z.B. durch Abnutzung von Maschinen).
EBIT (Operatives Ergebnis)
Das EBIT (engl. Earnings Before Interest and Taxes) ist der Gewinn des Unternehmens vor Zinsen und Steuern, das auch als operatives Ergebnis bezeichnet wird. Berechnet man den prozentualen Anteil vom Umsatz, spricht man von
der EBIT-Marge.
Nettogewinn
Der Nettogewinn stellt den Gewinn oder Verlust nach Abzug aller Kosten dar.
Nettogewinn einfach erklärtaktien.guide Premium
| Mär '26 |
+/-
%
|
||
| Umsatz | 9.436 9.436 |
7 %
7 %
100 %
|
|
| - Direkte Kosten | 4.610 4.610 |
3 %
3 %
49 %
|
|
| Bruttoertrag | 4.826 4.826 |
10 %
10 %
51 %
|
|
| - Vertriebs- und Verwaltungskosten | 2.761 2.761 |
4 %
4 %
29 %
|
|
| - Forschungs- und Entwicklungskosten | - - |
-
-
|
|
| EBITDA | 4.244 4.244 |
15 %
15 %
45 %
|
|
| - Abschreibungen | 2.179 2.179 |
11 %
11 %
23 %
|
|
| EBIT (Operatives Ergebnis) EBIT | 2.065 2.065 |
19 %
19 %
22 %
|
|
| Nettogewinn | 1.422 1.422 |
53 %
53 %
15 %
|
|
Angaben in Millionen USD.
Nichts mehr verpassen! Wir senden Dir alle News zur Equinix-Aktie direkt und kostenlos in Deine Mailbox.
Auf Wunsch erhältst Du jeden Morgen pünktlich zum Frühstück eine E-Mail, die alle für Dich relevanten Aktien-News enthält.
Equinix Aktie News
Firmenprofil
Equinix, Inc. beschäftigt sich mit der Bereitstellung von Kollokationsflächen und entwickelt Lösungen für Rechenzentren. Das Unternehmen bietet sichere Schlüsselverwaltung, Beratung, Netzwerkvirtualisierung, Kundensupport und Managed Services. Sie ist in den folgenden geografischen Segmenten tätig: Amerika, Europa, Naher Osten & Afrika und Asien-Pazifik. Das Unternehmen wurde am 22. Juni 1998 gegründet und hat seinen Hauptsitz in Redwood City, Kalifornien.
aktien.guide Premium
| Hauptsitz | USA |
| CEO | Ms. Fox-Martin |
| Mitarbeiter | 13.716 |
| Gegründet | 1998 |
| Webseite | www.equinix.com |


